• The benefits of printing your work by Maarten Rots

    The benefits of printing your work by Maarten Rots

    Maarten-Rots-wall-detail

    (Words and photos unless otherwise stated is by Maarten Rots Maarten is an artist working with photography based out of Amsterdam. In his photographs you can see a sense of abstraction and surrealism found in everyday situations, captured by the camera. He loves printed photography and one of the ways he shares his work is through his self-published quarterly photography magazine March & Rock. Maarten will also give away a copy of of March & Rock. See the end of the article for details)

    Digital photography is definitely one of the most important developments in photography of the last decades. One of its few downsides though is the fact that your work often remains virtual, it lives on electricity powered devices only. I have made it a habit to regularly print my photographs and have benefitted from it in several ways. Next to having a hardcopy backup it can be of great help to your process, becoming more aware of your own choices and interests, but also gives you new ways of sharing and presenting your work.

    (more…)

  • 8 Life Lessons I Learned After Spending 3 Months on the Road

    8 Life Lessons I Learned After Spending 3 Months on the Road

    Cindy, the love of my life. Berlin, 2015
    Cindy, the love of my life. Berlin, 2015

    Dear friend,

    I am excited to share that after nearly 3 months on the road, I am finally back at my beautiful home in Berkeley. I just wanted to use this opportunity to share some life lessons I’ve learned during this trip, as long as some other meditations and ramblings:

    1. We are tiny

    I was on the plane, around 30,000 fleet in the air, and about to land in SFO. I just had a long flight: I left my friend Brian Spark’s home at 7am, after some good hugs and reflections on the trip, jumped on the subway, took the Arlanda express to the airport, waited in line to get my ticket printed, flew from Stockholm to Frankfurt (short 2 hour flight), then a longer-haul from Frankfurt to Montreal (8 hours), and then my final flight from Montreal to SFO (6 hours). I was able to watch “Mad Max” on the flight, finished re-reading “Antifragile” by Nassim Taleb, and also read a few chapters of “Letters From a Stoic” by Seneca. Great airplane reading.

    Anyways, when I was looking down from the plane’s side window, I looked down. I saw tiny cars buzzing around on the freeways, I saw little tiny homes, and I had a little mini-epiphany: we are all so tiny, our problems are so insignificant, our time here on earth is short, yet we complain, bitch, and moan about the small and unimportant things in life.

    Now you might be thinking: “But Eric, if you think that humanity is so small and insignificant, and everything we does doesn’t really matter in the grand scheme of things, what is the purpose of going on in life, and contuing to work hard?”

    Well for me, this is what came to mind: we are on this earth for such a short period of time, so rather than complaining about the small problems that we hvae in life, why not use that mental energy to produce something positive and good in the world?

    For example, my aspiration is that after I die, hopefully some of the things I wrote in this blog, the classes that I taught, the people that I met, and the love that I showed will have touched a handful of people. Touching those few people would have made my life worth it. I used to, but no longer have any ambitions to become mega rich, to drive a BMW, to own 100’s of Leica’s, or to have a million followers on Instagram. It is hard for me to constantly remind myself this; but I need to live for others, not for myself, and I also need to fuck fame, fortune, and external recognition. I need to do what I believe my life’s task (helping others), without a need for a pat on the back.

    2. Family is king

    I also wanted to share you something that was probably my personal favorite part of the trip.

    This summer before we left to Europe, Cindy had a great idea: why not bring our mom’s along? After all, both of them have been hard-working single moms (more or less) for their entire lives, and have never had a true “vacation.” They were always working hard, hustling, and trying to pay the bills, and to put food on the table.

    So we surprised my mom and Cindy’s mom by telling them that we were sending them on a trip to Paris (one week with us), a week on their own (in Italy, where they visited Rome, Cinque Terre, and Venice), as well as about 4 days together in Lisbon (cheap Ryanair flights made the decision for us).

    Anyways, it cost us a lot of money to do the trip for them. I think all-in-all, we probably invested $4,000 in their trip.

    Sure I could have used that money to buy a Leica lens, a maxed-out Macbook pro (with a shiny screen), some drugs (just kidding, I don’t take drugs), or some other crazy materialistic shit for myself.

    But one thing I learned in life so far: invest in experiences, not material things.

    I have no idea when my mom is going to die, neither when Cindy’s mom is going to die. But I knew that before investing in their trip, it would be a memory and an experience all of us (Cindy, me, my mom, Cindy’s mom) would remember for the rest of our lives. I imagined with my mom on her deathbed and being able to look back at all the happy memories in our life, especially this epic Europe trip.

    And a great investment this ended up becoming.

    Paris was fucking awesome. Imagine this: in our Airbnb in Paris (Place D’Italie), Cindy and I would wake up in the morning (late, around 10–11am), to the smell of amazing cooking. Both of our moms went to the farmer’s market in the morning, and bought fresh fish, veggies, and fruit– and the smell of their amazing cooking woke us up. Cindy and I would then drag ourselves out of bed, make some coffee (thank God, the Airbnb had a Nespresso machine and we were able to pick up some cheap pods at Monoprix), and then do some writing or answer emails. We would then all have a fucking phenomenal breakfast together, have a nice chat, then explore Paris like flaneurs (no explicit plan in mind, but just exploring the city without any stress or anxiety). We would see amazing sights, sit down in a nice cafe for a lovely espresso, and just spend time together as a family. Nothing super-fancy or special– the most valuable thing was the common experiences we were able to share.

    One thing that also brought me a ton of joy: seeing how much my mom enjoyed taking photos. I got a free LG G4 smartphone (for doing a YouTube review for it), and damn– the camera on the thing is pretty fucking amazing (sorry for cursing a lot, it is 5:40am, and I am still a bit jetlagged). No but seriously, it can even shoot RAW (never used it, but the image quality is much better than a Samsung S6 and iPhone 6). Anyways, the entire trip she shot nearly 20,000 photos (thank God for Google photos automatic unlimited backup), and seeing her take photos was a reminder to me; how beautiful the art of taking images is.

    My mom was like a child: she saw everything in Paris like from the view of a kid. She was amazed by everything, and literally took photos of everything. Her enthusiasm was infectious.

    I am such a ungrateful bastard by comparison; I’ve been to Paris a few times before, and now I feel a bit “jaded” by the exoticness out of all of it. I remember the first time when I went to Paris as a backpacking student in college (age 20) and was so amazed by everything. Now because I travel so much, I have dulled my appreciation and novelty faculties– meaning, nothing exotic really excites me much anymore.

    But seeing my mom’s enthusiasm for photography rekindled that “beginner’s mind” in me. It made me realize that for a beginner, everything is new, everything is possible, and everything is exciting. Just like how a child will find a few sticks and rocks infinitely fascinating, this has taught me a lesson: appreciate life around you like it was the first time you experienced it.

    So friend, don’t know if you have a mom, dad, uncle, aunt, child, or friend who is interested in photography but doesn’t have a camera (or the means to afford one). If so, help enable them with the gift of photography– give them (or buy them) a nice camera that will make it possible for them.

    3. Re-discovering gratitude

    Another thing that I have learned through my trip is this: happiness is about gratitude, not about having physical stuff, or doing interesting things.

    What do I mean by that?

    Well, you can own a BMW M3, wear a Rolex watch, own two Leica’s (one Monochrom and one M240), have a fancy house, lots of 0’s in your bank account, a beautiful wife and kids, etc– but still be unhappy.

    Why not?

    You might compare yourself to your neighbor who is a lot richer, more good-looking, more “successful” than you– and feel jealous, and ungrateful.

    But no matter how rich or poor you are, as long as you are grateful for what you have, you will be happy.

    I have rediscovered gratittude from Epicurus, who is an ancient philosopher who taught me that you could be happy, regardless of your external constraints. For example, you can be a street-cleaner making minimum wage, but still be grateful for your vision, your loving friends and family, and the fact that you have a job that keeps you out of the streets. That street-cleaner can actually be happier (by being more grateful) than a CEO who earns millions of dollars (but is hungry for more, and isn’t grateful).

    I am so fucking grateful for all the amazing friends I have in my life, for my health, and all the loving individuals I have met through my travels.

    People ask me what is the best thing about traveling around the world, teaching workshops, and shooting street photography. To be honest, it isn’t the exotic sights that I see, the fancy restaurants I go to, the touristy landmarks, nor is it the photos that I take. It is always the people that I meet, and the relationships that I make which matter most.

    For example, people also ask me, “Eric, aren’t you so bored of doing all these workshops? The content must be the same, and you must be able to teach them blindfolded. Aren’t you going to be bored of doing workshops sooner or later? Will you really do these for the rest of your life?”

    Well first of all, each workshops is never the same, as the people are always different. And every workshop, I try to do something a little different– to push myself and challenge myself (and the students).

    And once again, the greatest blessing of teaching workshops isn’t so much that I am “teaching” anything anybody. In-fact, I see myself more of an “enabler” – I try to enable the students to break outside of their comfort zone, but ultimately it is they who do it, not me.

    Not only that, but I believe in the mantra: “When one teaches, two learn.” I learn as much from the students (if not more) than the students learn from me. The students also learn from one another, which is the benefit of pairing up students in workshops.

    I’ve learned so much from the students in so many different ways. I’ve learned about difficult cultures, politics, social interactions, how to raise a family, how to have kids, how to treat others with kindness and respect, and how to not give a flying fuck of how others think of you.

    Some interview questions that I learned from Tim Ferriss (from his Podcast) were these:

    a) “As you’ve gotten older, what has become more important for you in life, and what has become less important?”

    b) “What are the common mistakes people make in ‘Activity X’ (child-rearing, buying a home, traveling, interior design, investing in the stock market, etc)?”

    Another question I ask a lot of my students (and people I meet in my travels is this one):

    What are your passions and what makes you happy in life?”

    Followed up with the question:

    What makes you unhappy in life?”

    I have a problem is that I engage too much in “small talk” – now I have been trying to avoid that by going straight into deep questions, and the meat of things.

    For example, I try to avoid saying (at all possible costs) the question: “What do you do for a living” or “What is your job?”

    Why? When you ask people what they do for a living or what their job is, what you’re really asking them is: “How much money do you earn, what is your social status in society, and are you a higher rank than me or a lower rank than me?”

    I once met a guy who was a passionate street photographer (and very talented), and found out afterwards that he was a janitor for a living. He had no loss of pride in saying it, but it made me feel shallow and quite shitty.

    Some people have “day jobs” just to pay the bills– but rarely is it their passion. So asking people “What do you do for a living?” is kind of a bullshit question. Why not directly go into the meat of things, and ask them what their passion is– what really turns them on in life? Then you get much deeper and meaningful questions.

    I also then ask “What makes you unhappy in life?” because I believe the secret of happiness is subtracting what makes you unhappy in life, rather than what makes you happy. Another lesson learned from Nassim Taleb: the avoidance of unhappiness is more effective than the “pursuit of happiness.”

    Things that I have realized made me miserable, that I have tried to cut out of my life include the following:

    • Commuting (or being stuck in traffic).
    • Networking meetings (only spending time with people I like instead).
    • Spending time with negative and toxic people (you are the average of the 5 people closest to you, cut out the “rotten egg” from your circle of friends, you will be much happier).
    • Media (television, blogs, newspapers, magazines. Rule of thumb; if there are advertisements in it, I don’t read it, or else I want to buy more shit).
    • Camera gear sites (everytime I read any of them, I suddenly get strange urges to buy a new camera I don’t need).
    • Sleep deprivation (learning to take naps, waking up without an alarm clock).

    But anyways to go back to the gratitude point, I am grateful for the life that I have. I am trying to eliminate desire from my life, which corresponds to more peace of mind and “happiness” in my life.

    4. Editing down

    Another thing I’m trying to do now that I’m back home is “editing down” my life.

    A funny thing: Cindy and I are considering getting rid of our car. Cindy’s younger sister got in a car accident recently, and needs to buy a new car. We’re only going to live in Berkeley for another few months (before we move to Vietnam for a year, and then perhaps France for 6 months–1 year), so we thought of this crazy idea: “Could we survive in Berkeley without a car?”

    I’ve always been obsessed with cars my entire life, and like all my fellow lazy Americans, I would rather drive 1 minute to the grocery store than (slowly walk) for 5 minutes. I always try to park closest to the entrance too, because walking is such a pain.

    But one thing I rediscovered in Europe which I love; most people don’t own cars. Not only that, but not owning a car is a benefit: you get less envious of others who have more expensive cars than you, you don’t need to pay insurance or gas, and you just end up walking more.

    Another idea I had: I want to spend more time in Berkeley, and to keep it “local.” I think the benefit of not having a car is that I will spend more time in my own neighborhood, taking photos close to my home, and not wanting to seek anywhere “exotic”. In-fact, I’m excited to actually walk to the store, talk to more people along the way, and even take more photos.

    I’m pretty sure that by not having a car, I will have much more interesting photos. I’ll take photos in the bus, the subway, walking around Berkeley, or wherever. When I’m in a car, I’m usually zoned out and removed from the outside environment.

    I talked about “creative constraints” before, but I think one of the ultimate creative constraints are shooting in a small geographic location. I think for the next few months, I will try to just document my life with Cindy and life in Berkeley more intensely; to make photos that are much more inwards looking, than outwards looking.

    5. I don’t need material possessions

    When I’m traveling, I always bring too much stuff. I have all these excess things that I don’t really need, and every subsequent trip I decide another thing I don’t need to bring.

    This trip has been the most “minimalist” I have been so far, and it has been beautiful. I then ask myself, what kind of material things do I really need in my life?

    I’ve also realized that honestly, we don’t really “need” any material things. They are nice to have, but we can survive without them.

    All we “need” in life is freedom from starvation, freedom from thirst, and freedom from the cold. Everything else is optional.

    Things that are nice to have in my life include:

    • Camera and one lens
    • Laptop
    • Smartphone (honestly this is extraneous too)
    • Kindle (prefer it to carrying around a lot of paper books, although I prefer paper books)

    Besides that, I realize I don’t need anything else.

    I just got home literally 8 hours ago, and I’m looking at all my “stuff” on my desk, shelf, closet, whatever– and I’m thinking to myself, “Why do I need all this shit?”

    The funny thing is that when I’m traveling, I don’t miss any of my stuff. In fact, having less stuff has brought me more clarity of thought and happiness to my life.

    So I think for the next few months I’m going to try an experiment: everyday get rid of one thing (or better yet, donate it). I’m going to try to purge myself of clothes I haven’t worn in a long time, photography books (donate to friends, sell on eBay, or donate to library), “normal” books, and any other nick-nacks I might have lying around in home.

    My grand plan is this: I want to fit all of my life’s possessions into one back (Thinktank Perception 15, which I bought with my own money in Aix-En-Provence which is fucking brilliant), and take it to Vietnam. Just two pairs of each clothes (Uniqlo airism shirt, Exofficio boxers, quick-dry socks), camera, film (I romanticize shooting only film in Vietnam), laptop, smartphone (only need it for Google Maps and What’s app), my Kindle (for books).

    Honestly all of my physical stuff is superfluous.

    My photo books? Sure I love them, but I can see all the images online (magnumphotos.com). I prefer real physical books, but at the end of the day– the emotional impact I get from the images is more important to me than the medium it is presented on.

    My philosophy books? All can fit on my Kindle. For me, the information is what inspires me more (than the presentation). Once again, physical books are preferable and give me more peace-of-mind, but lightness is the key for me.

    My “keepsake” possessions, like old photos and letters? Will probably store those with my mom (like my negatives, hand-written notes to Cindy, and any other things of sentimental value). I reckon these can all fit into a small box.

    Another thing me and Cindy are trying not to do until we move to Vietnam: not buy anything new for a year.

    Honestly, we deal with the disease of affluence– we have subscription to “Amazon prime” which makes it so easy to buy shit (free 2-day, sometimes same-day shipping). Our apartment is pretty small, and we’re pretty much to the max of all the physical stuff we have.

    For a while I wanted to buy a grinder for my espresso machine, but I am starting to see the benefits of not buying new stuff.

    For example, not buying a new grinder means that I will be more motivated to leave the house and visit cafe’s in my local neighborhood.

    Not buying new clothes: re-discover the clothes I don’t wear that I already own.

    Not buying new photobooks: re-read old photobooks.

    I’m the ultimate sucker for consumerism and capitalism. I always desire to buy new shit. But what are some ways I can cut off this desire?

    • Not read any magazines (seriously, I see so many damn Audi, BMW, Rolex advertisements in them that cause unnatural cravings, it isn’t even funny).
    • Any photography blogs (99.9% of them are about reviewing cameras, selling cameras, and my rule of thumb; don’t trust any camera review site with affiliate links, even this blog).
    • Not going to the mall (everytime I go to the mall, I end up buying shit I don’t need, because the advertisements sucker me into thinking if I bought a new shirt, I would be more handsome and liked).
    • Interacting with rich people (rich people love to talk about their physical possessions, and the new thing they just bought. Everytime I interact with these people, I want to start buying new shit (as I compare myself with them). I want to spend time only with people who are down-to-earth, don’t flaunt any of their material possessions, and are frugal and value-oriented.

    Honestly, I don’t know how this “no car”, “no buying new stuff” will work out. Apparently Leo from zenhabits.net has done it with great success. That guy is a saint, with human flaws, but promotes good values.

    6. Printing more stuff

    I also realized from my travels (especially after staying with my buddy Brian Sparks who has a beautiful and well-curated photobook library) that I love printed material.

    The irony; I said I don’t want to travel with physical objects (like photoboks, prints, and physical books), but at the end of the day– they kickass anything digital.

    I love holding a physical photobook, appreciating the smell, texture, three dimensionality, the weight, the feeling of flipping pages, and the fact that it exists in the physical world. I aspire on making more prints, photobooks, and plan on trying to keep it local (getting it all printed here in Berkeley), and perhaps selling it and giving away to friends and close ones.

    I am a sucker for digital; but when it comes to putting together photo projects, I think printing small 4×6’s and making sequences is far better than doing them on some sort of digital device. Yeah, the iPad is the best thing when I’m on-the-go, but now that I will spend more time at home, I want to start covering my home, my desk, and my life with physical prints– and to give them away as much as possible.

    7. When in doubt, be generous

    I have this weird relationship with money. Ever since I was a kid, my parents would get into so many fights, arguments, and violent encounters due to money. We never had enough money growing up, and it caused my Dad to gamble the rent money, for my mom to beg her friends and family for money. So for me, whenever I think of money, it feels dirty, brings up bad memories from the past, and makes me think it is the “root of all evils.”

    A nice quote I picked up from Seneca: “Wealth is the slave of the wise man, but the master of the fool.”

    I am very fortunate that as time has gone by, the workshops have been selling out, and for the first time in my life, I actually have 0’s in my bank account. I finally have enough money that I don’t need to stress out or worry about the rent. I finally have money that I can take an uber without feeling guilty about it. I can finally eat out without feeling physical pain (I remember when I was a high-schooler or college student I would pretend not to be hungry when my friends would eat out, because I literally had no money).

    So I am in an interesting position: I am now earning more money than ever, but rather than trying to become a slave to my wealth, I want to learn how to be more generous, and also cut back my own lifestyle.

    I have a new heuristic (rule of thumb) in life: “When in doubt, be generous.”

    For example, there are many psychological studies which show that if you spend money on others, it brings you more happiness than if you spend it on yourself.

    I always find the best use of money is to make others happy. Otherwise money is quite useless.

    For example, I always try to pay for my friends or family for dinner. Why? There is nothing that tastes better than a free meal, and also having 10 people get a free meal (and 1 person paying for it) brings more joy than the pain that every individual has when paying the bill.

    Not only that, but the more generous you are, the more generous you inspire others to become.

    For example, at my last workshop in Stockholm, I surprised the students by being sneaky and paying the whole bill for everybody. That brought a lot of love and gratittude to the room. Happy stomachs = happy lives.

    The thing that actually made me the most happiest: on the last day of the workshop, one of the students, Martin, did the same thing: he paid for the entire bill for everybody.

    Now I’m not saying that he wouldn’t have picked up the bill if I didn’t do so in the first place– but I’m sure that my first act of generosity might have nudged or inspired him at least a little bit.

    I also have found the irony of being generous: the more generous you are with others, the more you receive in return.

    So not doing generous acts as a selfish thing (expecting others to do it back to you)– but it is a unintended side-effect. And sometimes the benefits come back to you, sometimes they don’t. A great book to read on this (for free on Kindle) is Seneca’s “On Benefits.”

    Also one of the life lessons I learned from Cindy in college was the concept of “Pay it forward.” When you do a random act of kindness for someone else, rather than trying to get the person to repay you the favor, you ask them to “pay it forward” by doing an act of kindness to someone else.

    So to all the students who I paid for the meal, I just asked them to repay me back by taking out a friend (or group of friends) to dinner, and paying for the bill. Then these acts of kindness will cascade, kind of like a domino effect.

    And what is a better use of money than to spread love, generosity, and happiness in the world?

    I have also found that giving away or donating things has brought me far more happiness in my life than simply selling it. Yeah sure if I sold a camera I could make $500–800 bucks, which is nice. But the happiness I bestow upon a friend who needs a camera brings me infinitely more joy than simply having extra cash.

    But don’t get me wrong, giving away stuff is painful. I am a selfish human being, who looks out for my own well-being.

    But reading a lot of stoic philosophy made me realize that in life, there is really so little that I need to survive. All I need is eggs, coffee, and wifi. Everything else is optional. And these things are easy to get.

    So my hope is this: to continue to build my wealth, but also continue to be more generous. I want to do more philanthropy and community-related things, and help others in need. I grew up in the lower socio-economic spectrum, but I am so grateful for all the love and help that I got from others in the community. Now I need to repay the debt, by dedicating my life in serving others.

    I need to tape: “Fuck you money” to my wall. I need to do things not to seek money, but because it is genuinely helping people.

    But at the same time, I don’t want to see money as an evil. Because what is money good for?

    Money is good because it pays my rent, and I don’t go homeless.

    Money is good because it gives me freedom to do things I actually enjoy (like writing this, instead of relying on going to a 9–5 job).

    Money is good because I can use it to be generous to friends and people in need.

    Now what if you have a 9–5 job that you hate, and you feel like a prisoner with no free time in your life?

    A few options:

    a) Quit your job

    Honestly, nobody is holding you back from quitting your job and picking up a new job that will earn you less money, but give you more freedom of time.

    People ask me, “Eric, when your street photography workshops no longer sell out, what will you do to make a living?”

    I would probably just become an uber driver or barista, and do the minimum amount of work possible (to pay my bills and food), and to have the maximum amount of time to do what I’m passionate about.

    Or another option: move to a cheaper city or country. You can live very comfortably for only $1,000 a month in a lot of southeast asian countries. If your passion is travel, writing, photography– whatever, make that sacrifice. Living in the west is overrated, and way expensive. You can always pick up a job teaching English overseas, working remotely, or working for a year in your own city and saving up a lot of money and just living off your savings in India, Cambodia, or Vietnam.

    b) Work less hard at the job you’re already at

    To be honest, having a “day job” is a blessing. You have the bills paid for, a steady income, often health benefits, and other forms of security.

    I think instead of quitting your job, just appreciating the job you have is a better option.

    What do most people regret when they’re on their deathbed (read the “5 Regrets of the Dying” online)? One of them (especially for men) is that, “I wish I didn’t work so hard.”

    So take this lesson from these wise older people (about to die). Don’t work so hard at your job. Do the minimum amount of work not to get fired, or at least don’t answer emails after 6pm or on the weekends.

    Once you’re off work, you own your time, your activities, your schedule.

    Use the money you earn from work to buy photobooks, travel, make prints and give them away for free to friends and family, to buy friends dinner, and other ways that you can “pay it forward.”

    8. On cultivating your own garden

    I have a problem: I feel extreme guilt when I disappoint others. I need to stop worrying less about what others think about me, and focus on cultivating my own garden.

    Publilius Syrus has a saying, “Do not water your neighbor’s garden if your own garden is parched.”

    Similarly, I know that the more I take care of myself, the more I can be of service to others.

    So I need to learn how to be more greedy with my time– to focus on writing, reading, and doing other activities which make me feel happy and fulfilled, and to load my schedule with fewer appointments, and to create more “white space” in my life.

    Conclusion

    Not sure what is going to change now that I am back here in Berkeley. I will spend less time worrying about what others think of me, less time trying to “network”, less time worrying about money and finances, less time forcing myself to take photos I don’t want to take, less obsession with material things, less stress and anxiety, less drama, and less bullshit.

    Thank you so much for reading this friend. I hope you can also continue to live a happy, productive, and meaningful life.

    Don’t worry about all the bullshit in your life. Your life is short, live it to the fullest. Squeeze the marrow out of life, and live like everyday is your last– because who knows when we will meet the grim reaper.

    Farewell,

    Eric

    Written @ Berkeley, Wed, Sept 2, 2015 (9am) with a nice espresso in the morning, another espresso (with coconut milk), and a third espresso (okay, I need to cut back now, feel that weird throat thing again). But fuck it, I’m not giving up coffee, it brings too much joy in my life.

    Some reading materials for today: “Screw it, let’s do it (lessons in life by Richard Branson)” and “Epicurus: The Art of Happiness.”

    Hope to have a nice lunch with my homie Walter here in Berkeley, relaxed, maybe answer a few emails, and cook a yummy dinner for Cindy :)

  • You Only Live Once

    You Only Live Once

    Toronto, 2015
    Toronto, 2015

    Dear friend,

    You might have heard the term “YOLO”, which stands for “you only live once”. However I think most people misconstrue the word. They think that it means to live a life of hedonism and pleasure, and give themselves the license to do stupid shit and waste their time and money.

    For example, let’s say that I have to go to work tomorrow, but I’m out with my mates and they ask me if I want to drink some red bull and vodka shots. Instead of being a responsible human being and knowing that I shouldn’t (because I need to go to work tomorrow morning), I might say “YOLO” and drink the red bull vodka shots. But of course, this is an idiotic thing to do.

    Don’t waste your life

    We’re only given one life to live.

    I had a friend that I knew ever since I was a kid. We weren’t super close, but some horrible shit happened to him: when he was 16 years old, he went out with a bunch of friends (5 total of them in a car). They were driving home, and suddenly a 16-wheeler (drunk driver), ran a red light, hit them head-on, and killed all 5 of them in the car, instantly.

    Another story: Cindy’s mom knew a man who came one day to his wife, who was complaining that she was tired. The wife put their (newborn baby) to sleep, and then she went to sleep herself. She never woke up. Apparently she had a hidden brain aneurism and died in her sleep. Her husband forgot to say “I love you” before she went to sleep.

    You want to live life without regrets. You want to live life to the fullest. You only live once, so why do we waste this short period of time we have on earth seeking material possessions we don’t need, seeking to increase the 0’s in our bank accounts, to constantly delay our gratifications and dreams in lieu of something in the future that might never come?

    Don’t be a slave; follow your dreams

    We all have a dream. I’m sure you have plenty of dreams as a photographer. I’m sure there are so many places you want to travel to and see, I’m sure there some photobooks you want to buy, I’m sure there are photo projects you want to pursue.

    But what is holding you back?

    I know in the past, I always made excuses for my external situations in life holding me from pursuing my dreams.

    For example, I always made excuses that it was my full time job which held me back from traveling. But in reality, it was myself who held me from traveling. Meaning, I intentionally didn’t travel because I didn’t want to look like a lazy worker, and I wanted to look good in front of my boss, and get a raise. So it was my fear of not getting a raise which held me back from traveling.

    I wanted to pursue some photography projects. But what held me back? My wasting time going out to drink and party, not the fact that I didn’t have enough time or energy.

    I used to complain all the time that I never had enough time to go out and shoot. Rather, in reality it was myself just making excuses for myself. Even when I had my full time job, I had plenty of time to shoot before work, during my lunch break, after work, and even when I was with my friends and family. But to be really honest, I always thought my camera wasn’t good enough, and the day that I owned a digital Leica, I would suddenly be inspired and take photos of everything. But I was just suckered by marketing at the end of the day, as I did eventually fall into my lust in pouring my life’s savings into a Leica m9, and not finding myself any happier with the Leica, nor more inspired.

    Don’t imagine you will life a long life

    I have a fear that I’m going to die young. Some call it “unhealthy”, but I think it’s fucking great. Why? I don’t waste a day of my life.

    I used to read all these self help books about saving up money, waiting for retirement at age 65, and then finally being able to travel, do what I want, buy a BMW, whatever.

    But fuck it, in reality you never know when you’re going to die. And living a long life is uncertain. Even living another day is uncertain.

    I know I sound melodramatic, but you don’t know if you (on the way of driving to work), you might get tired (not sleeping enough the night before), accidentally swerve into the other lane, and get killed by the oncoming traffic. You never know if you’re just walking, you slip, crack your skull on the pavement, and die. You don’t know if a drunk driver will run a red light, and kill you. You don’t know if you might have a heart attack, if you might have anaphylaxis from an unknown bee or food allergy and choke to death, or if you might somehow get poked in the eye (or have some chemical accidentally spilled into your eye), and become blind (and never able to see and take photos again).

    So why delay your happiness and your gratification? Don’t delay, live now. Photograph now. Don’t make your happiness and freedom hostage of some sort of uncertain future.

    What can you do now?

    I’m not telling you to quit your job, sell all of your stuff, and travel the world and eschew your family and children. Rather, I’m saying that you should try to use today like it were your last day on earth.

    If you knew tomorrow you wouldn’t wake up in the morning, how would you live your life differently today?

    Perhaps you would invest in a photobook at a local store or be inspired by photos at the library. Perhaps you will go to that one part of town you want to go (after work) and make a few images. Perhaps you will share an unfinished project with a friend, and ask him or her to give you some feedback. Perhaps you will make more photos of your loved ones and friends (because you’re never sure when they will die either).

    I have a personal rule; whenever I say “goodbye” to a friend, I imagine that I will never see him or her ever again. We aren’t certain if we will die tomorrow, how can we be certain that our friends will continue to live in good shape?

    I have a friend who is 75, and his fear is not waking up in the morning– literally. So whenever he goes to sleep, he literally imagines that he won’t wake up the next day. Part of it is fucking frightening, but when he wakes up in the morning, he rejoices to God and says, “Thank you God for another day of life!” I personally don’t believe “God” as some sort of dude in the sky with a beard. But I do believe that we should be grateful to some sort of deity “out there” or “wisdom of the universe” to grant us another day. Or if you’re totally atheist, just be grateful that you didn’t die in your sleep, and that you can use another day to live life to the fullest.

    You’re only given one life

    We’re all given one life to live, no matter how rich or poor.

    Many of us (especially us Americans) live our entire lives trying to seek power, wealth, prestige, and security (the belonged “American Dream”). However many of us die along the way in vain.

    Never be jealous of someone who is richer or more materially “successful” than you. You might drive a Honda Civic, he might drive a BMW 7-Series. But how many years of his life did he waste trying to get that car in vain? How many asses did he have to kiss? How many sleepless nights did he have to work, and how many weekends did he have to go into the office and spend time away from his family?

    The worst trade you can make in life is to trade time for money. The best trade you can make in life is to trade money for time.

    Why is that? If you lose $100, you can always earn another $100. If you lose 1 year of your life, you can never “gain” another year of your life.

    Let’s take this a step further. Would you rather waste $1,000 on a new camera or lens, or use that money to “buy” vacation time and travel the world and have experiences that you will never forget?

    Don’t get me wrong, I’m a sucker for buying shit I don’t need. But what helps me (prevent me from buying cars, cameras, clothes) is imagining how out of date and ugly they will look like in 2 years time. No matter how slick the new iPhone is today, it will look like crap in 2 years time. No matter how hot the new BMW is, it will look shitty in a few years time (once the new and hot model comes out). Same with digital cameras, remember how sexy the Leica m9 was when it came out? Now it looks like a dinosaur, lots of users are having sensors that are failing and cracking, and now the new Leica m240 is so much sexier. I look at old Leica m9’s and think, “Damn, those look like crap compared to the new leicas.”

    So fuck money, fuck trying to please others, fuck kissing ass, and never think that you have another day to live. Because nobody is certain.

    Live this day as if it were your last.

    YOLO, you only live once.

    Love always,
    Eric

    Tuesday, September 8, 2015 @ 7:03am, about to drop off Cindy’s parents to the airport after a nice weekend together. If I died today, I would have no regrets. A life full of love, friendship, and family. And good coffee (had a v60 pour over with Ritual coffee I picked up in San Francisco yesterday).

    For further reading, read “On the shortness of life” by Seneca.

    My current book I’m loving: “The cynic philosophers from Diogenes to Julian”, published by penguin classics.

  • There is No Wrong Way to Shoot Street Photography

    There is No Wrong Way to Shoot Street Photography

    Toronto, 2015
    Toronto, 2015

    Dear friend,

    I wanted to write you this letter, sharing with you some of my personal thoughts that here is no one “right” or “wrong” way to shoot “street photography.”

    I think when most people think about how you “should” shoot street photography, they look at the life and work of Henri Cartier-Bresson, and simply assume that everyone else needs to shoot the same way that he did.

    But remember, “not every single shoe fits every single foot.” What I think, my friend, our goal is… is to discover what approach in street photography works for us (not for others).

    There is the wise Greek saying, “Know thyself”. But many of us spend our entire lives seeking to know who we are. Therefore in order to discover who we are, we look into the lives of others. We look at those wiser than us, and try to emulate them.

    But the problem is this: you a unique human being different from everyone else. Simply following and copying others isn’t going to help you find the ultimate wisdom and truth that we are all searching for.

    For example, one of the things that I think a lot about is my health. I’ve read hundreds of health books, from paleo, to low carb, to high carb, to low meat, to high meat, to ketogenic diets, to the “warrior” diet. The problem? These “one size fits all” diets rarely apply to the individual.

    For example, as an Asian-American there are several things I am very intolerant of in my diet: these include dairy (milk, cheese, whey) as well as alcohol (I get “Asian glow” and turn red when I drink, because my body cannot synthesize alcohol very well). Furthermore, I have recently discovered that I’m allergic to certain nuts (cashews, pistachios), allergic to shellfish (shrimp, oysters, lobster), and also (slightly) intolerant to avocados, coconut, and some fruits (plums are a new addition).

    The problem of these diet books and programs is that they assume that the majority of their readers are Caucasian, and therefore can handle dairy, alcohol, and other foods. But they rarely account for these Asian intolerances.

    So it has taken me a long ass time, but I’m starting to realize that for the secret to my personal health, it is all about subtraction. So some things I’ve subtracted from my diet, which has made me feel a hell of a lot better:

    • Gluten (bread, pasta, etc)
    • Simple carbs (anything white, like white rice, white bread, white pasta)
    • Shellfish
    • Most fruits (too sweet)
    • Dairy
    • Legumes (beans, peanut, etc)

    By simply eliminating these things from my diet, I’ve been able to have more focus, less lethargy, and more clarity of thought.

    But once again, this is just works well for me, as an Asian American with lots of allergies. What diet works well for you is dependent (much on) your background, upbringing, and physical condition.

    What are you intolerant of in photography?

    As there is no one “right” diet in health, there is also no one “right” way to approach photography, street photography, or even life. You need to find the shoe that fits you.

    For example, a lot of street photographers I know prefer to ask for permission. Why is this a problem?

    A lot of street photography “purists” believe that you cannot (and even worse, should not) ask for permission before taking a photo of a stranger. That’s totally fine, but they should keep that opinion to themselves, instead of trying to cram it down the throats of others.

    Similarly, some people like processing their photos in HDR and doing selective color and whatever. Personally, I’m not a big fan. But if that makes them happy, why not let them do that?

    Why get upset and your panties tied up in a knot on how others shoot or approach street photography? Let them be, let them do what makes them happy, and leave them alone. In life, we can only control of how we do things, not how others do things on their own.

    This doesn’t apply to everybody else

    I’ve read so many interviews, and written a lot of the “Learn From the Masters” series. My biggest takeaway point? A lot of these “rules” are simply guidelines, and there is always an exception to the norm.

    For example, I believe it’s important to “work the scene” and take a lot of photos of a street scene. But William Eggleston did the opposite: he would only shoot 1 photo of a scene, no more or no less. He still made brilliant shots.

    Henri Cartier-Bresson sticked with one camera, one lens for his entire life and black and white film (Leica and 50mm). That worked well for him. But Josef Koudelka has shot with several cameras over his 50+ photographic career, including an SLR and 25mm lens, a Leica and 35/50mm lens, a panoramic camera, and apparently now he’s shooting landscapes on a Leica S2 medium format digital camera. He is still able to make brilliant images with lots of different cameras.

    I used to think that when you’re working on street photography projects, you needed to go out with a single mission in mind, and not deviate from it. But other photographers like Elliott Erwitt simply go out, take photos of random stuff that interests them, and then compile books after 30 years of shooting.

    I used to think that you should never mix black and white in a set of images, or in a photobook. Recently I’ve seen lots of great examples that prove otherwise (Todd Hido is a great inspiration).

    Like I said in a prior letter to you, we need to learn how to kill our ego, kill our beliefs, and kill our theories which keep us trapped in, and narrow minded. We need to learn how to embrace “child’s mind”, in which the whole world is open to possibilities.

    Everyday you are reborn

    One thing I try to do:

    Whenever I wake up in the morning, I imagine I’m a baby, or a child again. How would I live this day of my life, if I had no residue of my past holding me back? Meaning, I want to live everyday like if it were a new day. I don’t want to be held back by my prejudices, rigid views of the world, or any of the things that I hold onto my ego.

    For me, I have a big ass ego (and a pretty big dome head). I have a hard time killing my beliefs, and letting them go. I think that everyone should listen to me, that I know the ultimate “truth”, and that I need to “educate” others about the “true way”.

    But that is bullshit. I don’t know shit. I’m still trying to remove the black dust in front of my eyes. The window of my soul is still covered in dirt and soot. I still have so many demons crawling around my soul, who am I to simply tell others what to do, when I don’t have any of my personal problems fixed yet?

    The quote I try to always think about is from Socrates: that the only thing that I’m certain of is that I know nothing.

    So once again, I don’t know shit. But I do know a few things which have helped me along the way, which is why I am sharing this letter with you, friend. We’re both friends lying in the same hospital together, afflicted with similar illnesses. I feel that I have learned a few remedies that have helped me, and am simply sharing it with you. But once again, these remedies have helped me, but not necessarily might help you. So all my suggestions in my letters, try them out friend, but if they don’t work for you, throw them away.

    One of the reasons I wrote this letter is because for so long, others have told me how I “should” shoot street photography, rather asking me how I wanted to shoot street photography. They never asked me what brought me the most happiness in street photography (which is talking with strangers, and taking their portraits). So after many years of struggling, I’ve found out one of my true callings in photography: “street portraits.” It perfectly suits my personality (I’m very comfortable talking with strangers, I’m curious to learn about their lives, and I’m drawn to faces and interesting characters). At the moment my biggest inspiration is Richard Avedon. But once again, this might change as I continue to evolve and grow as a human being as a photographer. But it’s so funny that it’s taken me this long to discover what approach in street photography makes me happy.

    And I think that’s what “style” ultimately is in photography. It isn’t how your photos look, or the projects you work on. Your “style” in photography is just an extension of your voice as a human being. If you find yourself shy, awkward, and don’t like to interact with strangers– utilize that. Don’t talk with strangers, shoot candids, and feel no guilt about it.

    If you hate human beings, and prefer landscapes — shoot urban landscapes, flowers, sunsets, whatever makes you happy. Who gives a fuck if the Internet or the art world doesn’t “respect” you as a serious photographer? Why do you care if one day everyone is bowing before your very feet, but you yourself aren’t happy with yourself and your photography?

    I’ve had so many instances in which I’ve shot photos that are really popular on the Internet, but I don’t personally like. On the other hand, I’ve shot so many photos that nobody likes, but I myself love.

    Who should you listen to at the end of the day? That’s right, your own heart.

    Conclusion

    Follow your own heart, follow your own voice, find out what style or approach in photography makes your “heart sing”. Fuck the opinions of others, and don’t give a shit if you get a lot of likes on social media or not.

    As an experiment, try to disconnect, and to keep your work offline. Shoot first to please yourself, then when you feel ready, share it with others. Then if others like it, that’s fine. If they hate it, that’s fine too.

    Now go forth my friend, shoot like a child, discovering photography for the first time. Have fun, smile, and live your photographic life to the fullest.

    Love always,
    Eric

    Written at my beautiful home in Berkeley, overlooking my balcony, enjoying a nice cool breeze, the chatter of Cindy and her parents voices, the sound of birds, the nice greenery of the trees, all while typing on the iPad (with ia writer application). Had a nice espresso mixed with frothed coconut milk (I know it hurts my stomach, but at least I tried it once).

    Other random thoughts

    I know you probably don’t care about these random thoughts friend, but just wanted to update you on some of my thoughts.

    First of all, I’m trying to continue this “subtract one thing at day” from my life. I’ve been donating tons of clothes, tons of books, and essentially I want to pare myself down to what I truly need in life, not what I want.

    Some other things I plan on subtracting:

    • Kindle (I read lots of books on it, but prefer the paper books in my house).
    • Smartphone (I’m honestly a slave to it. I am trying to figure out how I can manage to do everything on my iPad instead).
    • Flash (I’m trying to not shoot with a flash with my Leica for a while, as it adds unnecessary weight and bulk to my camera, and I’m also dependent on batteries).
    • Not pushing film (I usually push my film to 1600, but it makes the processing more expensive. I might try to just shoot it at 400, and learn to be more creative by shooting with slower shutter speeds indoors or in the shade. I realized that shooting with a low ISO can be a good “creative constraint”.
    • Going keyboard less (I usually type these letters on my iPad and keyboard. But the keyboard is pretty big and bulky, so I’m experimenting typing without the keyboard, like I’m doing now. I prefer the tactile feedback of a keyboard, but at the end of the day, a keyboard is superfluous and just a luxury.
    • Variety in diet (yeah I know variety in diet is the secret to longevity and health. But I’m trying to remove more irritants from my diet, and going to continue to strip down to the essentials, and see how things turn out).
    • Not writing down notes (I always write down notes in my books, and on notebooks when reading books. The problem? It slows me down, I am forced to sit down, which hurts my back. I’m going to try to experiment to read paper books without writing notes, and see if I’m going to be able to retain the information better in my memory).
    • Not forcing anything (trying to embrace a more “Wu Wei”, go with the flow style of living. Lot less stress, which is more happiness).

    Anyways friend, thanks for listening to my random thoughts. My smartphone is off for today, I plan to enjoy a nice trip to the Golden Gate Bridge with Cindy, her mom, and her dad, and to live like today was my last! Farewell friend, and have a beautiful day :)

    Btw, if you have nothing to do today, don’t forget to read a free copy of the book: “The Street Portrait Manual“.

  • You Can’t Control the Results, Only the Effort

    You Can’t Control the Results, Only the Effort

    14927140512_67c698983a_b

    “You can’t control the results, only the effort.” – Ryan Holiday

    Ryan Holiday is a guy I admire very much he’s about my age, and has accomplished a lot. He’s a best selling author, practicing stoic (highly recommend his book, “The Obstacle is the Way), passionate blogger, and overall down to earth guy.

    I read this quote on his Twitter a while back, and it really struck a chord with me.

    In life, we are told that if we work hard, we will achieve everything we want in life.

    Not necessarily.

    We can control the effort we put in, but not necessarily the results.

    For example in street photography. What can you control in terms of effort? You can decide to shoot everyday, to be focused (turning your phone to airplane mode when shooting), you can decide to invest in photographers books (and not gear), you can call up another photographer to do a critique session together, you can study composition and learn how to “work the scene”, and you can study the work of the masters.

    But you can’t control the result.

    What is the result in street photography? You ultimately can’t control whether you get a good shot or not. You can’t control the weather (although you can control when you go out and shoot), you can’t control what people look like, you can’t control what the city you shoot in looks like, and you can’t control whether all the elements of a scene will come together perfectly.

    But we can control the editing process; deciding which shots to keep, and which to ditch.

    So this is today’s meditation: detach yourself from the results, and enjoy the process.

    I’m easily disappointed. I want every photo I take to be brilliant. But 99.9% of the time, I take shitty photos. If I get 1 shot I’m happy with every 50 rolls of film, I’m doing well.

    The problem I have with shooting digital is this: it makes me focus too much on the results, not the effort.

    Having an LCD screen on a camera is a blessing and a curse. The blessing is that when we’re starting off as beginners, “chimping” helps us quickly learn from our mistakes. But as we get more experienced, the LCD screen is a crutch; it is more of a nicotine addiction. Checking the LCD screen is a sign of our insecurity.

    Furthermore, assuming that a good street photographer only gets one good shot a month, the likelihood of one photo being half good is a extremely low probability. Checking your LCD screen every hour, or checking your photos on your computer everyday, has a very low “signal to noise” ratio. “Signal” are the good shots that we get. “Noise” is the bad photos that we take. So after 8 hours of shooting in a single day will result in a few (or no) good photos and a lot of bad photos.

    Furthermore I find that the expense of shooting film is a blessing, not a curse. Why? Whenever I’m about to click the shutter, I got “skin in the game”, meaning, everytime I click the shutter it costs me something. Therefore I am very considerate before I take an image. I’m a lot more picky and selective before I shoot.

    “But don’t you lose a lot of shots because you’re afraid to click the shutter?”

    Not at all. What I do is this: I’m picky with the scenes I decide to shoot, but once I find an interesting scene, I’ll shoot an entire roll of film on it.

    For example, I might go an entire day of not seeing anything interesting. But once I see something good, I’ll “shoot the shit out of it.” So rather than taking 1-2 photos of everything, just identify 3 good scenes a day, and try to shoot 30+ photos of each scene.

    If you shoot digital, take 50, 100+ photos of the scene. For one of Alex Webb’s most famous “Barber Shop” image in istanbul, he shot 10 rolls of Kodak Kodachrome on it. Like Henri Cartier-Bresson once said, “Sometimes you got to milk the cow a lot to get a little bit of cheese.

    Apparently even Josef Koudelka shoots 1,000 rolls of film a year. And his book “Exiles” which took him over 10 years contains fewer than 80 images. Less is more.

    Morale of the story? Shoot a lot of photos, but be very selective which you decide to keep.

    Don’t be disappointed

    Ultimately you shoot street photography because you love it. You have enough stress and disappointment from your job, income, family life, etc. Why add additional stress, anxiety, and disappointment to your photography — which should be your joy and passion?

    Hustle hard when you’re shooting on the streets, but fuck the results. Of course you want to get good shots, but don’t be disappointed if you don’t.

    How can we be less disappointed when we’re shooting on the streets? Some ideas:

    1. Don’t chimp

    Turn off your LCD preview. If you can’t control yourself, tape it up with gaffers tape. Better yet, shoot film (then you truly won’t be tempted). I have no self control when it comes to chimping, so shooting film is the ultimate solution.

    Also make it a point to look at your images infrequently as possible. I’d say if you shoot digital, let your photos “marinate” for at least a week before looking at them on your computer. On top of that, I’d suggest waiting at least a month before deciding to upload them. For me personally, it takes me about a year before I can fully emotionally detach myself from my images and identify whether my shots are truly good or not.

    2. Enjoy the walk and a nice coffee

    One piece of advice I got from my friend Jack Simon: don’t go out and shoot “street photography.” Just tell yourself: “Today I’m going to go on a nice walk, enjoy the city, have a nice chat with some strangers, and enjoy a nice coffee. And I’ll just take photos of whatever is interesting to me along the way.”

    Enjoy the process. The journey is the reward.

    “The good traveler is not intent on arriving.” – Laozi

    3. Don’t upload your shots

    I think more photographers should keep their work offline, and not publish their shots until they’re truly ready.

    This is also great because it allows us to make images we’re happy with, rather than just uploading images that please others.

    Whenever I upload an image to social media it is a lose/lose situation. If I get a lot of “likes” on a shot, then that becomes my new standard. And if I get any fewer “likes” than that, I get disappointed.

    For example, before I deleted Instagram from my phone last week, I would get (on average) 800-1000 “likes” a shot. This made me hungry for more. But whenever I got “only” 500 likes, it would make me feel shitty. I would self doubt myself, my inner serenity would be disturbed, and I would feel like a failure.

    Not uploading any new shots has been insanely refreshing. I feel more peace of mind, more happy, and less stressed.

    So if you’re addicted to social media and the approval of those little virtual red hearts, try an experiment: go 30 days without using any social media. Just uninstall Instagram, Facebook, Tumblr, Flickr, whatever from your phone for a month. See how you like it, you can always reinstall it after the 30 days.

    Conclusion

    Don’t worry about making good photos. First of all, just enjoy yourself. Have fun. Don’t add unnecessary pressure or stress or disappointment in life. We already deal with enough of that bullshit.

    But still, hustle hard, try to push your limits in street photography (only compare yourself to yourself), and realize photography is a journey.

    Godspeed my friend, you got this shit!

    Love,
    Eric

    *On the way from Stockholm back to Berkeley! So excited to see cindy back home, and wish me a safe flight. Got 2 transfers, one in Frankfurt, another in Montreal. Gonna also try fasting from eating, apparently it helps with jetlag. We’ll see. Lots of cool new stuff I have planned for the blog, plan in printing more physical books (art books and instructional manuals), etc. So stay in the loop, and thanks always for your love generosity, and time in reading this.

    Now go shoot :)

  • On Killing the Ego

    On Killing the Ego

    image

    Dear friend,

    I have a problem I need to share with you: I have a huge ego.

    I love compliments, I love external validation, and I absolutely hate being criticized, judged, or ignored.

    Recently one of the things I am trying to do in life is to kill my ego.

    How am I trying to do this? I want to share some practical things I have been doing in my life, which has helped me (a bit).

    First of all, I don’t try to self-identify myself. I just see myself as a bag of bones, flesh, and a mind that is just an inter-connected bunch of electrical activity in my brain. I don’t see myself as having a “soul” necessarily (although I do believe that others have souls).

    How do I learn to better not self-identify with myself? I try the best of my extent to not use the words “mine”, “I”, “Eric”, etc. Sure I often have to use the word “I” when writing (it just flows better), but I try to eliminate it from all other forms of my life.

    For example, I am extremely defensive and self-critical of the photos that I take. Whenever people criticize the photos I take, I take it personally. However what has helped me is that no longer call them “my” photos, but “the” photos.

    What is the difference?

    By referring to the photos I take as “the” photos, I am emotionally disconnecting myself from it. I don’t see the photos as my own children, nor do I even try to remember that I shot the images. Rather, the photos exist by themselves, as an external thing outside of me.

    Therefore this helps me to be more critical to the photos I take. After all, it is easier to always criticize the photos of others. So I try to think to myself and imagine that the photos I took were actually shot by someone else. Then I can be brutally critical and honest, and take out the chainsaw and “kill my babies.”

    Secondly, I try to practice self-deprecating humor. That means, taking the piss out of yourself, or making fun of yourself.

    For example, I got into an argument with Cindy the other day, and she criticized me for some of my behavior. Rather than becoming defensive and justifying my behavior, I simply agreed, and then brought up other faults that I had that I told her that I wanted to work on.

    Similarly with photos, whenever they get criticized, I try to point out the other faults in the photos, and also share the fact that I am not a good photographer; simply trying to improve.

    Another example: whenever people leave negative comments on the blog by telling me that I am a shitty writer or photographer, I try to retort by saying: “I am a terrible cook as well, and don’t fold my sheets in the morning.”

    I also need to remind myself that at the end of the day, I don’t really matter. I am nothing but a tiny ant in a huge ant colony. If you zoomed out on Google maps, identified my house, you would see how fucking tiny it was. Even smaller; my tiny human body, my tiny human mind, and all of my petty possessions.

    One thing I mentioned in earlier letters to you, my friend, is how I am trying to be less materialistic, and not be attached to my physical stuff. I am now experimenting with another rule: everyday try to donate 1 physical object, or give it away to a friend. Eventually I want to reach the point where I am absolutely free of all baggage of physical materials.

    Even at the moment, I am starting to realize all the superfluous baggage and physical shit that I have.

    I recently have become attached to my Kindle, which is a bad thing. I realize that the Kindle is just another superfluous item; I would prefer to just travel with 2 wonderful paper-back books (“Meditations” by Marcus Aurelius, “Letters From a Stoic” by Seneca) than having to overwhelm myself with having too many books.

    Even when I plan to move to Vietnam, I think if I could only bring 1 photobook it would be “Exiles” by Josef Koudelka. The book is an experience; everytime I look through it, I experience a different story, a different set of emotions, and am never short of inspiration.

    Even with my smartphone, I have been uninstalling one app a day from my phone. I recently got rid of my email from my phone, Evernote, Spotify, and other applications I thought were “essentials.” Currently the only apps I use on it are Google Maps, texting, What’s app, and not much else. And to be honest, I don’t even need those things, a “dumb-phone” will probably be sufficient. My dream is to (eventually) not own a smartphone, and to go “phone-less.”

    But the problem is that my ego is attached to my physical stuff. I am currently going through old photo albums, old knick-knacks, and other physical remnants from my past (high school) – and I realize; I am no longer that person in the photograph. I am a totally different person, so why become attached to that past? And if you think about it, throwing away an old photo album shouldn’t cause physical or mental pain (but yet it does). Why does it? Because we are attached to our sense of ego; that we think that we are the photos, but we’re not.

    Lately, I’ve also been trying to take fewer photos. I try to savor the moment, rather than frantically documenting every moment of my life. I am trying to approach a new “wu-wei” style of “unforced” photography, where I don’t need to photograph everything out of a sense of obligation, but to only take photos when I truly want to.

    Today I am going to Napa Valley with Cindy and both of her parents. In the past I might have brought all of my cameras, film, gear, and stuff like that. For this trip, I’m just bringing my smartphone, and don’t feel obliged to take photos if I don’t want to. In-fact, I have learned from a psychological study that whenever we take photos of events in our lives, we are actually less likely to remember it. Why? Because whenever we document an event in our lives, we are subconsciously telling our brain: “Oh don’t worry about trying to commit this to memory, because we can always look at photos in the future.” But the problem is that honestly, we will probably never look at those photos again. Another reason I stopped taking photos of my food: I used to try to take photos of all these fancy meals that I had, but realized a funny truth: I never looked back at these photos. So why shoot them, and who gives a shit what kind of food that I put into my stomach? I’m just going to shit it out anyways.

    Another problem I have been having recently: I’m starting to seriously re-think the idea of shooting film. I love the process, I love the zen-ness of it all, but the idea of having all these rolls of film and negative encumbering me is a nightmare. I currently went through the closet, looked at all of my (very unorganized) negatives, and thought to myself: “Holy shit, will I ever have the opportunity to re-scan all these negatives? And to be frank, will I be sad if I lost these negatives?”

    The only reason I would probably keep my negatives is the hope that some archivist or historian keeps a record of my negatives, for “posterity” or whatever. Almost like how Gary Winogrand died with several thousand negatives of undeveloped film, and he just let others take care of it.

    But anyways, I gotta head out, pick up a rental car, and pick up Cindy’s parents from the airports. I hope these random musings are of some help to you friend, and I will share some other thoughts in the future about how I am trying to actively kill my (very big) ego.

    Love always,

    Eric

    8:45am, Sunday, September 6, 2015 (after 4 shots of espresso)

  • Cultivate Your Own Garden

    Cultivate Your Own Garden

    Toronto, 2015
    Toronto, 2015

    Dear friend,

    I want to share some meditations and thoughts that are currently on my mind– and perhaps tell some stories. Thank you for being a good friend and listening :)

    Okay, so I woke up today, lied in bed, and suddenly this thought came to my head:

    “Cultivate Your Own Garden”

    I woke up naturally in bed, and am still pretty jetlagged, so I knew it was probably pretty damn early. It was pitch black, I slept last night at around midnight (compared to around 8:30pm the night before), so my body was pretty exhausted. But at the same time, I knew that I had to write this article on this concept of “cultivating your own garden” — it felt like my moral duty.

    I dragged my wretched body to the shower, took an ice cold shower (feel much better now), looked in the mirror, and saw the deep, black bags under my eyes. God, for a 27-year old I look like a fucking old man.

    Regardless, I felt a great sense of privilege and duty. I have a stronger calling in life, than just lying around in bed and sleeping. Here was a thought that came to mind, one of my favorite passages from Marcus Aurelius’ “Meditations” (one of the 3 books I would have on my deathbed). It took me a bit flipping around my personal (paperback) book copy to find it, but here it is:

    “At day’s first light have in readiness, against disinclination to leave your bed, the thought that ‘I am rising for the work of man‘ Must I grumble at setting out to do what I was born for, and for the sake of which I have been brought into the world? Is this the purpose of my creation, to lie here under the blankets and keep myself warm? ‘Ah, but it is a great deal more pleasant!’ Was it for pleasure then, that you were born, and not for work, not for effort? Look at the plants, the sparrows, ants, spiders, bees, all busy at their own tasks, each doing his part towards a coherent world-order; and will you refuse man’s share of the work, instead of being prompt to carry out Nature’s bidding?”

    I walk out into the kitchen, prepare a nice espresso, and look at the clock: 5:00am. Not bad.

    Cultivating your own garden

    So friend, I want to share with you a story. Currently my younger sister Anna is having some difficulties in her life; in terms of finding what her life’s passion is, what makes her happy, and how to live a fulfilling life to contribute to society.

    As a follower of “Stoic” philosophy, one of my main tenets in life is to live my life for others; for the good of others and society. So at first, I gave my sister advice in terms of asking her: “How can you best use your God-given talents, to contribute to the most people of society, as a whole?”

    I quickly realized that this was the wrong answer to give her. Because she didn’t know what her talents were, nor did she know a way she could apply her talents to help “society at large.”

    It is a pretty difficult concept to think about how one can help hundreds, if not thousands of people out there. I am lucky in the sense that I know that I can reach a large audience with this blog, as I have the stats that show me that I am doing it. But at the end of the day, I write this letter for you, my dear friend, not for the many. It is easier to try to help one individual, than try to help millions (and much easier to visualize too).

    But before one tries to help society, another person– I believe that one needs to help themselves.

    This is where this concept of “cultivating your own garden” comes from.

    Another philosopher I greatly admire is Epicurus, a Greek philosopher (341-271BC) who made one of the most influential schools focused on the pursuit of happiness. He was born on the Greek island of Samos, and he operated “The Garden” — a school devoted to philosophy and communal living, which was based outside of Athens.

    I first came across this concept of “cultivating your own garden” from a book written by a scholar on Epicurus, titled: “Reclaiming Epicurus“. Here is a nice quote from the book:

    “All that is very well but let us cultivate our garden” – Voltaire

    The whole philosophy of Epicurus was this; to seek “pleasure” by seeking “absence of pain”. The 4 tenants of Epicureanism were distilled into these concepts:

    1. Nothing to fear in God;
    2. Nothing to feel in Death;
    3. Good can be attained;
    4. Evil can be endured.

    In other words:

    1. Don’t be afraid of God
    2. Don’t be afraid of Death
    3. Realize you can be happy with little
    4. Don’t be afraid of bad things happening to you (because you will be able to have the strength, courage, and tenacity to endure it).

    What made the philosophy of Epicureanism highly criticized was that it sounded like it promoted the values of social detachment, as it encouraged individuals to retreat from society, and seek inner-solitude, peace, and contentment (rather than interacting with the public world at large). This is why the Stoic philosophers criticized Epicurus and his followers, as they thought them as selfish, navel-gazing good-for-nothings who simply lived for their own pleasure.

    The early philosophy of Epicureanism is very similar to Buddhism– to seek happiness in life, first rid yourself of stress, anxiety, desire, and frustration. Then you can reach out to help others.

    Don’t think you’re selfish

    Okay friend, so I know a lot of people who want to seek happiness in life. They are frustrated with their own lives. They are dissatisfied with their jobs, their family lives, their lack of time to do what they are passionate about, their lack of money, and deal with a lot of stress and anxiety in their lives.

    So what is the first step to living a fulfilling life?

    I think it is by starting to cultivate your own garden.

    Imagine you have a garden. To cultivate your own garden is to take out the weeds, insects, pests, and other shit from your own garden (before attending to and helping out the garden of others).

    So imagine your garden which is infested with aphids (eating your delicious tomato plants), with snails (little fuckers who also like to eat everything), with your plants wilted and dying (they need more water, light, attention, and love), and weeds growing out of control.

    Before you just add water and sunlight to your garden, you need to first start by removing the pests. You need to kill the aphids (pesticide or attacking them with ladybugs), you need to kill the snails (take them off your leaves, and toss them into a garbage bag with salt– no that is cruel, I did that as a child and it mentally scarred me), you need to also make sure you don’t have random wild animals eating plants from your garden in the evening (perhaps cage off your plants with some wire).

    Secondly, you need to start nourishing your plants. You can start off nourishing your plants by starting to add water, fertilizer, light, and love.

    Then and only then, can you start having a healthy garden. And then and only then, can you start attending to the gardens of others in your neighborhood and helping them out. After all, it makes no sense for you to try to help tending the gardens of others (if your own garden is a fucking nightmare).

    I think this is a good philosophy we can apply to life.

    So to restart, our own garden infested with pests and insects is like our own lives being infected with negative people, with back-stabbers, with shit-talkers, gossipers, and other people who drain you of mental energy, physical energy, and emotional energy. You need to start off by eliminating all the negative people in your life.

    “But they are my friends! What will they think of me? Isn’t that me just being selfish? But I know they’re not perfect, but who is? I just want to help them out!”

    Let me bring you a real-life example:

    My father is someone I have cut out of my life recently, and it is something that I did that pained me a lot. Long story short, he was a mentally and physically abusive father to my Mom, compulsive gambler (would sometimes gamble away our rent money, and even gambled away some money I lent him as a 16-year old), and leech to the family. I don’t blame him; I honestly think he had some serious mental issues that he just took out on the family. Now I have nothing but love for him, but I have made the conscious decision to cut him out of my life, because he was like a cancer, a tumor, or a black cloud that was sucking out energy, life, and joy from my life.

    The problem was this: because he added so much emotional guilt and blackmail to my life, I couldn’t be of help to others. I was constantly thinking negative thoughts in my life, and that would deeply affect the lives of those close to me.

    First of all, I would take out all this negative emotions and thoughts on Cindy. This would then cause her more stress and anxiety (if she didn’t have enough). Not only that, but I would tell my personal issues regarding my father to my mother, who would also feel guilty for not being a more supportive mother.

    I tried to essentially “save” my father, by trying to spend more time with him, by trying to console him, and trying to be a “good son”. Part of this was me trying to be a good human being, part of this was this sense of “filial piety” (Asians feeling indebted to their parents), and part of this was a feeling of guilt– that I somehow owed him something (when in reality I didn’t).

    But anyways, the more time I spent with him, the more his negativity, brainwashing, and cancer of bullshit ideas started to permeate my thoughts. The only way I can describe it is this: imagine if someone threw you into the sewer, and suddenly you were covered with shit, piss, and imagine how you would smell. No matter how hard you try, you can never really scrub off that smell from your body.

    Similarly, spending time with negative people is the same way. Once you are exposed to their filth, stench, and negativity– scrubbing that shit off can be near-impossible.

    So anyways after about a year of trying to re-connect with my dad and help him, I realized that before I could help him, he had to help himself. And if I truly wanted to dedicate myself to help the “common good” of society as a whole, I needed to cut him off from my life, to remove his negativity– to cultivate my own garden.

    So I cut of all ties with him. I blocked his phone number, his text messages, his emails– any sort of way he could communicate with me.

    In the beginning it was so fucking painful and difficult. I would seriously get nightmares that he would suddenly die, and then I would feel extreme guilt and remorse that I didn’t do more to help him out while he was still alive. I would feel like a bad son, and feel like a horrible, selfish human being.

    But as time went on, I finally started to have some clarity of thought. I started to feel more positive, and less negative. I felt like the dark clouds from my mind’s sky were starting to part; and I could see the light.

    Seeing the light

    There is a Taoist saying that in order to see the light, you need to take away the dark clouds from your mind.

    So to continue, life and happiness is all about removing the negative people, influences, and thoughts from your life.

    To use the garden analogy again; it is more effective to remove pests from your garden, then to start using fertilizer for your plants.

    Going back to my Dad, I still feel guilt and remorse for not reaching out to him. I talked to my sister Anna about this the other night, and honestly at the end of the day, some people are “unsaveable” and that is just a damn shame. But c’est la vie. That is life. Life goes on. And the only thing we can do is trust God (or whatever super-being or universal will you may believe in) that everything will turn out okay in the end. In Taoism they call it “wu-wei” — not forcing things, and letting the intelligence of the universe guide you through life.

    Life is fucking hard

    Yeah, it is true– life is fucking hard. I know friend, life is really fucking hard. As Seneca once said, “Sometimes even to live is an act of courage.

    But if you really want to help others; you need to start off by helping yourself.

    So don’t feel bad or guilty, start off by helping yourself.

    Let me share some more personal anecdotes and stories of how I learned how to cultivate my own garden, before trying to help others. I don’t mean to share these ideas as a way to say that I am somehow better than you or “enlightened” — because I’m not. I’m just another wretched and psychologically troubled human being trying to rid my mind of negativity and bullshit, in order to live a “happy”, “fulfilling”, and “productive” life.

    1. Be selfish with your time

    The most valuable currency you have in the world isn’t money, but time. Time is the ultimate non-renewable resource. If you lose $100, you can easily earn another $100. But if you lose a year of your life, you can never “gain” another year of your life. Life is a ticking death clock, and everyday you are living one less day of your life. Death approaches one day at a time.

    The ironic thing is that we are so stingy with our money, but (overly) generous with our time (to a fault). This is because money is a tangible thing, whereas time is intangible. Therefore we don’t value our time.

    So the first thing that I learned is that in order to cultivate my own garden, I need to be stingy, frugal, and selfish with my time.

    I said this before, but one of my new goals for this year is to (as little as possible) go to “meetings”, especially partake in this beastly thing called “networking.”

    At the end of the day, it is a huge waste of your time. Apparently the way that Seth Godin is able to be so prolific as a writer, blogger, and author is that he doesn’t go to any meetings.

    Not only that, but every “meeting” can fuck up your entire day and schedule.

    For example, I have been to a lot of “networking meetings” in San Francisco. It takes me an entire day. I have to leave my house, either drive into the city (now I don’t have a car, I would have to take public transportation for 1.5 hours), wait for the person, try to contact them, have a coffee, and then maybe have a lunch, eat a little too much, then get food coma, want to take a nap, go home, and end the day not feeling productive at all.

    Another personal rule I have been trying to institute in my life: I don’t schedule anything before noon. Why? The morning is my golden time to read, write, and do things that I feel truly make my “heart sing”. I am the most productive in the mornings, so I need to be as selfish and greedy with that time as humanly possible, in order to help the greater good.

    So also for you my friend, learn to be more greedy with your time. Don’t have an “Atlas Complex”– feeling like you need to hold the weight of the entire world on your shoulders. Give yourself some space, time, and energy for yourself (before giving it to others).

    For example, be selfish with your time after work. After 6pm, make your default answer “no” to any sort of extracurricular activities you aren’t passionate about.

    The funny thing is especially with a lot of introverted people, they feel constantly pressured by extroverts (people like me) to go out, party, hangout, and have a good time. They are constantly criticized for being “loners” and there are billions of self-help books that teach you to “never have lunch alone”, to always go out and network, to always build new connections, and to always say “Yes” to every single opportunity that comes.

    But no, fuck that. Say no. If you want more time to shoot street photography, you need to CUT from your life. You need to cut extracurricular activities. You need to cut those pre-scheduled gym classes or 7pm Yoga classes you aren’t passionate about. If photography is the most important thing in your life (or you want more time to shoot), say NO to having dinner or a beer with friends or people you don’t really care about. And even if they are someone you care about (but shooting photography is more important than having dinner and chatting about random stuff), have the courage to say NO.

    What else can you say “no” to in life to find more “free time”? Some ideas:

    • No to Netflix
    • No to smartphone notifications (either set your phone on mute, turn off notifications, uninstall apps that bother you, or do what I do; uninstall one app from your phone a day)
    • No to networking meetings
    • No to dinner or drinks with people you don’t really care about
    • No to “side-projects” from your boss at work
    • No to checking email after 6pm and you’re done with work
    • No working on the weekends
    • No playing video games
    • No reading newspapers
    • No reading magazines
    • No surfing the web (reddit, Facebook, other social media sites)

    Be selfish, greedy, and protective of your time– it is the most valuable thing in life you have.

    Then use that spare time to cultivate your own garden, however it makes you happy. Use that time to shoot photography, visit exhibitions on the weekends, read photography books, meet other photographers, have your work critiqued by others, sit at home and edit your shots, sequence new projects or series, print your photos (either on a home printer or in a darkroom), develop some film, watch a photo documentary (make sure to watch “Salt of the Earth” by Sebastiao Salgado), or cook a meal for a loved one (everyday I am trying to cook a new fancy dinner for Cindy).

    And realize at the end of the day, photography isn’t the most important thing in life. The most important thing is your personal happiness; which you can derive from photography, any sort of other creative pursuit, friends and family you truly care about, and living a life in accordance with your own personal values and ethics.

    2. Disassociating yourself with others

    I have a problem: I cannot say “no” to people. I am a total push-over. I have always been one of the kids who have been easily peer-pressured into doing things against my own will. Even now as an adult, I have a hard time saying “no” to my good friends, especially when they peer pressure me to drink alcohol (I prefer not to drink alcohol anymore, as it makes me feel shitty, gives me hangovers, and ruins my sleep), when it comes to going out late at night (I prefer to sleep early now, so I can wake up early and write), when it comes to eating unhealthy food (I don’t like excess fat on my body, and unhealthy food makes me feel like shit). I am so easily influenced by others, and don’t want to disappoint others.

    Here is some wisdom that I have learned from Epicurus (another Stoic philosopher) who has helped give me some peace of mind when it comes to ignoring what others think of me, and following my own heart and path:

    “You should be especially careful when associating with one of your former friends or acquaintances not to sink to their level; otherwise you will lose yourself. If you are troubled by the idea that ‘He’ll think I’m boring and won’t treat me the way he used to,’ remember that everything comes at a price. It isn’t possible to change your behavior and still be the same person you were before.”

    Epicurus continues:

    “So choose: either regain the love of your old friends by reverting to your former self or remain better than you once were and forfeit their attention.”

    Sometimes when you pursue some new passions and directions in life, you will be ridiculed, tempted, and detracted by friends, colleagues, co-workers, family members (who might be jealous of you):

    “Formerly, when you were devoted to worthless pursuits, your friends found you congenial company. But you can’t be a hit in both roles. To the extent to cultivate one you will fall short in the other. You can’t seem as affable to your old cronies if you don’t go out drinking with them as of old. So choose whether you want to be a charming drunk in their company, or dull and sober on your own. You can’t expect the same reception from the group you used to associate with if you don’t go carousing with them regularly anymore.”

    It is really fucking hard, but we need to value our own beliefs and virtues over what even our close friends might think of us:

    “You have a choice: if you value dignity and restraint over being called a ‘sport’ by your old mates, then forget other considerations, renounce them, walk away and have nothing more to do with that crowd. If you don’t like that, then commit to the opposite course with all your heart. Join the [wretched] set, become one of the degenerates– do as they do and indulge your every impulse and desire. Jump around and yell at a musical performance, what’s to stop you now?”

    Sometimes we let the dregs or mental residue of the past hold us back.

    If you have ever moved away from home, and going back home and visiting your old friends, it might feel awkward and strange. You have moved on a lot mentally and life-wise as a human being, but it seems your friends are stuck in the same old place, doing the same old shit as before. They haven’t really “grown up” in the same way you feel like you have.

    Another problem that I have is that I feel indebted to my friends, because they were my friends in the past, and I feel like I need to be close friends with them now.

    But in reality, you aren’t the same person you were a year ago, 10 years ago, and certainly not 20+ years old.

    So don’t feel bad breaking ties with friends that you no longer associate with, with friends that no longer share similar life-goals and visions as you, and feel some sort of “obligation” towards them.

    Be selfish, but for the greater good. Learn how to cultivate your own garden, your own beliefs, your own values, your own morales, and know that you do carry the risk of being called an outcast by your (former) loved ones.

    But that is the price of freedom, and remember as Epictetus said, “Everything comes at a price.”

    3. Disappoint people

    In cultivating your own garden, you will disappoint and perhaps piss off some people.

    For example, I find one of the things that screws up my clarity of thought the most is answering emails. To be frank, I don’t get a lot of emails anymore, and most of them are lovely emails from past students, from friends, that are giving me thanks or words of encouragement. But then again, there are a lot of emails that I get that are “work-related”, that distract me from my pure passion in life; writing, reading, teaching, and helping our my loved ones.

    Whenever I want to get into the “zone” of writing, I need to abstain from checking my inbox for at least 2-3 days. I want to share another story from “The Second Book of the Tao” of a master bell-maker, who was able to focus his mind and create the most beautiful bells (after emptying his mind, and going into seclusion):

    After three days of meditating, I no longer have any thoughts of praise or blame. After five days, I no longer have any thoughts of success or failure. After seven days, I’m not identified with a body. All my power is focused on my task; there are no distractions. At that point, I enter the mountain forest. I examine the trees until exactly the right one appears. If I can see a bell stand inside it, the real work is done, and all I have to do is get started. Thus I harmonize inner and outer. That’s why people think that my work must be superhuman.”

    Similarly, my problem is that I am easily distracted. I am like a pigeon, if I see something shiny, I totally go off-course.

    So my deepest apologies if you are reading this, and I haven’t answered your email yet. Trust me, it is for the greater good.

    And honestly, at the end of the day, nothing is really that important in your email inbox. Nobody is going to die. Nobody sends you an email and tells you, “Eric, your mother has just passed away.”

    Furthermore, any information that is really important somehow finds its way to you.

    But once again, my fear is that I am afraid of disappointing people, of letting people down, or being “irresponsible.”

    But once again, you need to learn how to disappoint people, let people down, and be “irresponsible” for the greater good. By focusing on your life’s task, you will (unintentionally) hurt the feelings of others.

    So when pursuing your passion in life, let’s say it is photography– you are going to have to make sacrifices. Perhaps on the weekend, and your primary concern is to shoot. But a good friend invites you to some party, and you don’t want to go. Be honest and tell them that you already made plans. Your friend might be sad and disappointed– and that is tough. But it is the price you need to be willing to pay to “cultivate your own garden.”

    Conclusion

    Okay, it is now 6:42am, I am starting to feel my throat do that weird swelling-up thing (had 3 espressos), and my body is feeling pretty fucking exhausted.

    To sum up, learn to first cultivate your own garden before trying to help the garden of others. Start off by cutting off the extraneous bullshit of your life, by cutting out negative people and pests from your life, and then finally having the space in your garden to give your plants light, water, fertilizer, and love– in order to grow.

    Your photography is like a garden. You need to give it time, attention, and love to grow. You can’t expect to simply water it every once in a while, let it become overgrown with weeds, if you want your little seedling to become a juicy strawberry plant. And the strawberries (or fruit) is an analogy for the work that you produce.

    Don’t feel guilty by focusing your time and attention on yourself before others. If you’re barely paying the rent, don’t burden yourself by trying to donate $100 to help starving kids in Africa. If your mental state is not good, don’t burden yourself by trying to relieve the suffering of a friend. If your photography is suffering, learn to first cure yourself of your mental ills before you go out party and have beers with friends.

    Cultivate your own garden, then help water the gardens of others.

    Love,
    Eric

    Written at Saturday, September 5, 6:46am, in my beautiful home in Berkeley.

    Plans for today

    So some random stuff– I will probably crash, take a nap on the couch, read a little bit more Stoic philosophy, and today I am really excited to visit Dolores Park in the Mission in SF with Grace and Justin, two of my closest friends. We will have a nice picnic, enjoy a nice lazy lunch and day, and have the time to catch up with them after being on the road for two months. I am so blessed to have wonderful friends like them.

    So also don’t forget friend, sometimes cultivating your own garden is to spend time with loved ones. Because at the end of the day, fuck our art and photography and whatever. It is the relationships that (ultimately) matter the most, at least for me.

  • Street Photography Quick Links: August 2015

    Street Photography Quick Links: August 2015

    Aug Quick Links

    Street Photography Quick Links is a compilation of Links, Projects, News, Videos, Events, or anything that is related to street photography or photography in particular that I have personally consumed. Perhaps these might interest you or make you think. If you want to send some links my way, details will be at the post below.

    Portfolio Find

    Mark Steinmetz

    Mr. Steinmetz is one of those classic guys. He’s a Winogrand disciple but unlike Winogrand, Mark I think has a slower and more deliberate approach to photographing. It’s still there and present but there is no rush. His latest work, The Players took 4-5 years to finish. Check out his work and if you want, get a copy of The Players here.

    Also check his interview by GUP magazine to gather some of his thoughts about the book.

    Look at this project 

    MONAS by Andri Tambunan via Invisible Photographer Asia

    Located in the heart of city, Monas Square is the biggest open public space in Jakarta. Monas square, also called “Merdeka” or Independence square, not only provides an escape and breathing room from the congested capital but it brings people together by serving as a common ground, accessible and utilized by people from different backgrounds and economic classes. The Monas Square is surrounded by trees and grassy area ideal to have a picnic or a family outing, several basketball courts and soccer fields to play pick up games, a place for people to exercise such as jogging or riding their bicycle, and a place for street vendors to sell food or products.  This space is also often used for public concerts and gatherings, bazaars, festivals, and numerous local social events. In the middle of the square is a 132m tower called Monas, or Nasional Monument, symbolizing the fight for independence erected by Sukarno, Indonesia’s first president.

    All photos were taken with iPhone 4s native camera, edited with Snapseed and instagram filters.

    Bruce Gilden Criticisms

    After the VICE photo issue project of Bruce Gilden and Stacy Kranitz in Appalachia, the two photographers has received a lot of flak and most of them are towards Gilden. Here are some of those criticisms. The one on vantage is a must read. Love him or hate him, one has to understand that there may have bee a line he crossed when he was doing his Appalachia story. Perhaps VICE also has to answer for it? At the end of the day, read to be informed.

    Taking Liberties, Taking Shortcuts, and Taking Advantage of People via Vantage

    “The past few days have been hard,” wrote Kranitz on Instagram on June 7th. “I have been on assignment with another photographer, Bruce Gilden. He and I are at odds with the way we make our work. I watched him make portraits and aggressively enter my shot to get his own, while telling me ‘this is my shoot, you are just here’ I listened as he said disparaging things about people, I listened to his dissatisfaction with people being to [sic] ‘plain’ and late last night I could no longer stand by and continue to feel good about being bullied. He humiliated me in front of a group of church goers and I feel that I may have taken a stand at the wrong moment. That I was not being considerate or mindful of my surroundings either. I don’t hate Bruce or his work but I think turning people into what you want them to be, turning people into ‘self-portraits’ of yourself is complicated and dangerous especially in a place with a history of extraction.” 

     

    Bruce Gilden and The Absence of Empathy via Photoshelter

    Gilden has a point of view, for sure, but he also seems to have an agenda that has little to do with the people or places that he’s photographing. Instead of trying to connect the audience empathetically, he triggers a different type of pathos in me. One that has me shaking my head at yet another pathetic attempt to capture Appalachia.

    A Latter-day Freak Show via The Guardian

    Gilden may be shoving these broken faces in our faces to confront us with what we usually choose to look away from. But his style seems to work against any intention to humanise his subjects. First and foremost, I feel uncomfortable as a viewer – not because of the poverty or abuse etched on to the landscapes of these faces, but because their perceived ugliness is paraded as a kind of latter-day freak show.

    General Links

    Warren Sebastian via Fotografia Magazine

    If you love colorful beachside photos, you might like Warren Sebastian’s take on the british seaside life.

    Paola Paredes Photographed the very moment she came out to her family via Fotografia Magazine

    Paola Paredes is a 29 year-old Ecuadorian photographer currently based in London. For many years, Paola has kept her homosexuality hidden to her family; but she recently found the courage to sit her parents and sisters at a table to tell them the truth. But Paola did more than that: she set up three cameras around that table to document the entire conversation. In fact, Paola says that the very idea to record hercoming out in pictures was what finally made her decide to reveal the truth.

    Richard Bram: If you doubt a photo at least a bit, it does not work via Bird in Flight 

    Richard Bram is a favorite street photographer of mine. He shares some great nuggets of wisdom such as this one:

    Do not be easily satisfied. Street photography is a heartbreak. Most of the time you will not come home with a great photo; no one does. What I see most often are lazy ordinary pictures, in focus, exposed properly and with nothing in them at all.

    How to turn your phone into a DIY Projector for 1$ via Photojojo

    This should be an interesting DIY way of presenting your work to friends or family. It’s easy to set-up and should be practical to assemble anywhere.

    Check this Kickstarter 

    Do you wood film Kickstarter by Compagnia-imago

    This kickstarter campaign is for reloadable film cassettes. Here’s the kicker, theirs is made out of wood and an eco friendly plastic. Throw some money their way especially if you are a film shooter. #BelieveInFilm

    Care to share some links?

    If  you have any links, videos, or anything interesting you want to share. Tweet them over to me at @agdemesaphoto or email me the link at contact@agdemesaphoto.com

    Cheers everyone! Till Next Month!

    • A.g.
  • Having No Choices is the Ultimate Freedom

    Having No Choices is the Ultimate Freedom

    NYC, 2015
    NYC, 2015

    Dear friend,

    I want to tell you the exciting start of my day today. I want to share with you as vividly how it felt, and what is on my mind.

    I woke up, still feeling a bit drowsy, yet felt alert. I looked around my surroundings. I was in bed, lying next to the love of my life (Cindy). I was a bit hot, and for some strange reason, my body woke up at this natural time. I knew it was probably really early (some ungodly hour), but the first thing that came to my mind was this:

    “Thank you God for giving me another day of life, I didn’t expect this, but this is a bonus. I will use this day as faithfully as I can, to the best of my abilities, because I don’t know if I will wake up the next day, and when I will die.”

    I’m not sure why I woke up with this strange sense of gratitude. I think I do now, but will get to that in a second (after taking another sip of this lovely espresso I made).

    Anyways, the first thing I do is jump in the shower, and blast it on cold (best way to wake up in the morning). I brush my teeth, go to the living room (on my tippy-toes because I know my neighborhood downstairs is sleeping, did some brief yoga stretches (God I feel like an old and achy old man), put on some clothes, put on some hair wax (makes me feel more “legit” before writing).

    I look at the clock on my kitchen stove, and it reads:

    3:00am

    Oh man, it’s pretty early, but I feel pumped and ready for today.

    I just made myself an espresso, and sat down on my kitchen table, with my iPad setup with my keyboard (I just gave away my Windows 8 Laptop to a charity, a friend named Anne runs an organization that teaches programming to underprivileged children, so I have no more laptop), and wanted to share some thoughts with you.

    Being alive fucking rocks

    Well first of all, I wanted to share with you how fucking awesome it is to be alive, and no matter how much we bitch and moan about our lives, we are blessed.

    I have a really good friend named Glen Goh, who lives in Vancouver. He did one of my workshops with Adam Marelli in Venice/Verona a few years back, and we have become good friends since then. He is a devout Catholic, loving husband, loving father, keen and passionate photographer, and overall great human being. He is quite well-off, but he doesn’t flaunt his wealth, and is very frugal, humble, and knows his values and principles.

    Anyways, the other day Cindy and I got a very kind email from him. Dr. Morgan, a professor of philosophy that he would take to mass every Sunday, just passed away. We briefly met him when we visited Glen and his wife Sharon in Vancouver. Father Morgan was over 80 years old, lived in an “old person’s home”, was a distinguished professor in Philosophy, and still had fire in his eyes. Even though he was old and frail, he still refused to use a wheelchair, and would try to walk everywhere he could. He was full of energy, gratitude, and humor. Also as a side note, I told him about my love of Stoicism and studying the ancient Greek/Roman philosophers. Dr. Morgan recommended me reading Thomas Aquinas, who I plan on reading.

    But anyways, Cindy told me the news of Dr. Morgan dying right before I slept, so perhaps that is why I suddenly woke up today, full of gratitude, and ready to live my life.

    You only live once

    To be honest, I have no idea when I am going to die. I think about death a lot, especially as someone who is only 27 years old. I honestly at the moment don’t know if I believe in an afterlife (I’m still a practicing Catholic, although not a very good one), but I try to live my life according to the life and teachings of Jesus, to the wisdom of the sages of Stoicism, and even the wise words of Laozi and the Taoist sages.

    But regardless of what your background, nationality, religion, personal spiritual beliefs– whatever; know that life is a gift that is to be cherished, and to be appreciated. We are only given one life on this earth, albeit short. Why not use the best of it while we aren’t here?

    The secret of happiness: the avoidance of “unhappiness”

    Friend, I think at the end of the day, we all want to be happy. So I want to share some of my meditations on happiness and making the best of your life while we’re still alive on this little green planet.

    First of all, I am starting to believe that happiness isn’t the “pursuit of happiness”, but the avoidance of unhappiness.

    What do I mean by that?

    Well, according to the Epicurean school of philosophy, the philosopher (Epicurus) said that pleasure was the key to happiness. But not the hedonistic type of pleasure where all you are is having sex, eating good food, participating in orgies, getting drunk and fucked up, and whatever. No, it is avoiding pain (mental pain, and physical pain). And he makes a good point; that we know whether something is really necessary or “good” in our life, whether we feel pain in the absence of it.

    For example, according to Epicurus, the only 3 main things which cause true pain (which we would die without) is food, water, and freedom from the cold. We feel pain when we are hungry, we feel pain when we are thirsty, and we feel pain when we are cold.

    But the funny thing is that these are “nature’s wants”– and they are very subtle and easy to achieve. We live in a society of affluence, where food is cheap and attainable. We have access to clean drinking water (if you want to appreciate water more, watch “Mad Max: Fury Road). We have access to warm clothing (and to those of us who live in warm climates like California, you can survive without a jacket, unlike my friends in Sweden).

    But there are all these superfluous things that we don’t need in life, and don’t feel physical pain in the absence of them. This includes having a lot of money (not having a lot of money doesn’t give us physical pain, unless it leads to hunger, thirst, or pain from the cold), this includes driving a fancy car (if you ‘only’ drive a Honda Civic and not a BMW, you are not in physical pain, only perhaps jealous), this includes fame and fortune (you don’t feel physical pain if you have 0 followers on Instagram), and many more things.

    Let me continue to hash out thoughts, because this is the best way I can communicate, thank you for bearing with me friend (I know my grammar is horrible, I think I am actually slightly dyslexic, I just recalled that my mom used to take me to “speech therapy” courses as a child).

    Anyways, let me get back to the point: What is superfluous (unnecessary), and what causes us “unhappiness”?

    So let me map out some things (this time in bullet form) what is superfluous):

    • Having a lot of money
    • Having a big house
    • Having fancy clothes
    • Having an expensive camera
    • Depending your self-worth on the opinion of others
    • Having a lot of followers on social media
    • Having a high-rank in your company
    • Being famous and being recognized in the streets

    And let me map out what makes us unhappy in life:

    • Being jealous of friends, family, those who make more money than you, who are better-looking than you, and those whose life you wish you had.
    • Having a shitty boss who is far too demanding, and gives you stress, anxiety, and overworks you.
    • Feeling stuck in a job that you hate.
    • Not feeling like we are able to fulfill our “creative potential”.
    • Having expectations of others (that they will work as hard as we do).
    • Feeling sorry for ourselves.
    • Comparing ourselves to others.

    Anyways, all of these things that I listed aren’t things that “we” necessarily share. It are the personal ills that I have faced in my life. Everything I write is from personal experience, and I want to share all my scars and pains with you.

    Remove 1 thing everyday

    So once again going back to the idea of happiness. I think happiness is best dealt as a “negative” concept– in which the avoidance of happiness is far more robust than the “pursuit of happiness.”

    According to Taoism, the fool tries to add 1 new thing to his life everyday. The master tries to remove 1 thing from his life everyday.

    Therefore, if you want to truly be happy; don’t seek happiness in terms of pleasure, comfort, or “good” things. Seek pleasure and happiness in your life by cutting out the bullshit; 1 negative thing a day everyday.

    So for example, here are some things that I am slowly trying to cut out of my life:

    1. Avoiding social media

    “Oh my God Eric, you are the king of social media! You are a horrible photographer, the only reason you are ”famous“ is because you know how to game SEO, and pay Google to put you on the top of these search engine rankings! You have no skills. You are a fraud. Sooner or later, your pyramid of cards is going to topple, and I will be here looking at you, and laughing.” – Sincerely, hater

    Okay I have received some similar quotes to the one above (this one is fictional). I have a lot of “haters” on social media; but honestly at the end of the day, they are my most “benevolent teachers” (as Laozi would say). They call me out on my bullshit (although in a bit overly critical way), but I love them nonetheless.

    But the problem with social media is this: there is an unfavorable asymmetry (credit Nassim Taleb).

    What do I mean by an “unfavorable asymmetry?”

    What I mean is this: in social media, we have more to lose than gain.

    For example, the pain of getting a few comments (or worse, no comments or likes at all) is worse than the joy of getting lots of comments and like’s on photos.

    For example, before I uninstalled Instagram from my phone about a week ago, I would get on average 1,000+ “likes” per image. Now in the past, I would have been absolutely fucking thrilled to get those many likes on my images. But now, it has become my new “norm” (I guess this is kind of how lottery winners feel after winning a million bucks, first extreme happiness and appreciation, then “regression to the norm.”).

    Anyways, the thing is whenever I got my expected amount of “likes” (1,000) I would feel indifferent and “whatever”. If I got more than 1,000 likes (let’s say 1,300) I would be fucking thrilled and quite excited, but not so excited that I would do cartwheels. I would take back a step and say I didn’t feel “fucking thrilled”, but more like “pleasantly amused.”

    But whenever I got anything less than 1,000 “likes”, I would feel like shit. I would ask myself, “What did I do wrong? Do people suddenly not love me anymore? What’s wrong with this image?” This would then disturb my inner-serenity, and I would start to second-guess and doubt myself. I would start to feel anxious, frustrated, and thinking about the next image I could upload to Instagram to get “at least” 1,000 likes again, so I could feel good again.

    So according to my personal example, the pain of not getting a lot of love on social media outweighs the slight joy of getting more love on social media than you expect.

    In psychology, they call this the “treadmill effect”, or the “hedonic treadmill.” We are never satisfied. Enough is never enough. We always want and crave more.

    2. Avoiding trying to earn more money

    Let’s say you start working at an entry-level job at a corporation making $40,000 a year. First year out of college it is fucking awesome, because you were surviving on student loans and eating cup noodles to (barely) survive.

    Then you see your colleagues at work who are (obviously) a lot richer than you. They drive BMW’s, wear Rolex watches, talk about their upcoming trips to the Bahamas or New York City, and the fancy restaurants they just ate at.

    You now feel jealous and inadequate. Whereas when you started, $40,000 was a lot of money (especially compared to your friends who are still working at the grocery store or at baristas at Starbucks, because they couldn’t get a job with their humanities degree). But now, you need more money, at least $50,000 a year.

    So now you try to figure out how to play this tricky game of “corporate politics” – and how you can step over people and work your way up the ladder. You start clocking into your job early. You start wearing nicer (more “professional” clothes). You don’t leave your job until your boss leaves. You send emails on the weekends, and always ask for more responsibilities. You start leaving work later, and start doing “working lunches” at your desk. You start gaining weight, you feel more frustrated, and more anxious. You are desperately waiting for the performance review at the end of the year, so you can get that slight bump in your salary.

    At the end of the year, that time comes, and you don’t get the raise. You don’t get that promotion. You also sit down and you realize that an extra $10,000 a year (after taxes) isn’t actually that much more money (just a few hundred bucks a month).

    You feel frustrated, confused, and upset. Isn’t more money supposed to make you feel more happy, and isn’t having a fancier title supposed to make you feel more important?

    How do I know all of these feelings? Because that person was me.

    Anyways; let’s say I did make that $50,000 a year. I would then “upgrade” my lifestyle (they call this “lifestyle creep”) by spending more money eating out more, buying nicer clothes (shopping at Banana Republic instead of H&M), I would trade in my used car from 1990 for a new car, and buy new smartphones, iPads, and other electronic gadgets. After each material purchase, my happiness is given a slight bump. Then it goes back to baseline, until I get that next promotion/pay raise.

    Let’s say the next year (or perhaps 2), I start earning $60,000 a year. Once again, I move into a nicer apartment, start socializing with other “richer” people, and start talking about fancy cars, sports games, and designer goods. I now start moving up the social ladder and hierarchy, and start associating with richer people. Once again, I start to feel poorer and less adequate, unless I earn $100,00 a year. Then I need to earn $200,000 a year. Then I need to earn $500,000 a year, and then $1 million a year. Fuck a million dollars, I want to be a billionaire. I want to own a boat. I want to own a private jet. I want to own my own private sport’s team. I want to own my own island. I want to own my own spacejet, I want to fly to Mars and colonize it. I want to escape death. I want to be a God.

    Okay let me stop for a second– I think I got a bit out of hand. But you know what I mean.

    Enough is never enough.

    Being grateful for what you have

    The solution?

    Be grateful for what you have. Be content in this present moment, and know that everything is perfect.

    At the moment, Cindy and I don’t have a car. Cindy’s younger sister (Jennifer) got into a car accident and needs a car pretty badly (she commutes in LA, and for anyone who has ever lived in LA, it is literally impossible to survive without a car there). So Cindy came up with this crazy idea: why don’t we try to live a year without a car?

    So we have been “car-less” the last 2 days, and it has been the fucking best thing ever.

    I seriously don’t remember the last time I “walked” in Berkeley. I also only remember taking the bus once or twice. I spend too much of my time sitting on a chair at home, and generally the only walking I do is to my car (from my apartment) and back.

    But not having a car is probably one of the best things that I have done for my happiness (once again, happiness is about subtraction than addition).

    Now that I don’t have a car, I am forced to walk everywhere. At first I was like, “But what if I want to visit SF, or visit my family, pick up some stuff at IKEA, or go to Costco?” But not having a car is a “creative constraint” – I need to find out more ways to survive “locally”, and it has been amazing.

    First of all, walking around Berkeley has helped me appreciate the small things more. I notice other families walking in the neighborhood, and see the joy that the parents have with the kids (never notice this when I’m stuck in a bubble in my car). I walked around with my camera and ended up taking a bunch more photos than if I were in my car. I started to walk to the local Whole Foods (which is literally right around the corner), and have been buying food everyday, and cooking new dishes for Cindy everyday. I enjoy the feel of the sun on my face, the feeling of the pavement under my feet, and the steadiness of mind, and feeling of “zen” while I am practicing “walking meditation.”

    In a car, I am often more anxious and stressed. I always feel perpetually late for meetings, I hate being stuck in traffic, I always cram my brain and distract myself with podcasts and music, and I always compare myself with others and their cars (having a Prius is “lame” compared to a BMW M3).

    But not having a car is the ultimate freedom; if you commit to not having a car, you don’t feel jealous. It is a voluntary choice, so you don’t feel the pain of comparing your car to those of others. You never feel like you need to “upgrade” your car, because you know you won’t have a car in the first place. I guess this is the peace of mind my friends who live in San Francisco have (nobody there owns a car).

    Furthermore, taking the bus has been a joy. I have started to chat with strangers on the bus (nice conversations), say hello to the bus driver (always surprised to hear a stranger say hello, I guess most people who ride the bus are quite miserable), and I am even thinking of shooting more “bus street photography”. I also notice my outside surroundings more when on the bus. Furthermore, I am able to read while on the bus (cannot do this when stuck in a car).

    But you might think: “But Eric, don’t you feel limited and restricted not having a car?”

    Yes I do– but once again, I need to be crafty and ask myself, “How can this limitation be a benefit? And I have found many so far.”

    Another example; after I got my laptop stolen in Paris (best thing that has happened to me), I got my Windows 8 Laptop/Tablet. It served me well for about a month and a half, and taught me the beauty of Google Docs and using the “cloud” – and knowing that I don’t need an Macbook computer to survive.

    But I just donated that Windows 8 laptop/tablet like I mentioned, and my only “laptop-like” device is my iPad at home. The setup I currently have is this: I have a “encase” iPad/keyboard stand, an iPad Air (original), and a bluetooth Apple keyboard attached to it. I am using “IA Writer Pro” as my word processor, and it is the ultimate zen. I literally am not distracted by any superfluous things, except for the text on the screen.

    Killing distractions

    Also another thing I did so I wouldn’t be distracted; I hid all the apps that I don’t really need into a drawer. Furthermore, to the best of my ability, I have uninstalled all of the superfluous applications from the iPad (for example, I don’t have email on the iPad, Facebook or any other social networking sites, or even the Kindle app, games, etc).

    People sometimes ask me, “Eric, how are you such a prolific writer and get so much writing done? How do you focus?”

    Focusing is quite easy if you eliminate distractions.

    Trust me, I am the most easily distracted person you will ever meet. I am like a pigeon, if I see something shiny, I will drop everything I am doing and therefore run to it.

    So once again, the key to focus is a negative (“via negativa” as Nassim Taleb calls it in his book “Antifragile”). You need to remove distractions. You need to remove superfluous activities from your life (networking, gym classes that you hate, family events that aren’t important to you, acquaintances you feel you ‘should’ meet, answering emails when you’re off work, etc). You need to remove hobbies and interests you aren’t really that passionate about (if your primary passion is photography, I’m sorry– I recommend you to drop those cello lessons, your interest in writing, your interest in music-production, or video-gaming).

    Our life is short, if we want to truly be happy and great, we need to eliminate all the superfluous and unnecessary things in our lives, and only focus on the essentials.

    So for me, I have been trying to slowly (but surely) remove extraneous activities from my life. Let me give you a personal taste:

    Videos: I am starting to realize; I don’t really like making videos all that much, especially on YouTube. Sure there are a lot of videos I made in the past that I thoroughly enjoyed in the past, but nowadays I feel that making YouTube videos feels more like an obligation than a passion. I don’t wake up in the morning and say to myself, “Fuck yeah, I’m going to record a YouTube video today!” So unless I have a natural urge to upload a video (or record one), I’m going to stop making videos.

    Interviews: I enjoy doing interviews for the blog, but it isn’t my primary concern or passion. There are many other people who do it far better than I do (I highly recommend Blake Andrews’s blog. So I will still do interviews in the future, only when I have a good opportunity– otherwise I can cut it from my diet.

    Powerlifting: few of you know, but powerlifting is (or used to be) one of my big passions. I have always had an inferiority complex growing up (being a skinny Asian kid), so I started to hit the gym starting high/school college to get stronger, and bigger. I used to be obsessed with “bodybuilding” (eating a lot of protein shakes and building muscle mass), which soon transformed into a passion for powerlifting (lifting really heavy weights). I found that the problem with powerlifting was this: I would tire myself out too much from powerlifting (wouldn’t give me enough energy to write or do other interesting mental-activities) and after eating a bigass meal (10 eggs+bacon) after a workout, I would be essentially useless for the next 5 hours. So now I just have been sticking to pushups, chin-ups, and 1-legged squats (pistols) to just avoid being a fatass. The benefit? I don’t waste time driving to the gym and back, and don’t have to wait in line for the weights. I can do my workouts efficiently at home, and get back to my most important activities (writing and reading).

    Networking: “Networking” meetings rarely ever go anywhere. I only go to them in the hope that they might benefit me in the future– either monetarily, with prestige, or some sort of “opportunity” which will make me more influential or famous. But fuck it, I don’t need any more money, and I certainly don’t care if I have more followers on social media. So my goal is to not network as much as humanly possible, and only spend time with friends and human beings that I genuinely appreciate being around.

    Internet: I have mostly subtracted the internet from my diet. I now only use Google to search recipes for dinner, Google Maps to find directions, What’s app to message international friends, and that is pretty much it. The internet (especially blogs) can be so fucking distracting, and kill your clarity of thought. Yeah, the irony is that you’re reading this blog right now. But don’t feel obliged to read any of this stuff, feel free to close this tab and move on. But if you find value in it, I am very happy to have you here friend :)

    So these are some of the few things I have been trying to cut out of my life (which are distractions), and now after slowly cutting and editing down my life, I found out what is my true passion and calling in life: writing. It is the thing that puts my mind most at ease, it is the thing that most puts me in a zen-like “flow” state, and it is the thing that I feel like I do that contributes the most to society. Secondly after writing is reading (to come up with ideas and materials to write). Thirdly it is to photograph (helps me connect with others and society). Fourthly, it is to spend time with loved ones and family (yeah I know this should be higher up there, but unfortunately it isn’t at the moment). But at the end of the day, I know my personal relationships will be far more important than my “work.” But please forgive me friend, I am still a work-a-holic American.

    Practice an attitude of gratitude

    Another secret of life and happiness? Practice gratitude; always. Be grateful for what you have, rather than what you don’t have.

    The funny thing– I own a Leica MP and 35mm f/2 Summicron Leica ASPH lens. It is probably the best film camera rangefinder setup that money can afford.

    Yet I am not grateful. It isn’t enough. I look at dick-envy with those with digital Leica Monochrom’s, and think that I would be so much happier and creative with them. Sometimes I dream of the bokeh of the Leica Summilux 35mm f/1.4 ASPH (FLE) lens.

    But fuck that– I need to remind myself; be grateful for what I have, grateful for the people in my life, and grateful that I am alive.

    Honestly at the end of the day, it doesn’t matter (how much) material possessions (or how little) material possessions you have in life. At the end of the day, having good friends, family, and loves ones is the most valuable treasure.

    Furthermore, life is the ultimate gift.

    I mentioned (way earlier) in this essay how I woke up, jumped out of bed, and was like, “Fuck yeah, another day of life, thank you God!” I want everyday to be a day like this.

    But the funny thing is that this is literally the first time that has happened to me in my life (maybe once in the past that I cannot recall).

    I once read that in order to be happier in life, write a gratitude journal. What is a “gratittude journal” you ask? In a little notebook (every night before you sleep), write 5 things you are grateful for. It can be for life, for food, shelter, Wi-fi, good coffee, nice beer, whatever. I think even taking it a step further and writing down 5 things you are grateful for in the morning is even better (you start off the day with fresh new eyes; the world is full of possibilities).

    So let me share with you the 5 things I am grateful for today (this morning):

    1. I appreciate being given the gift of another day of life.
    2. I appreciate having good friends at the cafe near my house who give me free coffee (and the nice espressos I had this morning).
    3. I appreciate waking up in the morning next to the most beautiful woman in the world (Cindy).
    4. I appreciate waking up early 3am to do what I am passionate and love (writing).
    5. I appreciate that I am perfectly content with everything I have in my life at the moment.

    What are one of the big things that causes me a lot of mental pain and anguish? Being ungrateful– and hankering after what I don’t have and what I lack.

    So for example, I sometimes lust for a new car, I sometimes lust for a new laptop, I sometimes lust for a new smartphone, I sometimes lust for new clothes, I sometimes lust to live in SF, I sometimes lust to have more money in my bank account, I sometimes lust to own my own home, I sometimes lust to be more famous and influential, I sometimes lust for an expensive espresso machine, I sometimes lust for a new camera.

    But if I kill all these desires and lusts, what am I left with? Perfect contentment with what I have, and the life I currently live.

    Don’t have preferences

    Another thing I have learned which might be helpful to you friend; don’t have preferences.

    Why not?

    Once you have preferences, you set yourself up for disappointment.

    For example, let’s say you “prefer” to shoot with rangefinder cameras. Let’s say you own a digital Leica (an older M9). But then someone steals it. And you also get laid off your job, and you have no money left in your bank account. Now you feel like a slave. You feel upset, frustrated, and angry, because you “prefer” shooting with a Leica, but you can no longer afford one. So going “backwards” (getting a DSLR, or even worse, a Fujifilm camera) will make you feel inadequate and frustrated.

    The solution? Be happy with any camera you currently own, are given, or can afford.

    Let’s say that you have a preference for shooting street photography in a downtown area closeby your hometown (but still a 30+ drive). You set yourself up for disappointment. Why?

    If you’re busy with work, life, and kids, you won’t always have the time to go down there and shoot. You will be frustrated by your preference of shooting in that area. You feel that if you aren’t in that area, you can’t be creative.

    The solution? Be grateful for the neighborhood you live, and shoot in your own neighborhood (or even take photos of your friends, family, loved ones). Don’t have a preference for shooting “street photography” (all photography is photography).

    Let’s say that you have a preference for drinking designer coffee (like I do). Any espresso pulled on anything less than a “La Marzocco” machine isn’t sufficient. You are a coffee snob (I am).

    But the problem is, when you have a preference for good espressos, you can’t deal with shitty gas station coffee. You have an 8-hour drive to see your family in LA, and you are “forced” (poor you) to stop by a Starbucks and have a shitty espresso. The problem? Not everywhere can you find a fancy hipster cafe with good espressos. So by having a preference for good espressos sets you up for disappointment.

    The solution? Be appreciate of good espressos, but don’t become dependent on them. Be as happy as drinking instant Nescafe coffee as an expensive $3.00 espresso from Blue Bottle (a tip I need to remind myself).

    This goes with everything; with preferences to the type of food you eat, the types of restaurants you visit, the places you visit on holiday, the clothes you wear, the lifestyle you have, the artwork you collect, the photography books you purchase, the books you read, the schedules you setup for yourself, the watches you own, whatever.

    Don’t have preferences, and you can be happy in all circumstances, whether shitty or “good.”

    Don’t compare

    Another tip of something I have been trying (very hard) to do in my life: not use the words “good” or “bad”, or “better” or “worse.”

    Why not?

    Once you start comparing things as “better” or “worse”, you start putting negative labels on things.

    For example, what I learned from Taoism (“The Second Book of the Tao” by Stephen Mitchell is excellent) is that things are neither “good” nor “bad” – they are what they are.

    For example, one might say that a beautiful white horse that can run at top speeds is “good.” But can the horse catch a mouse? No.

    Another example: a lot of people would say that winning a million dollars is a “good” thing. True? Not necessarily. Suddenly after winning a million bucks from the lottery, all your friends turn against you. Old family members start phoning you, asking you for money. You are now in the tabloids, harassed by paparazzi. You start becoming paranoid, and trying to find out ways to hide yourself (and your money) from the public. You start going into depression, you start using your money on cocaine, hookers, and Ferrari’s. You still feel empty. You have nobody to trust anymore, and you want to kill yourself.

    Some people would say having a Leica camera is a “good” thing. Not necessarily. A Leica can’t focus very closely (minimum focusing distance is .7 meters). It is quite heavy (made out of solid brass). It is difficult to use and doesn’t have autofocus. If you own a digital Leica, the buffer is slow, the camera sometimes doesn’t turn on, and even the old Leica M9’s have cracking sensors. So a Leica camera isn’t “better” than a Fujifilm x100-series camera. It is just different. More expensive as well.

    Sometimes people ask me what is my favorite place to shoot street photography, or the “best” place for street photography. Once again the problem is that once I say “better” it implies that the other place is “worse” for street photography. But in reality, they are just different. You can’t compare apples and oranges. For example, the experience of shooting street photography in NYC versus Michigan is totally different– there are benefits/disadvantages of both. NYC has more people in the streets, but Michigan has more interesting urban landscape. NYC is a bit more hectic and crazy and “interesting” – but the downside is that it has already been shot to death (hard to make an “original” photo in NYC). Michigan can be seen as boring, but the benefit is that the people are friendlier. So don’t think that the city you live isn’t good enough for street photography. Find the hidden benefits.

    So long story short; try to eliminate the words “better”, “worse”, “good”, or “bad” from your vocabulary. This will give you ultimate freedom and happiness.

    No choices is the ultimate freedom

    In the “Second Book of the Tao” there is an interesting story about a man who talks to a shadow. The man asks the shadow, “It must be so depressing to be a shadow. You never have any control over your life. You are just constantly following people, doesn’t that make you feel frustrated?”

    The shadow then replies to the man:

    “No actually not, it is actually quite nice– not to be stressed with making decisions. Wherever people go, I merely follow. I don’t ask questions. I don’t judge whether the decision is right or wrong, I just go along for the ride and enjoy it.”

    When I first read the story I was like what the fuck– I don’t want to be like that shadow. I want to be free and have unlimited freedom! I want to do what I want to do without others trespassing on my court (the typical American mindset).

    But in reality; not having any choices is the ultimate freedom.

    Why is that?

    Well to start off, the universe has its own intelligence. What will happen, will happen, and should happen. “Everything happens for a reason.” Or they call it “Murphy’s law”: “Everything that can go wrong, will go wrong” (watch the movie ‘Interstellar’ for more insight into this concept).

    As human beings we think we can exert control over everything in life. But at the end of the day, we only have some control in life. At the end of the day, we can’t control whether a drunk driver will speed past a red light, hit us, and we will die. We can’t control if we’re in a plane, there is turbulence, the plane gets hit by a lightning bolt, and everyone dies. We can’t control if our parents had some sort of rare disease, and we find out (at age 28) that we have it– and we only have 2 years left to live. We can’t control if people on the internet talk shit about us (I know, just read my YouTube comments). We can’t control whether we will meet the “love of our life” or our “soulmate” (I am just fucking lucky I met Cindy in college). We can’t control these “[butterfly effects(https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/Butterfly_effect)” in life, the flapping of a butterfly’s wings can cause a tsunami halfway across the world.

    So the morale of the story? Go with the flow. Don’t try to control things in life.

    In Taoism, they call this “wu-wei”: action without action. Not trying to force things. Letting the right decision make itself.

    So how have I applied this to my life to be happier?

    I try to give up my choices.

    For example, I have pared down all of my physical possessions to just 1 of each (okay 2 pairs of clothes when traveling)

    • I have 1 camera and 1 lens (Leica MP and 35mm f/2 lens)
    • I have 1 type of film (Kodak Tri-X pushed to 1600)
    • I have 1 pair of shoes (Nike Free Flyknit 4.0)
    • I have 2 pairs of boxers (ExOfficio Boxer Brief)
    • I have 2 pair of shirts (UNIQLO airism)
    • I have 2 pairs of socks (quick-dry)
    • I have 1 backpack (Thinktank Perception 15)
    • I have 1 smartphone (Samsung Galaxy S6)
    • I have 1 laptop-like device (currently an iPad Air)
    • I have 1 watch (my beloved red Casio G-Shock)
    • I have 1 book-reading device (Kindle)

    This has given me so much peace of mind and zen it isn’t even funny. I don’t have to make a decision, and this limitation of my physical stuff is fucking true freedom. I don’t have to make a choice about what to use, because I am pared down to the essentials.

    Applied to mental concepts this idea of limitations and no choices can work as well:

    • I have 1 best friend (Cindy)
    • I have 1 main activity (Writing)
    • I have 1 main reading interest (Philosophy)
    • I have 1 favorite beverage (espresso)
    • I have 1 primary form of exercise (pushup)
    • I have 1 “social media” to publish on (this blog)
    • I wear only 1 color (black)

    Having no choices (or fewer choices) is something that Steve Jobs and Barack Obama apparently does. Steve Jobs (when he was still alive) only had 1 outfit: his signature black turtleneck, blue jeans, and white shoes. Barack Obama only has 2 suits (one black, one navy) so he has less “decision-making anxiety” and fatigue– and can spend more mental energy making important decisions.

    Another concept which shows that having fewer choices and no freedom in life can be a good thing: they call it “paralysis by analysis”. The concept is that sometimes you become paralyzed by having too many choices, because you have so many things to analyze. The last time you went to the grocery store to buy some cereal, do you remember how many fucking types of cereal there were? Making that decision was such a stressful endeavor, wasn’t it? The last time you had to buy a camera, remember all the camera reviews you had to read before you found the “perfect” camera? The last time you tried to buy a car, there were so many fucking choices (different colors, car brands, car models, packages, trims, etc) that stressed you out– no?

    Barry Schwartz explores this concept in his book: “The Paradox of Choice”, in which the irony of being a human being is that we think that having more choices leads to more happiness. But in reality, having more choices in our life adds stress, complexity, and frustration to our lives.

    The solution? Remove more choices from your life, make non-reversible decisions (when you buy something, throw away the receipt), and don’t regret or ruminate on the decisions you’ve already made.

    Having no choices in photography

    So how are some other ways you can remove choices from your life, to add more happiness and creativity in your life?

    Remove the choice of what kind of subject matter to shoot. That means focusing on one theme or project. Set yourself a “creative constraint.”

    For example, make the decision that you cannot shoot anything except “street portraits.” Then you aren’t stressed out; you know exactly what (and what you can’t) shoot. By having focus on just “street portraits” – you know exactly what you’re looking for, and you become focused on faces as a subject-matter, and you end up creating a strong and consistent body of work.

    For example, when Richard Avedon did his book: “In the American West”, he only shot with an 8×10 camera, black-and-white large-format film, people in the shade, and against white backgrounds. There were all these limitations, constraints, and lack of choice in his project. But what he did choose and add variety in were his subjects, their poses, and facial expressions. It is one of the best portrait series ever done in history.

    Similarly, Josef Koudelka only photographed Gypsies for 10+ years, and they were his only subject matter. Not only that, but he had no choice except one camera and lens: a cheap SLR (I believe it was an “Exakta” camera) and a 25mm lens and black-and-white film. By disregarding any other subject matter, he was able to focus on photographing the Gypsy people, living with them, getting to know them, and creating one of the most incredible socio-ethnographic photographic projects titled: “Gypsies” (yes, the politically correct term is now “Roma” people).

    Honestly, having more than 1 camera and 1 lens is just stressful to me. Having more than 1 camera and 1 less is more choices, so my suggestion: commit yourself to literally selling off (or better yet, giving away) all of your cameras, and just commit to 1 camera, 1 lens for a year. And if you shoot film, only 1 type of film. If you shoot digital, only stick to color or black and white. Having no stress in terms of what camera to use is more happiness in your life. I have even taken off the camera application away from the homescreen of my smartphone, and have vowed (for the next year or so) to shoot as little on my smartphone as possible. Only black-and-white film on the Leica (at least for the end of the year, before I move to Vietnam with Cindy).

    Set another “creative constraint” by not having a choice to where you photograph. Create a 1-mile radius from your house or workplace, and you are only allowed to shoot there for a month (or better yet, a year). You will probably be forced to step outside of your comfort zone, and force yourself to be creative.

    Photography isn’t about finding exotic things, visiting exotic places, and making interesting photos of strange things. Photography is about using the material life has already presented you, and making the best photos with what life has given you. Some of us live in NYC, some of us live in the suburbs of Southern California. Regardless of your position or situation in life, make the best photos with what you have been given in terms of your environment, living situation, whatever.

    I know nothing

    Okay I’m not some fucking guru or someone who thinks that they know anything. I am not some enlightened Buddhist, nor can I levitate while meditating.

    The truth of the matter is I am a wretched soul, full of all these demons, stresses, anxieties, frustrations, and unsteadiness of heart.

    I am just sharing with you some ideas that have personally worked well for me (at the moment), so I recommend you to just try it out, and see if it works well for you. Pick and choose. And if you think I’m speaking bullshit, feel free to tell me: “Fuck you Eric”, I don’t mind. Because I say that to myself all the time, in the pursuit of trying to find happiness.

    So dear friend, I hope this letter served you well, and has helped ease some of the thoughts on your mind, and will eventually lead to (a little bit more) happiness in your life, and less stress, anxiety, frustration, and worry.

    Love always,

    Eric

    Finished writing at 5:25am, after 2 nice espressos, a little nap, some pushups, and relaxation. Friday, 9/4/2015, at my home in Berkeley.

    Some random plans for the rest of today:

    I have to wake up Cindy in about 30 minutes (for her to have an early start to the day and do some reasons for her classes). I have no fucking clue what I have planned for the rest of the day, which is total bliss.

    I want to do a little more reading (finish re-reading the “Second Book of the Tao”, visit Artis coffee (the cafe near my house), walk around a bit, ask my younger sister Anna to come over for dinner, and maybe take another nap later. Oh yeah, and excited that I’m going to see a blues show with Cindy in SF today at around 10pm. Hope I won’t be too exhausted after waking up at 3am.

    Anyways, thank you for always reading my friend– and Godspeed. Always be grateful for the life you have (rather than the life you don’t have). Count everyday as a blessing, live life to the fullest, and go out and shoot :)

  • On Capturing Beauty in the Mundane

    On Capturing Beauty in the Mundane

    Detroit, 2013
    Detroit, 2013

    Dear friend,

    I want to share you with excitement a new idea that I got, from William Eggleston. The concept is quite simple (and I know I have shared this with you in the past) but it is this: Street photography is all about capturing beauty in the mundane.

    Almost a year ago, I ordered “From Black and White to Color” from Eggleston, a lovely photobook that is yellow on the outside, and fits nicely on the hand. It is a lot easier to hold and look at than Eggleston’s unweildy “Chromes” (and much cheaper), and also has a great selection of images.

    The funny story is that I just got back here to Berkeley, and was cleaning up my apartment. I’m choosing a lot of “normal” books to donate to the Salvation Army, and am starting to figure out what kind of photobooks I want to give away to friends or those who might appreciate them.

    Anyways, the funny thing is that I ordered this book: “From Black and White to Color” ages ago, but never opened it. So when I saw it on my shelf, I took off the plastic cling-wrap, sat down on my kitchen table, drank another espresso, and started to look at the images.

    What I realized was this: his photos are of nothing– of boring life in Memphis. In the past when I first saw his images, I didn’t “get” them. All of his photos looked like bad snapshots of boring shit. Why was he so famous, well-regarded, and seen as a God of color photography?

    I started to realize that his genius and contribution to the photographic world was this: he lived almost his entire life in his boring town of Memphis, and tried his best to make interesting photos of the boring material he was presented with. Although he was rich, he didn’t spend his time in foreign travels, going to Paris or all these other exotic places in the world to make interesting photos. He realized that his own backyard was ample enough, and spent his entire life (quite diligently) to make beautiful images from the banal, boring, mundane, and ordinary.

    I complain a lot about the city I live in (Berkeley). I get the “grass is greener on the other side” syndrome in which I am jaded with my current surroundings. I wish I was in San Francisco, Paris, Tokyo, New York, or another exotic location– to make interesting photos.

    But what Eggleston has taught me is that the entire world exists in your own backyard; and what matters in photography is how you can make something boring look interesting, rather than trying to capture something interesting in a boring way.

    I watched a documentary on Eggleston, and one of his friends (a famous photographer, forget his name) was quite excited to visit Eggleston in Memphis. But once he arrived there, he was massively disappointed. Memphis was boring as shit. Yet, how did Eggleston manage to make interesting photos of where he lived?

    Reading a little upon the history of Eggleston, I learned some interesting things.

    First of all, he started (like many of us) inspired by the work of Henri Cartier-Bresson. When Eggleston was studying at the University of Mississippi in Oxford, he developed a passionate interest in photography:

    “A photographer friend of mine…bought a book of MAgnum work with some Cartier-Bresson pictures that were real fucking art, period.”

    Eggleston idolized Cartier-Bresson, and said:

    “I couldn’t imagine doing anything more than making a perfect fake Cartier-Bresson.”

    The funny thing is that Eggleston (like myself) went to Paris to try to imitate Cartier-Bresson, but once he was there, he realized that all the subject-material was already exhausted, and it was pointless for him to “reinvent the wheel.” Apparently the entire visit Eggleston was in Paris, he didn’t even take a single shot.

    After Eggleston finished his studies (he didn’t get a degree), he moved to Memphis and made black and white prints in his own darkroom. When he returned to Memphis from his Paris trip, he complained to his friend and mentor Tom Young:

    “I don’t particularly like what’s around me.”

    However Young gave him some really great words of wisdom, by replying that this might be a reason to take pictures. Eggleston realized the genius in this idea and said: “You know, that’s not a bad idea.”

    So basically Eggleston had the realization that he needed to confront his immediate surroundings and use them as a source of inspiration for his subjects and images:

    “I had to face the fact that what I had to do was go out in foreign landscapes. What was new back then was shopping centers, and I took pictures of them.”

    This is the challenge that I face: I hate looking at my own surroundings, as I think everything as boring, cliche, and uninteresting.

    But I need to start asking myself: What is interesting or new or changing in Berkeley? Currently, there is a lot of gentrification happening in the neighborhood. A Whole Foods just entered the neighborhood (ironically next to a Dollar Tree store), hipster coffee shops galore, and that is causing rents to skyrocket. Berkeley was expensive enough, but North Berkeley/Albany (the neighborhood where I live, near the “Gilman District”) is starting to push out poorer people who can no longer afford rents.

    I went to Whole Food’s the other day, and was chilling outside in front of the cafe, enjoying the nice sun and a book (reading philosophy by Epicurus) and overheard a conversation between a man and a woman. The man was sitting in a V8 Mercedes-Benz (turbo-charged), and the woman was commenting on how she loved the sound of the engine, and how she owned a similar model, but without the big engine. The guy started to grin, rev his engine, and was totally showing off his cock. The whole conversation was quite repulsive to me, and really showed the absurdity of the wealth in the area. I then also took a look at the parking lot of Whole Foods; all I saw were BMW’s, Prius’s, Mercedes-Benz’s, Maseratis (a few), and Nissan Leaf’s. Eco-chic, rich, Berkeley folks.

    So perhaps I should even do a photography project on the Whole Foods here, and photograph the people in the parking lot, inside the store, and inside the cafe (they even have their own private “Allegro” high-end cafe inside, with $3.00 espressos, which actually don’t taste all that great).

    But to get back to the point, I know that you might also be jaded by where you live. You might live in a suburb, you might commute stuck in traffic, you might work in an office cubicle in the middle of nowhere– perhaps some industrial park.

    But what do you find interesting in your immediate surroundings? Perhaps you are surrounded by neighbors who all they do is try to “keep up with the Joneses” by buying bigger cars, bigger homes, and showing off wealth. Perhaps you can document that. Perhaps you can do a photo-series on office life (I recommend checking “Office” by Lars Tunbjork). Perhaps you can do a “personal documentary” series of your own life (photograph your family, friends, and loved ones seriously like art). I am actually doing a photo series on my life with Cindy called the “Cindy Project.” As I’m typing these words on my iPad, Cindy is eating an enchilada for lunch, checking emails on her laptop, and I have my Leica next to me– and I just snapped 3 snapshots of her.

    Regardless of your external circumstances, there are always opportunities to make images. And the more boring the place you live, the better. Why? The more boring the place you live, the harder you need to work to make interesting images. And the more boring the place you live, the less likely that there are famous bodies of work done there.

    I actually feel the worst for street photographers in NYC– so much great work has been done there already. They must feel a lot of pressure trying to supersede what’s been done before them.

    So what kind of “foreign landscapes” can you photograph in your own city? If you were an outsider, visiting your own city like a tourist, what would you find interesting?

    You never know what something looks like, unless you take a photograph

    Remember friend, photography is all about risk-taking. When you click the shutter, who knows if it will end up being an interesting or boring photograph?

    I think the fun and excitement of photography is that you never 100% know what the photograph is going to look like when you click the shutter. After all, the camera renders our three-dimensional reality into a two-dimensional plane.

    So for example, when I take a photograph in black and white film (Tri-X pushed to 1600 with a yellow filter), I have no fucking clue what the resulting photograph is going to look like. That is the fun and excitement. This is a bit why I dislike shooting digital; you have too much control over what the final image will look like (you can always play with the RAW files).

    But regardless if you shoot film or digital, the ultimate result of what the photo looks like is out of your control. Sometimes you don’t notice all the details in a photograph, like the expression of someone’s face, or if something randomly pops in the background.

    I think we need to glue this saying by Garry Winogrand to the back of our cameras:

    “I don’t have anything to say. I photograph to find out what something will look like when photographed.” – Garry Winogrand

    Another thing I found interesting about Eggleston’s way of working is that he always tried to shoot from a different angle, a different perspective– which was out-of-the-ordinary:

    “I think I had often wondered what other things see– if they saw like we see. And I’ve tried to make a lot of different photographs as if a human did not take them. Not that a machine took them, but that maybe something took them that was not merely confined to walking on the earth. And I can’t fly, but I can make experiments.”

    So if a chair could take photographs, what would the perspective of the chair be? Or if an ant could take a photograph, what would the world look like from the ant’s perspective (one of my favorite Eggleston photos is of a tricycle, shot from a super-low angle, which literally does look like an ant shot it, which makes the tricycle look larger-than-life).

    Don’t just shoot human beings

    Friend, another lesson I learned is that in photography (don’t worry about the definition of “street photography”) you don’t always need to photograph human beings. Sometimes by photographing objects, you get a sense of human-feeling.

    For example, one person once commented to William Eggleston that his photos didn’t have enough people in them. Eggleston responded by saying: “Objects in photos are naturally full of human presence.” Some of Eggleston’s most memorable photos are of boring, everyday, mundane things like home appliances, sinks, ovens, freezers, and even food– subjects that many photographers of his time totally overlooked.

    So once again, I think the secret of making great photography is to truly find the beauty in the mundane– of capturing interesting photos of boring things and places.

    The “democratic camera”

    Another concept I learned from Eggleston was the concept of the “democratic camera”– that he wouldn’t judge things, people, or places as “good” or “bad”– but would see them on equal footing.

    He didn’t discriminate scenes or subject-matter. To him, all things could be made interesting. By embracing a “democratic camera” – you aren’t being prejudiced to “boring” scenes.

    The difficulty with shooting with a “democratic camera” is that you are constantly at “war with the obvious” (another term coined by Eggleston). Because how can you make what is obvious and boring look interesting?

    Eggleston retorts by saying: “I’ve never felt the need to enhance the world in my pictures.”

    The funny thing is that it is a quite Taoist belief; that the world is perfect just the way it is, and no need to make it look “more interesting.” BBTW, here is a fun related article you can read: “Lessons Taoism Has Taught Me About Street Photography.”

    Follow the light

    Ultimately the thing I love most about Eggleston’s work is the beautiful colors and light in his work. If you look at his beautiful color slide film photos, you can see that his most successful shots were at sunset; when the colors started to scream with brightness and intensity.

    At the end of the day, light is what photography is all about. I have often found that boring scenes can be rendered into beautiful scenes, just by capturing them in good light.

    Conclusion

    So friend, I recommend you to pick up a copy of “From Black and White to Color” by William Eggleston, which is a relatively affordable introduction to his work. I prefer it over his other book: “William Eggleston’s Guide”, as the book I recommended you has a combination of both his color and black and white work. Eggleston is famous for his color work, but it is absolutely fascinating to look into his black and white work, and see how inspired and influenced he was by Cartier-Bresson.

    Also make sure to read the article: “10 Lessons William Eggleston Has Taught Me About Street Photography“.

    Another good takeaway point: Every “master” has started off by copying another “master.” So don’t feel bad, guilty, dirty, or whatever by imitating the work of another great photographer. We all need to start somewhere.

    Lastly, embrace the beauty in where you live. I know it is hard my friend, but try to make beautiful photos of boring, banal, and ordinary things.

    Seek the beauty in the mundane, and you will be truly set free in your photography.

    Farewell, and Godspeed!

    Love, hope, and encouragement from your friend,

    Eric

    Written from 7:30am–8:45am, at my home in Berkeley, 9/2/2015 after about 4 espressos (give me a break, I’ve been up since 3:30am, still jetlagged from Stockholm). But it is going to be a beautiful day. I have the entire day ahead of me, planning on meeting my mom and my sister hopefully for dinner, and have some plans on shooting more black and white film, and perhaps even printing them in the darkroom. Started off the day reading “Tao Te Ching” and feeling super zenned out. Life is good :)

  • Before/After: Stockholm Conquer Your Fear Street Photography Workshop 2015

    Before/After: Stockholm Conquer Your Fear Street Photography Workshop 2015

    Student photo by Robert Heaney
    Student photo by Robert Heaney

    Just finished an incredible “Conquer Your Fear of Shooting Street Photography” here in Stockholm, and wow– this is one of the most awesome before/afters. I was so impressed to see how much all of the students pushed themselves out of their comfort zones, and how they started off the work terrified to approach strangers and shoot at a close distance, to having no problem at all– even using flashes, edgy compositions, while building a human connection with their subjects.

    Man I have to say, I love teaching these workshops to death. They are so damn fun, and I love meeting all of the students time and time again. Some people ask me, “Eric, aren’t you bored of teaching the same old workshop over and over again?” Never. There are always new students, with new perspectives, who also inform my thinking and judgement. Not only that, but I always strive to do something a little different each workshop, and I am proud to know that every new workshop gets a little bit and little bit better.

    20150830_124949

    I also started to realize what I love most about teaching the workshops; building a sense of community. Many at the students at the workshop didn’t know any other street photographers, and now they know some other local street photographers in Stockholm to meet up, have coffee with, shoot together, and “kill babies” together (editing down images).

    I’m so blessed to do what I love for a living, and I am also proud of all the students at this workshop (and all the other workshops) for their enthusiasm, passion, and improvement. Keep rocking on brothers and sisters! :)

    See all the great before/after photos below, and you can also check out my upcoming street photography workshops in San Francisco, New Orleans (1 spot left), and Downtown Los Angeles.

    Andre Scholten

    Before (Never shot street photography before)

    After:

    andre-scholten-1 andre-scholten-2 andre-scholten-3

    Bjorn Sundqvist

    Before:

    Workshop (1 of 3) Workshop (2 of 3) Workshop (3 of 3)

    After:

    Bjorn Sundqvist (1 of 2)

    Bjorn Sundqvist (2 of 2)

    Daniel Fredholm

    Before:

    DSCF2026-Redigera DSCF2506-Redigera-2

    DSCF2793-Redigera

    After:

    DanielFredholm_1

    Gunnar Swärd

    Before:

    DSCF2201 DSCF2365 DSCF3204

    After:

    Gunnar Swärd 4 Gunnar Swärd 5

    Martin Draeger

    Before:

    NY_01_single NY_23 NY_46

    After:

    Smoking Tough

    Micael Sjölund

    Before:

    Feet

     

    OLYMPUS DIGITAL CAMERA

    OLYMPUS DIGITAL CAMERA

    After:

    Workshop-1 Workshop-2 Workshop-3

    Patrik Bergström

    Before:

    A photo from the rough but beatiful cementary in Xela, Guatemala. In the center 2 mayan ladies are walking with there traditional funeral clothing. In the background you can see the Santa Maria volcano.

    A woman hanging out in her window in Isla Ometepe, Nicauragua.

    Some kids playing outside their house, in Kuna Yala.

    After:

    DSCF1433 DSCF1551

    Riki Kawakami

    Before:

    FullSizeRender_1 FullSizeRender_2 FullSizeRender

    After:

    Riki Kawakami-1

    Robert Heaney

    Before:

    London church-goers Stureplan Tramps

    After:

    Favorites - 2 of 3 Favorites - 3 of 3

    Sean Joyce

    Before:

    CNV00001-2 R0000109 R0000685

    After:

    Sean Joyce - 2 Sean Joyce - 3

    Sten Widerstrom

    Before:

    Sten-3 Sten-4 Sten

    After:

    Sten Widerstrom-4

    Sue

    Before (never shot street photography)

    After:

    Sue2

    Upcoming Street Photography Workshops

    Don’t miss out on upcoming workshops!

    Vienna Conquer Your Fear of Shooting Street Photography Group Photo 2015
    Vienna Conquer Your Fear of Shooting Street Photography Group Photo 2015

    Don’t miss out the chance when I am visiting to your city for you to conquer your fears and meet new peers in street photography. Subscribe to my newsletter below, and stay in the insider’s loop! Excited to see you soon :)


  • Italian Street Photography at the Forefront: An Interview with SPontanea collective (Italian Translation Available)

    Italian Street Photography at the Forefront: An Interview with SPontanea collective (Italian Translation Available)

     

    Photo by Carmelo Eramo
    Photo by Carmelo Eramo

    SPonatanea is a very active and organized street photography collective based out of Italy. In the interview, I talked to them about their formation, activities, and upcoming projects. This interview also has a full italian translation at the bottom! Check it out. (All photos are the respective ownership of the SPOontanea collective members.)

    A.g.: What is the motivation behind SPontanea? How was it formed?

    SPontanea: SPontanea was born in 2013. The idea was to found an Italian collective dedicated to Street Photography, capable of facing on equal terms the other existing international realities, hoping to become over time a quality reference point in Italy. The founding members were chosen on the basis of a reciprocal respect and appreciation – we already knew each other from the web – in order to bring together a wide range of styles and approaches, representing a solidly structured and well defined Italian photographic vision on Street Photography.

    (more…)

  • Don’t Be a Slave

    Don’t Be a Slave

    SF, 2015
    SF, 2015

    Read as a Google Doc (feel free to suggest edits), or download and print out the PDF.

    I am a slave. I am a slave to others’ opinions of me. I am a slave to material things. I am a slave to my bank account and money. I am a slave of my wardrobe, of my cameras, my material possessions, my gadgets, my smartphone, my friends, my health, and everything external from me.

    Not only that, but I have compromised a lot in the past. I have compromised my morals, my principles, what I believe in– all for fearing that others might judge me, that others would hate on me, that I would become broke and homeless, and that ultimately nobody would love me.

    I’m a slave the comments I get on the blog, to the number of “likes” I get on Instagram, or the amount of followers that I have. I often feel held back creatively because at the back of my head I’m always thinking: “But what will others think about me?” Not only that, but I’m constantly asking people for feedback; because I am insecure about my path in photography, my writing style, and my behavior as a human being.

    I have always been an insecure person. According to my Myers-Briggs personality type, I a an “ESFP — meaning that I draw my energy from other people, that I crave concrete and practical solutions, that I listen to my heart more than my head, and that I hate routines and crave “going with the flow.”

    I am very much like my mom, in-fact.

    Let me tell you a story about my mom (the most amazing person in the universe). She met my Dad in the states, and that is where I was born (San Francisco). But when I was a baby (perhaps 1-2 years old), she realized that he wouldn’t be the father that she expected him to be. Low and behold, my Dad has never held a job since I was 2 years old, and since then (until now), my mom has been working her entire life working menial part-time jobs or labor-intensive jobs. In the past to pay the bills (and put food on the table), she has worked cleaning houses, as a nanny, cashier, and as a waitress (which she is still today). But she has never once complained in her life; even with my dad being physically (even worse, mentally abusive), even when my Dad would gamble the rent money (and we thought we might be homeless the next month), or even when my Dad would blackmail her.

    However what was the problem? My mom was a slave to my Dad. She was the most loving and forgiving person. No matter how much my Dad would fuck up our lives (and cause my mom extreme pain and anguish), she would always forgive him, and let him back into our lives.

    But old dogs don’t learn new tricks. Well, perhaps sometimes, but rarely.

    Long story short, my mom never learned how to say “no.” She would always compromise in her life, always having hope. My mom’s biggest weakness is that she can’t let people down. She always puts others before herself, which is a generally noble thing, but she did it at a huge expense– her sanity, health, stress, and emotions.

    The happiest day in my life was when my mom decided to leave my Dad. Taking this “via negativa approach” to life (removing the negative people in your life) brought my mom more happiness and joy than anything in life. Not only that, but it has brought me a lot more happiness as well.

    I have written about this in the past, that life is more about subtraction than addition. The truth is, removing 1 shitty or negative person from your life is more important than adding 10 positive people to your life. Similarly when it comes to your health, it is more important to stop eating McDonalds than simply adding blueberries to your diet.

    Why do I bring up my mom?

    Well, I am exactly like my mom. I am a total pushover, I don’t know how to say “no,” and my biggest fear is letting people down.

    I can honestly say that I have never done or said anything (intentionally) to hurt or harm anybody. All the fuck ups in my life have been unintentionally. I have hurt so many loved ones and friends because I wasn’t considerate enough, because I didn’t watch my mouth, because I was forgetful, because I didn’t see their perspective, because I rushed into action, or because I was selfish (unintentionally).

    But once I realize that I upset or hurt somebody, I feel extreme guilt. I mean, true extreme guilt. In the past I have said or done a few small things that upset some close friends, and I literally lost a week-worth of sleep, because I would ruminate on all of the negative thoughts in my mind. I am prone to regret, self-criticism, and self-flagellation. I have a lot of mental psychoses that I try to cure myself of (that is why I read so much philosophy; especially Stoicism, Zen Buddhism, Taoism, and Christianity).

    But isn’t it a good thing to be considerate of the feelings of others? Isn’t it good to try not to upset anybody? Isn’t it good to be a good boy, listen to the rules, sit in your chair, listen to the teacher, government, or strangers on the internet? Isn’t it bad to step out of line, to say something you believe in (that might hurt someone’s feelings), or to “be different?”

    Breaking free from slavery

    I no longer want to be a slave. I don’t want to be a slave to the opinions of others. I want to truly say what is on my mind, with no filter, and no bullshit. I want to be authentic, transparent, and to continue wearing my heart on my sleeve. I am a flawed human being, with tons of problems of my own. I don’t give a shit if people judge me or not anymore, I just want to pour out my heart, soul, and unedited thoughts on the page.

    I compromise too much on my ideals. No more. I want to live like Socrates, and stay true to my morals and principles, rather than being tempted by money, fame, success, and influence.

    You know how I say “buy books, not gear” and how I preach about “one camera, one lens” and also how you shouldn’t fall victim to “GAS” (Gear Acquisition Syndrome)? You know I contradict myself all the time. I have bought tons of gear in the past that I didn’t need, and didn’t stick to the “one camera, one lens” philosophy either. I expected others to comply to this “ideal reality” — without wanting to keep my skin in the game, and listen to my own principles.

    But fuck it, I pledge to you that I  will no longer contradict myself, unless I have some huge revelation in the next few years.

    First of all, I realize that I am a slave to money and influence. In the past, I  have kissed a lot of ass (especially to camera companies like Leica and Fujifilm), because I wanted to feel important, special, and to be “affiliated” with important brands. To be frankly honest, one of the main reasons I first got a Leica M9 was to be taken more “seriously” (not only that, but Leica didn’t like the fact that I  blogged for them and was shooting with a Canon 5D). Also with Fujifilm, I hoped that they could help sponsor the blog, and I could make some money advertising with them.

    I rationalized this all to myself saying that “I was doing this for the greater good. I am only going to (partly) ‘sell out’ so I can make more money, to have more security, to blog more, to continue to give out more free content and ebooks, without having to worry if I could pay the bills or not.”

    But in reality, I have always been able to pay the bills, even after I got laid off my job over 5 years ago. I honestly don’t give a shit about money, but I  know subconsciously, I wanted more money because I was afraid. I was afraid that one day I would become like my mom, constantly strapped for cash, stressed out, worried that I couldn’t pay the rent, and the possibility that my kids might be homeless.

    But fuck it, all my basic needs are taken care of. If there is anything I learned from the ancient Greek philosopher Epicurus is that in life we only need 3 things to survive: freedom from hunger, freedom from thirst, and freedom from the cold. Everything else is optional.

    I don’t suffer from hunger (although I do practice intermittent fasting to take away my sense of entitlement, and also for health benefits), I don’t suffer from thirst (I drink a shit-load of coffee, tea, and water), and I don’t suffer from the cold (I live in California). My basic needs are met, what else do I need?

    Sometimes I joke with my friends: I only need 3 things: eggs, coffee, and wifi. But it is true, everything else is superfluous.

    Of course that is just me being “greedy.” What about taking care of my family? Cindy? My future children?

    Of course I want to take care of them as best as I can. But I need to remind myself, I can’t compromise on my morales, even for them.

    When Socrates was ordered to drink poison, he had (at the time) a wife and children. Rather than deciding to go into exile, he decided to stick to his sense of morals and justice, and drank the poison. Some of his friends pleaded for him to go into exile instead, for the sake of his family. But at the end of the day, had Socrates not drank the poison, nobody would have respected the beliefs of Socrates. Socrates practiced what he preached, didn’t compromise, and now his life (and actions) live on forever, inspiring countless generations (even a young kid like me).

    Now don’t get me wrong. I’m not just going to be a hobo for the rest of my life, and let my future family starve to death. Hell no, I am going to dedicate my life to being the most kick-ass Dad ever. If anything, I truly appreciate my Dad, and think he was the best father ever. This is partly because he was the best “anti-role model” — in order to be a good father, I just need to do exactly opposite of what he did to me.

    As an aside; I hold no ill will towards my Dad. Honestly, he was pretty fucked up psychologically from my grandfather (who died when I was 2). My grandfather (to my understanding) never really showed love or gave credit to my Dad, who was extremely hard-working, intelligent, and the first of the entire family to master English and come to America. But some reason or another my Dad started to suffer from mental diseases, which fucked up his judgement, caused hate to enter his heart (my grandma, who I love, told me that my Dad used to be the most gentle and shy kid), and harbored resentment to the external world. I think my Dad did the best he could to try to raise me up well; by instilling the morales of hard work, education, and working hard to be “successful” (and rich). At the end of the day, he is a flawed human being (like all of us, especially myself). I haven’t talked to my Dad in a long time, as my heart is still healing from all the mental blackmail he has given to me in the past. But I think I’ll soon be ready to open up to him again.

    Anyways, yeah fuck photography. My future kids are going to be more important to me. In-fact, when I have my first kid, I vow not to work the first year, to spend every minute with my future newborn child. I will dedicate my photography to documenting the life of my child (will also shoot on film), and also of my life with Cindy. Even at the moment, my “Cindy project” is the most meaningful project to me in my life. And I know when I’m on my deathbed (even if I die of cancer at age 50), I will have no regrets, and be grateful for all the love and friendship we shared in our (very short) life together.

    Going back to the original point of not being a slave, I want to try to disconnect more and more from the internet, social media, and what others think.

    Funny enough, the person I find the most inspiration from (in terms of not compromising) is Kanye West. Love him or hate him; he is true to who he is. Like he says in his song, “New Slaves”: “I would rather be a dick than a swallower.”

    Kanye West wore pink polos, skinny jeans, and backpacks when other rappers were wearing baggy clothes. Kanye West rapped about Jesus, when other rappers were rapping about money, cash, and hoes. Kanye West made an album (808’s and heartbreaks) and sang in the album (even though he admitted he isn’t a good singer) to express himself (he was heavily criticized for the album and called all these names on the internet). Kanye West publicly said on live TV: “Bush doesn’t care about black people.” He has also stayed true to his artistic vision, is constantly pushing the boundaries of rap music, and speaks his mind — regardless of what others think of him.

    Another modern figure who I have great admiration for is Steve Jobs. Sure people paint him as an asshole; but I see it differently. I see a man who never compromised on his values or beliefs. He spoke with no filter and hurt a lot of feelings. But he did it for the greater good. He had a 0% filter for bullshit, and he wanted to use his short time on earth to create something meaningful. He believed so much in the beauty and aesthetics of his products, that he would even make the insides of the Mac computers beautiful (a good carpenter doesn’t use cheap wood on the back of a drawer, even if nobody can see it). Obsessed with perfection, he never took “no” as an answer. People would fall entranced by his “reality distortion field” and make things possible that nobody else thought was possible. I remember hearing a story in the Walter Isaacson biography in which one of the first Mac computers booted up too slow. He told one of the programmers to make the startup time faster. The programmer told him it wasn’t possible. Steve Jobs then made a point: “If you could shave off 30 seconds of boot time from this computer, across thousands (potentially millions of people), you will save hundreds and thousands of hours for humanity).” The next day the programmer was able to figure out how to shave off 30 seconds off the boot time (possibly even more).

    When I write, when I photograph, or whenever I create, or speak, I am still scared shitless. I am still scared of offending people and upsetting them. At the end of the day, other people’s opinion of me matters more than my own opinion of myself. But I want to switch that around.

    Josef Koudelka is King

    Josef Koudelka is probably my favorite photographer of all time. Both in terms of his photography and how he lives his life. He values freedom above everything else; freedom of his time, his opinion, and does exactly what he wants to do. He is a human being who also hasn’t compromised in his life or photography. I want to emulate him.

    It is quite incredible; he hasn’t paid rent nor has he taken on any commercial assignments that he didn’t believe in:

    “I have never accepted any magazine or commercial assignments. I do not have any deadlines. I do not need any outside pressure to work. It is very important for me to feel that I am free. I make photographs for myself.”

    He has also arranged his entire life to give him the ultimate freedom of time to do what he is most passionate about, which is shooting:

    “At the moment my life is organized to give me the greatest possible time and freedom to actually shoot photographs.”

    Koudelka has also inspired me in the sense that he sets no rules or barriers for himself. Rather, his only rule in photography is below:

    “You should take photographs how you feel you should be taking photographs” – Josef Koudelka

    There are so many people out there who tell you how you “should” be taking photographs. But there are no rights or wrongs in photography. The only rule is following your own heart; and not caring about what others think about you and your work.

    For Koudelka, he doesn’t want any sort of restrictions in his work (or life):

    “What I have written about here is my approach to photography now and in the past. It may not hold true tomorrow. I do not want to lay down rules for other people and I do not intend to be restricted by any myself. I feel that my life and perhaps my work are changing at the moment, but my basic interests have not altered. Above all, the most important for me is to keep working.”

    I have always found it fascinating how Koudelka was able to stay so true to his own personal vision; of doing what exactly in life he wanted to do. Interestingly enough, growing up in communist Czechoslovakia helped him pursue what he was interested in (rather than just what made money):

    “The lack of the freedom to make money forced us to do things we believed in, that interested us, and that we liked to do. We now if we became engineers, we would make less money than street-sweepers. In the West, it was different.”

    I am also deeply inspired by his ascetic lifestyle. Apparently when he is on the road, all he carries with him is two shirts (one that he wears), one pair of pants, two pairs of socks, two pairs of underwear, a small sleeping bag (and mat), film (Tri-X), 3 cameras, and a spare pair of glasses. That is pretty much it:

    “I tried avoiding owning anything. I didn’t pay rent. I knew that I didn’t need much to function: just some food and a good night’s sleep.”

    I have been discovering something similar during my time abroad the last 3 months or so. All I have done is traveled with my small backpack (Thinktank perception 15) and a small leather messenger bag. All of my life’s possessions fit in there.

    All I have packed for my trip include 2 shirts, 2 pairs of socks, 1 pair of pants, 2 pairs of ExOfficio boxers, a Kindle paperwhite, notebook, Leica MP and 35mm lens, Tri-X film (brought 120 rolls for the trip, shot around 80 so far), a laptop (Lenovo Windows 8 PC/Tablet I bought in an airport in Lisbon after getting my 11’’ Macbook air stolen in Paris), toothbrush and retainer, and that is pretty much it.

    There is so much freedom in traveling light, and realizing how little physical stuff I need to survive. I don’t need any of my photobooks, additional clothes, additional cameras, additional stuff, etc. Funny enough, the fewer material things I have, the happier I  am.

    Another thing that Koudelka has inspired me with: he rarely processes and prints his photographs. Apparently he (used to shoot) around 1,000 rolls of film a year, and focused his energy only on shooting. He is worried about the processing of his film later. Apparently he hasn’t even seen some photos he has shot 10 years ago. He explains his rationale:

    “I don’t want to lose time. I want to put all of my energy into taking photographs. Last year I spent 11 months traveling. Until now I’ve been in good health.I know this is not going to last forever.”

    Josef Koudelka seems quite similar to Garry Winogrand in the sense that they are more interested in shooting and living life, rather than worrying about the results.

    Not only that, but it seems to be a good strategy; why not spend all of your energy and effort shooting while you are still healthy, and you can do all the processing and editing once you’re not able to travel or shoot anymore? Or you can be like Winogrand, and die with 6,500 rolls of undeveloped film, and have someone else process and edit them for you.

    Another reason I love shooting film: I know people will be able to access my negatives 200 years from now. No way are they going to be able to access my RAW files.

    When I shoot digital, I have a problem that I look at the photos too quickly. I look at the images the day-of, which makes me depressed. I am bound to not get any good photos in only one day of shooting. If  I get one good street photograph a month, I’m lucky.

    So if I shoot film, I don’t get my film processed for 6 months-1 year. According to my math; if I can get 1 good shot a month, that means 12 good shots a year. So if I wait a year before looking at my images, I am bound to get a handful of shots I’m happy with. There is less noise, and more signal.

    Furthermore, I also find that when I’m traveling, I stay up too late at night receiving the digital shots that I shoot. I much prefer the peace of mind of shooting the film during the day, letting it sit and “marinate”, and being able to sleep at night.

    Another Idea I have; I might experiment “crowdsourcing” the editing of my images somewhere down the line; to see which photos resonate most with others.

    But didn’t I say earlier that I didn’t care about what others thought about my images, and that I would shoot to please myself?

    Yes, I will still shoot to please myself first. But if I upload images on the internet, they are ultimately more about the viewers; not myself. The really personal shots that I make that make me happy will stay offline, for me and close friends and family to enjoy.

    Josef Koudelka is probably also one of the most famous photographers out there, but becoming famous has never been his focus. Funny enough, he has only shot for himself his entire life, and because he stayed true to his values, he became famous for his dedication in his work and craft.

    He doesn’t care about becoming famous, he is only interested in working and not being bothered by others:

    “Fame doesn’t interest me. I dont like being the center of attention. I like to concentrate on working and not be disturbed.”

    This is a good reminder for me; I get too distracted by social media and worrying too much about what others think about me. Everytime I check Twitter, comments on the blog, Instagram, Facebook, whatever– positive and negative feedback hurt me. Positive feedback inflates my ego and makes me feel important. Negative feedback makes me feel shitty, and frustrated. I think the secret is to just ignore everybody, except my own opinion of myself, and the opinion of a few close friends. I’d have to say after uninstalling all social media apps from my phone, I finally have some peace and serenity of mind– and am able to focus on more important things, like writing this article.

    What is the only thing Koudelka is interested? He doesn’t care about being the “best” photographer out there. Rather, he wants to satisfy himself, and become the best photographer he possibly can become. He wants to find his limits, and push himself to the maximum:

    “Everybody has a right to think what he wants. I know who I am. I don’t do what i do in order to make somebody like me, or to prove something to someone, or to be the best. I do it for myself, for my own satisfaction. I want to find my limits, to see how far I can go.”

    Koudelka is truly an exemplar for me.

    Sure, I don’t want to ultimately be exactly like him. He has no home, probably not a lot of security financially, nor does he have a steady family life, or any sort of roots.

    I know for me, I need a sense of home and community. As Seneca said, “He who constantly travels has many acquaintances but few friends.”

    I also know that I don’t need to constantly be on the road to be happy. Paradise is in my own backyard. All the best photographic opportunities are in my own city, and I dont need to be in Tokyo or Paris to be inspired. My only limits are my creative potential, inside my head. Never my camera, film, or external circumstances.

    Lessons from Epictetus

    Another philosopher I gain immense inspiration regarding freedom is Epictetus, and many of these excerpts are from “Of Human Freedom” (the most inspirational essay I have ever read on freedom).

    What is “freedom” to Epictetus?

    “Free is the person who lives as he wishes and cannot be coerced, impeded or compelled, whose impulses cannot be thwarted, who always gets what he desires and never has to experience what he would rather avoid.”

    According to this, I have no freedom. I still am compelled to do things against my will.

    Not only that, but I am still a slave to negative emotions: like sadness, envy, and frustration:

    “Who wants to live life experiencing sadness, envy and pity, being frustrated in their desires and liable to experience what they want to avoid?” – Epictetus

    Haha even funnier, I can totally see myself being a slave to Cindy sometimes:

    “Weren’t you ever commanded by your sweetheart to do something you didn’t want to do?”

    Spot on Epictetus, your wisdom from 2,000 years still rings true.

    I also recall all the times I have done shit and went to events and parties I didn’t want to go, because of some sort of “social obligation” and peer pressure. I really need to learn how to say “no”:

    “Didn’t you ever risk going out at night where you didn’t want to go, spend more money than you had intended, say things in the course of the evening in accents or misery and woe, put up with being mocked, and finally locked out?”

    At the end of the day, I want to be free and unencumbered. I want to almost be like a wild animal. Sure, I might not have as much “security” and might go hungry at times, but I don’t want to become caged. How sad is it when you see a lion in a cage at the zoo?

    “Consider how we apply the idea of freedom to animals. There are tame lions that people cage, raise, feed and take with them wherever they go. Yet who will call such a lion free? The easier its life, the more slavish it is.”

    Sad enough, I still have a lot of friends and know people who are stuck in “golden cages.” Sure they might drive BMW’s, wear Rolex watches, make 6-figure incomes, own homes and whatnot– but their jobs and salaries own them, not the other way around. They hate their jobs, but cannot escape, because they have fallen on the “hedonic treadmill” — in which their lifestyle is constantly being upgraded (“downgrading” from a BMW 5-series to a Honda Civic can be painful to these people).

    They are like caged birds:

    “The birds above us, when they are caught and raised in a cage, will try anything for the sake of escape. Some starve to death rather than endure their condition. Those that survive– barely, grudgingly, wasting away– fly off in an instant when they find the least little opening to squeeze through, so great is their need for their native freedom, so strong the desire to be independent and unconfined.”

    But how do we find true freedom? Some advice from another philosopher, Diogenes:

    “One way to guarantee freedom is to be ready to die.” – Diogenes

    Sounds a bit melodramatic. We are lucky enough that in today’s society, we will never have to worry about dying. Our only concerns are social stigma (everyone calling you a failure), bankruptcy (losing all our money and our house), and perhaps becoming homeless (but if you live in a developed country, you will probably get some sort of assistance).

    Back in the ancient Roman and Greek days; these guys could literally be put to death by speaking their mind, against tyrannical emperors, or lived in social situations where they could literally starve to death. Unfortunately there are also some places in the world (India, Africa, etc) where people have been put to death, tortured, extorted, etc for standing up for their beliefs.

    I remember when I still had a full-time job, and my only wish was to get a promotion. I was “only” earning $40,000 a year (with benefits) as an Online Community Manager at eHow.com. I desperately wanted to earn more money (because everyone told me that money buys you happiness) — $50,000 sounded right. I tried to work hard to get a promotion by kissing ass, staying late at work, answering emails on weekends, and trying to climb the corporate ladder (I feel horrible for trying to step over some people, or play bullshit office politics). I would try to take credit whenever possible, and that ended up causing me to burn a lot of bridges. I feel terrible for that, even today.

    But the funny thing is that I was a slave to this rat race. I staked my happiness on the “once” and “what if” hypothesis. Once I earn $50,000 a year, I can truly be happy. Once I buy that new iPhone, I will truly be happy. Once I get that BMW M3 (cherry red), I will be happy. Once I get 10,000 followers on Twitter I will have “made” it.

    But that was all slavish thinking. Epictetus brings up a good example of what slaves think (when they wish to become “free men”):

    ‘Once I’m set free, everything will be roses right away. I won’t have to wait on anybody I can talk to everyone as an equal and a peer, travel wherever I like, come and go as I please.’ Then he is liberated, but now, looking for a place to eat, he looks around for someone to sweet-talk and dine with. Next he resorts to prostitution and, if he gets a sugar daddy, he suffers from the most degrading fate of all, having now fallen into a far more abject slavery than the one he escaped.”

    If we think that freedom is earning more money, earning promotions, gaining power and prestige in society; we are wrong.

    Nassim Taleb has a heuristic: to see if someone is successful or not, see if he or she can take a nap when he/she wants. I am sure there are billionaires out there who are still slaves to their wealth, inboxes, and business duties. These people can’t even take a nap if they wanted to.

    What is it that we all want in life? Epictetus shares:

    “To live in peace, to be happy, to do as we like and never be foiled or forced to act against our wishes.”

    How simple life is. We just want to live in peace (without drama or stress, or shitty bosses), to be happy and do what we like, and not forced to do shit we don’t want to do.

    But we all have excuses:

    One might say, “Oh I have a high-paying job that I hate. I would quit my job and do something I love, but I have a mortgage to pay, and kids to feed.”

    Then foreclose your house, and move into a smaller apartment so you don’t need to work as much.

    “But I have children, and I need to send them to private school.”

    Why send them to private school? Send them to a public school.

    “But I want them to have the best education that they can.”

    Realize that if you work less, and take a job that you love, perhaps you will have more free time to actually spend time with your kids, to play with them in the park, to read them books, and to educate them directly yourself.

    “But I have bills to pay, lots of debt, and a spouse to take care of.”

    File for bankruptcy, or figure out other ways to manage easier payments. If your spouse stays at home, perhaps your spouse can also pick up a job.

    We all make excuses for not following our life’s passion and goal. Life is short and brutal. Why not spend the small time we have doing what we love?

    “But what if I don’t want to quit my job?”

    I think that is totally fine; you can still carve out freedom from doing a “day job.” Just make sure that you turn off your email at 6pm and leave the office. Do the minimum amount of work not to get fired, and use your weekends and holidays to the fullest– to do creative work (in your case, take pictures and travel, invest in books and photography workshops).

    Sometimes having a stable and boring job can be a blessing, as long as you don’t allow yourself to mentally become a slave to it.

    No more kissing ass

    I have another thing I am trying to do; not kiss anymore ass. I have kissed so much ass in my lifetime, and my mouth smells like shit. I have read so many books on “networking” and have sent so many “coffee meeting” emails. and tried to associate myself with rich, powerful, or influential people with potential.

    But I realized, I am being a shallow bastard. I am just spending time to hopefully open up “new opportunities” (which ultimately means, make more money).

    But I already have enough money. I have enough to pay my rent, food, and coffee. I  am starting to realize that “networking” is a massive waste of time (I would prefer to spend time with friends and loved one, where there is no potential “gain” or “utility”). Networkers are slaves:

    “Whenever you see someone grovel before another, or flatter them insincerely, you can safely assume that that person is not free– and not just if a meal is at stake, but even when they abase themselves for the sake of a governorship or consulship. In fact, you can call the people who behave that way for small gains petty slaves, while the latter deserve to be called slaves on a grand scale.”

    So I now have a personal rule: Would I meet this person or spend time with them if I knew that they only earned $40,000 a year, or if they were just an entry-level position person? I have found myself that I enjoy more the conversations of baristas, janitors, and waiters than high-powered CEOs and managers.

    You might be thinking: “Eric, I want to be free, but I don’t earn enough money. Easy for you to say all this idealistic bullshit. You travel the world, do what you love, and have money saved up. How do you expect us who live day-to-day to not be a slave, and follow our passion?”

    I understand what you mean friend. However I also grew up in (slight) poverty and I know it is hard. But know that self-ownership and freedom isn’t a matter of how much money you have, or how many hours you need to work at your job. Rather, it is a state of mind.

    Not only that, but I have started to realize how little I need in life. I have made a conscious choice to limit the amount of workshops I do next year, to earn less money, and spend more time with Cindy and more time writing. Furthermore, I spend less time on social media, emails, “networking”, and am completely content with where I am in life. I am surely not the richest person out there, but I am satisfied with what I have. I feel that satisfaction with one’s life is true freedom:

    “What is it then that renders a person free and independent? Money is not the answer, nor is a governors, a consulship, or even a kingdom. Something else needs to be found.” – Epictetus

    Epictetus goes on by sharing us this question we should always ask ourselves:

    “Can anyone force you to choose something to which you’re opposed?”

    Also what do we fear?

    Sometimes I am afraid I will lose all of my money and material possessions, as Epictetus writes:

    “Perhaps you fear for the body and material possessions– things that lie outside your scope of responsibility and have no meaning for you.”

    But ultimately at the end of the day, money, my health, the health of my loves ones, are all externals. External things that I cannot control (regardless of how rich or powerful I am). So the secret? Don’t worry about any of that. The only thing we can control is our mind, how we decide to perceive events, and whether to see life in a positive (or negative) light.

    It is hard. Really fucking hard. I am a sucker for advertising, and a slave to material things. I am the one who gets a hard-on everytime there is a new Apple product releasing. I get tempted by new fancy cameras being released. I desire fast sports cars and designer clothes. I am a fallible human being.

    Another tip to happiness and freedom? Kill desire:

    “[Don’t] feel irrational desire any more. You have a fixed and measured desire for the good of the soul, since they are within your power and accessible. You disdain external goods, so that no opening exists for that irrational, intemperate and impulsive form of desire. With such an attitude towards things, you can no longer be intimidated by anyone.”

    If I don’t give a shit about desiring anything out of my control (or any new material things), I will no longer be a slave to others’ opinions.

    What are some other things I should surrender? Epictetus tells us:

    “Surrender the body and its embers, physical faculties, property, reputation, office, honours, children, siblings– repudiate them all.”

    I can’t control my health (whether I get cancer or not), whether I get into a car accident and lose control of my legs, whether someone (accidentally) pokes me in the eyes and I lose my vision, whether a family member gets sick and my bank account gets cleaned out, whether people on the internet will like me or not, whether I will win any awards for being the “most influential photography blogger” or whatever, if my kids die at a young age from a rare disease, whether my sister or Cindy dies in a freak accident.

    By preparing for the worst, we can truly live life freely– without stress or anxiety.

    I don’t want to be held back by doing what I want to do. I want to (as Kanye West says) “Wild the fuck out” and write what I want to write, shoot what I want to shoot, say what I want to say, and not give a flying fuck about what others think:

    “The tyrants’ bodyguards, too, can stay, for how can they affect me? Their sticks, their spears and their knives are meant for other people. I, personally, was never kept from something I wanted, nor had forced upon me something I was opposed to.” – Epictetus

    Funny enough, even though I believe in Stoicism, Zen Buddhism, and Taoist beliefs– I am still a Catholic at heart. I don’t believe “God” as some bearded dude in heaven. In-fact, I am a bit dubious about there being an afterlife. Regardless, I do believe in some sort of cosmic force in the universe, and that everything happens for a reason. That mantra has helped me endure through all the difficult and painful times I had growing up, and has helped me become a stronger person.

    Epictetus also mentions the importance of submitting his will to “God” (which was a different concept from the Judeo-Christian God):

    “How did I manage it? I submitted my will to God. He wants me to be sick– well, then, so do I. He wants me to choose something. Then I choose it. He wants me to desire something, I desire it. He wants me to get something, I want the same; or he doesn’t want me to get it, and I concur. Thus I assent to death and torture. Now no one can make me, or keep me, from acting in line with my inclination, any more than they can similarly manipulate God.”

    Whatever you believe in, know that ultimately everything will work out fine. Worst case scenario; you will die. And what is so bad about death? Once you’re dead, you won’t feel any pain. We’re always afraid of the pain we feel before death, not death itself.

    Another thing that I use whenever something difficult or shitty happens in my life: “How can I turn this negative experience into a positive one?

    I still have a hard time letting go of my physical possessions. I am attached to them, and have some “hoarding” tendencies. Some advice Epictetus gives us to start giving less shits about our material possessions:

    “These are the reflections you should recur to morning and night. Start with things that are least valuable and most liable to be lost– things such as a jug or a glass– and proceed to apply the same ideas to clothes, pets, livestock, property; then to yourself, your body, the body’s parts, your children, your siblings, and your wife. Look on every side and mentally discard them. Purify your thoughts, in case of an attachment or devotion to something that doesn’t belong to you and will hurt to have wrenched away.”

    When I get back home, I want to purge all of my “stuff.” I want to donate the clothes I don’t wear, I want to give away photography books to my friends who would appreciate them, I want to start donating other random trinkets to Goodwill, and edit down my physical possessions so that they can fit into just one small backpack. And that small backpack is the only thing I want to take to Vietnam.

    I don’t say any of this to sound high and mighty, or some sort of “enlightened” philosopher. Rather, I am a slave. A slave that is trying to be happy, and to emancipate myself from the bullshit of society’s expectations of me. Epictetus told me the importance of trying to emancipate myself from slavery on a daily basis:

    “As you exercise daily, as you do at the gym, do not say that you are philosophizing (admittedly a pretentious claim), but that you are a slave presenting our emancipator; because this is genuine freedom that you cultivate.”

    I don’t want to be a pretentious asshole; sometimes I can be. But another negative trait I need to cut out of my system.

    At the end of the day, I don’t own anything. I don’t own my money, I don’t own my body (it is on loan, and I will give it back when I die), I don’t own my camera (mother fortune has simply lent it to me), I don’t own my electronics– I only own my opinion:

    I don’t consider this body to be my own, because I lack for nothing, and because the law is the only thing I esteem, nothing else.” – Diogenes

    I also want to learn how to speak up my mind (in real life) with no filter. I always censor myself from saying what I really think, fearing that I  will offend people. But fuck it, if they are my true friends they won’t get offended. And if they get offended and no longer are my friends, so be it. And they were probably not my “real” friends in the first place. Not only that, but at the end of the day, I only need 5 “real” friends in my life to be happy, perhaps even less– Cindy is more than sufficient.

    If you have read this far, I congratulate you, and really appreciate you. You have probably dealt with a lot of the mental pains and struggles I have, and I hope this essay has touched you in one way or another.

    Once again, this shit is fucking hard. I know I ramble and repeat myself a lot; but ultimately I write this (first) as a meditation for me to get rid of the demons in my head. Secondly, I write this to help you. Pick and choose which ideas help you, and discard the rest.

    Epictetus reminds us, my dear friend, that if we truly value freedom (and don’t want to be a slave to the expectations of others), we need to make huge sacrifices:

    “Study this– these principles, these arguments– and contemplate these models of behaviour, if you want to be free, and our desire corresponds to the goal’s importance. Don’t be surprised if so great a goal costs you many a sacrifice.For love of what they considered freedom men have hanged themselves, have thrown themselves over cliff– and whole cities have occasionally been destroyed. For true, inviolable, unassailable freedom, yield to God when he ass for something back that he earlier gave you. Prepare yourself, as Plato says, not just for death, but for torture, exile, flogging– and the loss of everything not belonging to you. You will be a slave among slaves otherwise; even if you are a consul ten thousand times over, even if you make your residence on the Palatine, you will be a slave none the less.”

    Last thought to leave you with: freedom isn’t about fulfilling all of the desires, buying all the shit that we want, and having the life that we desire. Rather, it is by eliminating all desires, and being content with the life that we currently live, right now, in the moment:

    Freedom is not achieved by satisfying desire, but by eliminating it.” – Epictetus

    Some random thoughts on my head:

    1. Don’t accept free shit

    “To receive a favor is to pawn your freedom” – Publilius Syrus

    I get free cameras from camera companies, free smartphones from Samsung, and don’t get me wrong– it is awesome.

    But at the end of the day, I realized that this is making me a slave. Making me a slave because I feel indebted to them.

    I have a new rule: I will no longer accept free things (unless I plan on giving it away to a friend, family member, or somebody in need).

    2. Don’t compromise my principles

    If I believe in something, I cannot compromise. I must think of the collective, before myself. What is good for others is good for me. I already have everything I need in my life. I need to constantly remind myself the shortness of my life, how I will die at any moment, and squeeze every minute of the day to help others– by producing information, spreading goodwill, giving lots of hugs and showing appreciation, and by endowing love onto others.

    3. Don’t edit

    As an experiment, I will no longer edit my thoughts, my words, writing, photography, whatever. I want to live life more fully with more rawness, genuineness, and transparency. I want to show no bullshit. If I piss people off, so be it. I will still feel bad about it, but I know it will be for the greater good.

    Farewell and godspeed friend,

    Eric
    Written at ilcafe, Monday, Aug 31, 2015 / Stockholm. Started writing at 4am, ended at 11:11am. Damn I’m tired, but feel great. Excited to fly back home to Cindy after being away from her for two weeks, and on the road for 3 months in total. Excited to see my friends, family, loved ones, and to start editing down my life :)

  • On Positivity and Street Photography

    On Positivity and Street Photography

    San Diego, 2015
    San Diego, 2015

    Read as a Google Doc or download as PDF.

    There is so much negativity and bullshit out there in modern life. I always hear people bitching and moaning about the difficulties of their lives, how they want more money, how their camera isn’t good enough, how their significant others are horrible people, and how the world is going to shit. The media is constantly spewing negativity, with news about terrorist attacks, gun shootings, peoples’ heads being cut off, and how the economy is going to shit.

    Honestly, I don’t blame anybody or the individual. I blame more of society and modern media, as well as the human bias that we focus on the negatives more than the positives.

    In psychology, we all have a “risk-aversion” bias, meaning, we hate to lose $100 dollars more than winning $100. We value security and not dying over anything else.

    This was a good biological bias when we were hunter-gatherers in the savannah. After all, those who were anxious and risk-averse were the ones who didn’t mistake a lion for a friendly kitten. Those who were high-strung, anxious, and cautious were the ones who survived. Those who thought that everything in life was rosy, carefree, and easy generally died off (or were probably expelled from the tribe because they were seen as lazy slackers).

    Fortunately we now live in a modern world in which all of our basic needs are met. Most of us have access to clean water, we don’t starve to death, and we have protection from the cold. Sure there are many people out there still living in poverty, but fortunately most of the “modern” world have enough to survive and not die.

    However we still have our hard-wiring in our brains that make us focus on the negatives, not the positives in life.

    For example, rather than being grateful for what we have, we focus on what we don’t have. Rather than being grateful for the money we earn and have in the bank, we are anxious and scared of becoming homeless that we try to accumulate endless amounts of money. Rather than focusing on the positives of our friends, family, and co-workers, we focus on their negative attributes and how they can improve.

    Reality isn’t objective. Reality comes down to how we see and interpret the world.

    For example, most people would say it is “objectively” good to be a millionaire. However in reality, a millionaire can be miserable if all of his/her best friends are billionaires. They might “only” drive a BMW 3-series, while all their buddies drive Ferraris. Even apparently billionaires are the most envious people on the planet. Even if you own your own private jet, your best friend (another richer billionaire) can own his own private island. Even if you own your own private island, your friend might own their own spaceship. Even if you own your own spaceship, you can’t escape death (no matter how rich you are).

    Another human bias: we always compare ourselves to one another. For example, even though I have the “best” film camera (Leica MP and 35mm summicron lens), I am often jealous of my friends who own “better” film cameras like a Mamiya 7ii. Sometimes I compare my 35mm Summicron f/2 lens to my friends who have a 35mm f/1.4 Summilux lens and feel inadequate and jealous. Even though I have 20,000 followers on Instagram, I feel like a “nobody” compared to my friends who have 100,000+ followers on Instagram. No matter how “good” I have it, there is always someone out there who is richer, more talented, more “respected”, more popular, or “better than me.”

    Nothing is ever good enough for us. Once we finally buy that new camera we want, go on that fancy vacation, that promotion we’ve wanted, that raise of money, we get accustomed to it after a while. Then we want the next “better” thing. They call this the “hedonic treadmill.”

    So how do we overcome this sense of jealousy, negativity, and feeling of inadequacy in our photography and life?

    It is simple: Be grateful for what you have.

    The quickest way to become rich is to eliminate desire. The quickest way to improve your self-esteem is to not give a shit what others think of you. The quickest way to remove dissatisfaction on social media (not having enough followers or likes) is to delete your account.

    Not only that, but another solution: Focus on the positives, not negatives in life.

     


     

     

    There is a new trend in psychology called “positive psychology.” I think often people misconstrue positive psychology a bunch of people, sitting in a circle, holding hands, chanting mantras, and saying that everything in life is rosy.

    However the way I think of positive psychology is acknowledging the pain, negativity, and bullshit of everyday life but yet deciding to focus on the positives, not the negatives.

    Focusing on the negatives of life is a waste of time, energy, and the worst return-on-investment. Focusing on the negatives won’t improve your life. It will just make you more miserable and dissatisfied.

    No matter how shitty your life is, or how shitty your day was, there are always positive things to be grateful for.

    For example, whenever I have a shitty day, I try to journal in a moleskine 3 things I am grateful for. This helps me focus on the positives, not negatives of my day. Some things I write in my “gratitude journal” include

    • Being alive, and having the gift of sight.
    • Having friends and family who love me.
    • Having a healthy and sound mind.
    • Gratitude of knowing how to speak English.
    • Gratitude that I was born in a society in which Internet exists, and I have access to the unlimited source of knowledge from the entirety of history.
    • The fact that I don’t go hungry at night before I sleep.
    • Appreciation for coffee and caffeine (I couldn’t get any writing done without it).
    • Appreciation of the talents and successes of my best friends.
    • Having Cindy, the love of my life, who pushes me to become a better person.
    • For a loving mother, sister, and family.
    • Enjoying a nice walk in the park with the sun shining, birds chirping, and the lovely sound of trees blowing and swaying.
    • That all the photographs of Magnum Photographers (and books) are available for free on magnumphotos.com
    • Freedom to move around as I please, and not be a prisoner in a jail cell.
    • The gratitude of living with other human beings (not being stuck on Mars by myself or on a spaceship).

    These are a few of the things I have meditated about, and shown appreciation for. I find that when I fill my mind with gratitude, I feel happier, more positive, and more willing to give love to others.

    Don’t get me wrong, even though I’m a pretty happy guy, I get depressed and sad too. Sometimes after reading a lot of YouTube comments or negative hate on the blog, I feel shitty. Sometimes when I’m traveling by myself overseas and can’t find anybody to share a meal with me, I think negative thoughts of all the problems of my life (how I don’t have enough financial security, how so many people on the internet don’t like me, and how much I miss Cindy and friends back home). I often dwell on stupid thing I said, or regret not being more generous, or accidentally upsetting people or not being more considerate. I feel gloomy at time that people ignore my emails or Facebook messages, all out of this sense of insecurity that I want everybody to like me.

    But the reality is, the more I dwell on these negative thoughts, the shittier I feel.

    Something I have done which has helped me stay more positive is to read philosophy twice a day. For about an hour in the morning (to prime my brain with positive thinking) and about an hour before I sleep (to shut up my brain from telling me that I am worthless and about the negatives in my life). Books that have helped me the most include:

    What I will generally do is read each of the books, and then when I finish, cycle through them. I also write my ideas and notes in a Moleskine journal. I copy down quotes that speak to me, my random ideas, and how I feel.

    Another strategy in life: Turn every negative into a positive in your life.

    Let’s say you shoot a photo of a stranger and they call you a pervert, threaten to call the cops, or even physically shove you. What have you gained? You have gained confidence, sturdiness of heart, and the opportunity to practice patience, restraint, and courage.

    Let’s say you lost your job. The positive? You hated that job anyways, now it is time for you to pursue a new job or career you really loved. In-fact, if I never got laid off my old job, I would have never started to travel the world and teach street photography full-time.

    Let’s say a good friend or family member died. The positive? You appreciate your own life more, you appreciate your friends and family who are still alive more, and it reminds you of your own mortality. You realize life is short, and it is a good wake-up call for you to not waste time and pursue the work that is really meaningful in your life.

    Let’s say you have only 50 followers on social media. You feel this is a negative (because you want 100, 1000, or 10,000+ followers). However this can be a positive, because you build up a closer relationship with fewer people, than having a superficial relationship with a lot of people.

    Let’s say you live in a boring place for street photography. The positive? You have the opportunity to create a unique body of work (nobody has done before), and it forces you to be more creative. Those who live in popular cities (New York, Tokyo, Paris) often feel frustrated and overwhelmed because they can never create bodies of work that is better than those who came before them.

    Did you miss a “decisive moment” on the streets and feel frustrated? Turn it into a positive; next time you will work harder to be more prepared, when you see a better scene.

    Sometime give you a negative or nasty critique on your photos? Be appreciative that you are “popular” enough that someone took the time to give you negative feedback (I think the more negative feedback you get is a sign that you are becoming more influential).

    Someone stole your camera? Maybe it is a chance for you to discover the beauty of shooting on a smartphone.

    Have you become allergic to coffee? A chance for you to discover matcha green tea (happened to me, but thank God this “allergy” ended up just being acid reflux to acidic coffee).

    If you see everything that happens in life as a positive, you will become indestructible. No bullshit will be able to penetrate your golden armor of courage, love, and positivity. You will be like King Midas; everything you touch (negativity) will turn into gold. Every insult will strengthen your character. Every setback in your life will force you to work harder and become a better human being. Lack of resources or money will teach you the value of “creative constraints” and give you that burning hunger to succeed.

    I know this is hard, I personally struggle with it everyday. But remember, we are all brothers and sisters in this world. We are all fighting the tough battle everyday. But let us imagine ourselves like the 300 spartans; we will continue to protect one another with our shields from the flying arrows of negativity which can pierce our heart and souls.

    Okay, I am overly caffeinated now (after a doppio and almond cappuccino) and need to shut up.

    A quick assignment for you to try today: Smile at a stranger and say hello. This can be to your local bus driver, a barista, waiter, or someone passing you on the streets.

    Another idea: do a random act of kindness. Today I was riding the tube in London, reading some Meditation by Marcus Aurelius, and his words inspired me to give up my seat to a depressed looking woman. I stood up, offered her my seat, and first she politely refused. I insisted, she thanked me, sat down, and gave me the warmest smile you could possibly imagine. Of course this made me feel good, and I saw other people in the tube smile as well.

    Contribute positive acts, and pay it forward. Then your happiness will be boundless.

    Godspeed,

    Eric

    Monday, Aug 17, 2015 @ 12:19pm.

    Written @ Exmouth coffee in London. Heading out to Leeds for a few days to visit Northern London with a friend, and excited to do another Intermediate/Advanced workshop in London, a week in Stockholm with my good friends (and another workshop) then flying home back to Cindy, the love of my life, and the chance to catch up with my friends in Berkeley, where I can enjoy my home and more good coffee!

  • On Searching for the Maximum

    On Searching for the Maximum

    Tokyo, 2011
    Tokyo, 2011

    Read as a Google Doc.

    “Over the last 10 years, what has interested me in taking photographs is the maximum — the maximum that exists in a situation and the maximum I can produce from it.” – Josef Koudelka

    I just finished the second day of my workshop here in Stockholm, and after an epic Chinese dinner with the students with good laughs and recollections from the day, I dragged my exhausted body back to the home of my buddy Brian Sparks.

    Brian Sparks is an enabler; he has one of the most comprehensive photography book collections out of all my friends, and he always inspires me with his wide breadth of knowledge, photography, and innovation.

    In the evening, we were hanging out, and watching “Chef’s Table” — a series on Netflix about chefs and their “success stories.” Most of them started from humble backgrounds, worked their way to the top, and I saw that a lot of their success came from the fact that at a certain point, they didn’t give a flying fuck about what others thought about their food. They started to only make food that made them happy, rather than trying to make food that pleased a large audience.

    While we were chilling on his couch, Brian brought over a retrospective of Josef Koudelka’s work– which was shown in Turkey in 2008. There were some excellent essays on Koudelka, his life, and his work– and this is one excerpt from a quote that Koudelka said, which hugely inspired me:

    “Over the last 10 years, what has interested me in taking photographs is the maximum — the maximum that exists in a situation and the maximum I can produce from it. Sometimes I may achieve this goal immediately, but usually, for one reason or another, I am just not able to make the most out of a situation and so I have to photograph it time after time until I succeed. This repeated effort also helps to reassure me that I have in fact achieved the maximum.” – Josef Koudelka, 1981

    Koudelka is the photographer whose life philosophy and imagery has inspired me the most. He is truly the photographer who doesn’t care about what others think about him and his work, he is only interested in achieving his own personal maximum. He wants to push his limits. He wants to see the maximum he can achieve from the places that he sees, the scenes he encounters, and the maximum of his photographic opportunity.

    Koudelka admits that he isn’t always able to achieve this maximum, but that he always pushes forward. He therefore has to “photograph it time after time” until he succeeds. He isn’t afraid to fail. In-fact, everytime he fails, he gets up and continue to push for the maximum. He can only rest at peace if he knew that he gave it his entire soul, body, and mind.

    I once read something like, “Never half-ass anything; only full-ass it.”

    Another quote from some ancient Roman philosophy went something along the lines of: “Either do something well, or don’t do it at all.”

    My problem i that I often half-ass things. I am a pretty lazy guy, and I have troubles pushing my boundaries and limits. I think in my photography one of my insecurities is that I am just repeating myself. But after reading this quote from Koudelka, it has given me so much inspiration to continue to push forward– and search for my own personal maximum. The maximum that I can achieve in my lifetime; whether that be photography, writing, or my personal relationships.

    When Koudelka was a kid, he was obsessed with airplanes. He played with toy airplanes, then started to build his own models, and then to the point that he made small functioning planes with motors. His goal in life was then to become an aeronautical engineer. But then at a certain point, he hit a limit– and he knew that he had to change course in his life, to further push and see what his maximum in life truly was:

    “I have always been interested to find what I am able to do the best. After 7 years of being an engineer, I realized I had reached my limit, that I couldn’t go further. To continue would have only meant waiting for death, and I didn’t want to do that. I didn’t want to die at the age of 30. That was one of the reasons I quit that profession.”

    The part where Koudelka says that he wanted to avoid death really struck a chord with me. I think the unfortunate thing is that a lot of people follow their passions in life and then simply find that they hit a dead end, and then emotionally and creatively they die inside. Koudelka said “fuck that” and decided to pursue another interest which was growing for him at the moment, which was photography:

    “In the meantime, my interest in photography was growing. I decided to find out what I could do with photography. I tried, and I liked I haven’t yet gone to the end, there is still something more that I can do.”

    It is incredible that Koudelka is now 77 years old, and he still hasn’t found “the end” yet. He still says that “here is something more that I can do.”

    It is sad, even some of the most famous photographers in history like Henri Cartier-Bresson gave up photography after several decades. But Koudelka kept going.

    Koudelka also had a theory; the reason why Cartier-Bresson quit photography was that Cartier-Bresson put too many limits on himself. Cartier-Bresson only shot with a Leica and 50mm and black and white film his entire life, and never really changed how he shot or his subject matter. Koudelka surmised that Cartier-Bresson hit his “maximum”, and simply decided to retire and give up.

    But Koudelka kept growing, kept evolving.

    Koudelka started off his main work shooting his “Gypsies” project on an SLR and 25mm lens. After a decade of shooting with that lens, he found that he was “repeating himself” — and he wasn’t interested in that. He then decided to pick up a Leica and a (not as wide) lens and traveled and just shot photos of anything he encountered during his travels. Even later on his career, he picked up a panoramic camera and started to shoot landscapes.

    “I want to find my limits, to see how far I can go.” – Josef Koudelka

    So as a concluding thought, think about yourself and your personal limits. Have you ever hit a brick wall in your photography, where you have achieved your personal maximum? Or is it simply an excuse? What is holding you back? Is it time, money, family, kids, your job, or something else?

    Is it your external conditions in life which hold you back, or your own creativity and inner-will?

    How bad do you want it? How bad do you want to make photographs that push your personal boundaries? Is it really your gear which is holding you back, or the fact that you waste too much time watching Netflix, and not enough time to go out and shoot?

    Personally, I make shitloads of excuses when I don’t feel inspired. But at the end of the day, that is an excuse. I say to myself, “Oh, my street portraits would be so much more interesting if I shot with a medium format camera, or if I lived in San Francisco.”

    But that is all bullshit. I need to take this advice from Koudelka; to keep pushing myself until I have found my personal limit. To find the maximum. To subtract all the bullshit from my life, and then make some time and whitespace to focus on what is truly important to me; reading, writing, and photography.

    I have no idea what my maximum is, I haven’t achieved it yet. Have you?

    Don’t settle. Keep hustling until you find your maximum.

    Love,
    Eric

    Sunday, August 30, 9:13am. Stockholm.

     

  • First Draft: “Learn From the Masters of Street Photography” Book

    First Draft: “Learn From the Masters of Street Photography” Book

    Eric Kim
    Draft v1 (8/28/2015)

    Special thanks to Paul King and Alan Morris who have contributed lots of edits!

    Introduction

    Dear streettogs,

    I am excited to share you the first draft of my upcoming book: “Learn from the Masters of Street Photography.” There is a ton of text, a lot of typos, grammatical error, incomplete parts (some chapters have tips, and others don’t). Oh yeah, and I haven’t added any images yet.

    This is a huge project I have been working on. When I was in Marseille a month ago, I literally locked myself up in a cafe for two weeks straight, and wrote this non-stop, distilling all of the wisdom I’ve absorbed from the “Learn From the Masters Series” on the blog.

    I have a huge favor to ask you: I am trying out something new, to embrace a “crowdsourcing” way of editing this text. I believe your collective wisdom far outweighs mine, and I could use your help.

    I have the entire text available on Google Docs (with commenting enabled). Could you help me edit the text in terms of style, grammar, spelling, and offer suggestions in the comments section?

    Looking forward to your edits, and also your suggestions, comments, feedback, and ideas in the comments on this google doc!

    Also the entire text is available below:

    Lesson #1: Get closer

    “If your photographs aren’t good enough, you’re not close enough.” – Robert Capa

    One of the common mistakes that many beginning street photographers make is this: they don’t get close enough.

    We have many fears and provide a lot of excuses for not getting close enough in our street photography. We are worried about pissing people off, we are worried about making other people feel uncomfortable, and we are worried that strangers might call the cops on us (or even worse, physically assault us).

    However realize that this is all in your head. By getting closer to a stranger, you won’t die. In-fact, I have learned that in photography (and life), with physical proximity comes emotional proximity.

    It isn’t enough to use a telephoto or zoom lens to get “close” to your subject. That is fake intimacy. By using a telephoto lens, you are treating your subjects like zoo animals, and your photography is a safari hunt.

    However, when we read the quote from Robert Capa on closeness, it doesn’t necessarily mean physical proximity. You can be physically close to your subject, and still emotionally distant. The most important thing as a street photographer is to empathize with your subject and try to connect with them, their emotions, feelings, and condition.

    In street photography I generally recommend using a 35mm lens (full-frame equivalent) for most photographers (Alex Webb, Constantine Manos, and Anders Petersen shoot with this focal length). The human eye sees the world in around a 40mm field-of-view, and I find that shooting with a 35mm lens gives you enough wiggle-room around the edges of the frame. A 50mm is fine too (Henri Cartier-Bresson was famous for using it for nearly his entire life), but in today’s crowded world, I find it to be a bit too tight. A 28mm is fantastic too (William Klein, Bruce Gilden, and Garry Winogrand have used this focal length); but realize that you have to be close enough with this lens to fill the frame.

    As a rule-of-thumb, I try to shoot with a 35mm at least two-arm-lengths away (or closer). 2 arm-lengths is 1.2 meters (around 4 feet). Therefore I always have my camera pre-focused to 1.2 meters, set at f/8, ISO 1600, and I simply go out to find moments to shoot.

    The .7 Meter Challenge

    To truly get comfortable getting closer to your subjects, try this assignment from my friend Satoki Nagata: For an entire month, only take photos of your subjects from .7 meters (1-arm-length). For this assignment, switch your camera to manual-focusing mode, and tape the focusing mechanism of your lens to that distance. By setting yourself this “creative constraint,” you will learn how to better engage your subjects and get them comfortable with you shooting at such a close distance.

    Start off by asking for permission, then once you feel more courageous, start shooting candidly.

    Shooting street photography with a telephoto

    You don’t always need to shoot with a wide angle lens. Some of the greatest street photographers have used a longer lens (e.g. Saul Leiter, Tony Ray Jones, and Rene Burri). They used long lenses intentionally to compress their backgrounds and make unique images. However, their images still have emotion and soul to them, as they caught moments of the “human condition.”

    Ultimately use the lens and focal length which suits your personality. But if you’ve never tried shooting wide and getting physically close in street photography, I recommend you to try it out, and push yourself out of your comfort zone.

    Lesson #2: Shoot from the gut

    “My photography is not ‘brain photography’. I put my brain under the pillow when I shoot. I shoot with my heart and with my stomach.” – Anders Petersen

    Anders Petersen is one of the most influential contemporary master photographers. He shoots with a simple point-and-shoot film camera (Contax T3) and shoots soulful black and white images which he refers to as “personal documentary.” He makes himself and the people he meets as his main subjects and he shoots from the heart.

    A photograph without emotion is dead. The problem that a lot of photographers make is that they try to become too analytical with their photography. They are too preoccupied with composition, framing, form, nice light, and they forget the most important thing of making a memorable image: creating an image that has heart, soul, and passion.

    So when you’re out shooting, try not to be too analytical. Shoot from your intuition and your guts. If you find anything even remotely interesting, don’t self-censor yourself. Don’t let your brain tell you: “Don’t take that shot, it is boring, and nobody will find it interesting.”, take the photograph anyway because you can always edit it out (remove it) later.

    But when is it time to become analytical?

    “It is more after when I am shooting, when I am looking at my contact sheets, and then I try to analyze and put things together.” – Anders Petersen

    Shoot from your gut when you’re out on the streets, but use your brain when you’re at home and editing your shots. Analyze your images after-the-fact as a post-mortem, and learn how to “kill your babies” (your photos that you are emotionally attached to, but you know aren’t great photos).

    Separate the shooting and editing sides of your photography. They use different parts of your brains, and if you try to do both of them at the same time, you will fail. As a practical tip, turn off your LCD screen when shooting, and refrain from looking at your images immediately. Let your shots “marinate” by not looking at them until a week after you have made your images.

    Letting a photograph “marinate”

    I shoot both film and digital, but one of the biggest advantages of shooting film is that you cannot look at your photo immediately after you’ve shot it. I generally wait 6-12 months before processing my film . This helps me truly disconnect myself emotionally from my shots, allowing me to look at my photos more objectively.

    For digital, I find it a lot harder to let my shots “marinate,” as I am prone to “chimping” (looking at your LCD screen immediately after you’ve taken photographs).

    Example

    For this photograph above, I saw this woman in London juxtaposed against this billboard behind her. I got close to her, and took two photos: both with a flash. One of them she was looking away, and one she was looking directly at me.

    At first, I didn’t think that it was an interesting shot, but then I let the shot “marinate”— and the longer I sat on the image, the more I ended up liking it. I also ended up showing the photograph to a couple of my close friends, who all agreed that it was a strong image.

    For some shots, the longer you let your shots “marinate,” the more you like them. For others, the longer you let your shots “marinate,” the less you like them. Imagine oil and water in a bottle. You shake the bottle hard, and they are both mixed. But the longer you wait, the oil will soon rise to the top (your good photos), while the water will sink to the bottom (your weak photos).

    Lesson #3: Don’t shoot from the hip

    “I never shoot without using the viewfinder.” – Garry Winogrand

    Another common mistake that aspiring street photographers make is that they try to overcome their fear of shooting street photography by shooting from the hip (photographing with your camera at waist-level and not looking through the viewfinder).

    Personally when I started shooting street photography, I was dependent on “shooting from the hip.” I was too scared to bring my camera’s viewfinder up to my eye, because I was afraid of getting “caught” of taking candid photos of strangers.

    Garry Winogrand was one of the most prolific street photographers in history. He shot with a Leica M4, 28mm lens, and was known for creating layered, edgy, and head-on shots. If you go on YouTube, you can see how close he is to his subjects when shooting, and he always quickly looks through his viewfinder while shooting. This allowed him to frame properly, and capture the moments he found interesting.

    The downsides of shooting from the hip

    “[Don’t shoot from the hip], you’ll lose control over your framing.” – Garry Winogrand

    In my experience, I found that shooting from the hip was a huge crutch. The more I shot from the hip, the less confident I was as a street photographer. Not only that, but as Garry Winogrand said, I lost control over my framing. My shots would be poorly framed, skewed, and any shot that I got that looked half-decent was because of luck.

    Remember, as a street photographer, you aren’t doing anything wrong. You are trying to make images that people can empathize with. If it weren’t for street photographers, historians would have no idea what people did in public spaces in the past. All of the iconic street photography done by Henri Cartier-Bresson, Helen Levitt, Robert Doisneau, and Vivian Maier wouldn’t exist.

    Be confident. Have faith in yourself. By not shooting from the hip, you’re signaling to the world that you’re not doing anything wrong. Also by using your viewfinder (or LCD screen) you can have better control over your framing and composition.

    The benefit of having your subjects see you while shooting them

    Sometimes it is good to have your subjects notice that you are about to take a photograph of them.

    For example, in this photo I shot in Hollywood, I saw this hip older lady with these great sunglasses and hat. I crouched down, and took a photograph with my Canon 5D and 24mm lens. The second I was about to take a photograph of her, she looked at me and posed with her hands (giving me the “jazz hands”).

    Now if I shot from the hip, she might have not noticed me about to take a photograph. Therefore she would have never posed for me, and this photo would never had been created.

    But does that ruin the photograph, the fact that your subject noticed you? Absolutely not. William Klein famously engaged with his subjects a lot when he shot street photography, and his presence made his photographs more vibrant, dynamic, and edgy.

    So what happens when you’re shooting street photography (with your viewfinder), and you get “caught in the act?” My suggestion: Look at your subject, smile, say ‘thank you’ and move on.

    Lesson #4: Don’t crop

    “If you start cutting or cropping a good photograph, it means death to the geometrically correct interplay of proportions. Besides, it very rarely happens that a photograph which was feebly composed can be saved by reconstruction of its composition under the darkroom’s enlarger; the integrity of vision is no longer there.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    Another common mistake a lot of photographers make is that they over-crop their shots. They are “crop-a-holics,” in which you crop every single photograph you take.

    I am also a recovering “crop-a-holic.” When I shot on the streets, I would be sloppy. I disregarded framing, as I told myself, “Eh, if I don’t get the shot right, I can always crop it later.”

    However when I learned this lesson from Henri Cartier-Bresson (the master street photographer on composition), I decided to give it a try. At first, it was difficult not to crop my shots. But when I gave myself the “creative constraint” of not cropping, it forced me to improve my framing in-camera.

    Over the course of a year, I discovered that my framing and composition got much better. I worked harder to get the shots right in-camera, and this caused my photography to improve drastically.

    Now I am not saying that you should never crop your photographs. There are a lot of master street photographers who heavily cropped their photographs (Robert Frank did some radical cropping for his seminal book: “The Americans,” even turning some landscape shots into portrait shots with cropping).

    Assignment: Go an entire year without cropping

    If you are trying to improve your composition and intuitive sense of framing: give yourself the assignment of going an entire year without cropping. I can guarantee you that a year later, your photography will improve dramatically. And if in the future you do decide to start cropping again, always do it in moderation. Very rarely does a poorly-framed photo look better when cropped.

    A practical tip for framing better without cropping? Look at the edges of the frame while you’re shooting. Avoid suffering from “tunnel-vision” (only looking in the center of the frame)

    Lesson #5: Emotionally detach yourself from your photographs

    “Sometimes photographers mistake emotion for what makes a great street photograph.” – Garry Winogrand

    Imagine this situation: it is a cold and rainy day. You are out shooting on the streets, and you are feeling miserable. You haven’t got any good shots all day, despite the fact that you left your warm (and dry) house to take some street photos. You are about to give up and go home when you see a little girl with a red umbrella about to jump over a puddle.

    You think of the famous photograph of Henri Cartier-Bresson (man jumping over puddle), and get excited. You hold up your camera, and wait patiently. The girl then jumps, and you click. You quickly look at your LCD screen and you realize: “voila!” You just captured the “decisive moment.” You are excited.

    You then rush home, quickly download your photos to your computer, post-process the photo, and then upload the photograph to your social media website of choice. You cross your arms, and think that it is one of the finest photographs you have ever taken. You are excited that perhaps, finally, you will get over 100+ favorites/likes on this image.

    A day or so passes, and you only got 10-15 favorites/likes. You throw up your hands in rage and think to yourself: “These people on the internet wouldn’t know a great image if it hit them in the face!” You then continue about your day. A week or two go by, and you revisit the image. You then look at the image and tell yourself: “Hey, this image isn’t quite as good as I remembered it to be.”

    What just happened? You became emotionally attached to the backstory of how difficult it was to get that image (and the emotion you felt of being excited). This confused you into thinking that this was actually an “objectively” good shot.

    This happens to the best of us. We get too emotionally attached to our shots, because we were there. We experienced it. It feels alive and vivid inside our memories.

    he problem is that our viewers have no idea what the backstory of the image is (unless you write a long caption, which I generally advise against).

    So what is the solution? Try to emotionally detach yourself from your photos. When editing (selecting) which images to “keep” and “ditch,” ask your peers to be “brutally honest” with your work. Another tip: don’t refer to the photos you take as “my photos.” Refer to them as “the photos.” The difference? Calling them “the photos” detaches you emotionally from them, so you can be more critical and objective when editing your shots.

    Stories don’t exist outside of the frame

    In photography, the entire story of the image must exist inside the frame. If you want to tell a better story, include context in your photos (like this environmental portrait I shot of a man in San Diego).

    I have this vivid story in my head of how I got the image: I saw this well-dressed man in a hotel lobby, and asked if I could make a few photos. He said, “No problem,” and I started to take a bunch of images. Afterwards, I asked him what he did and what he was up to. He told me, “I own this hotel!”

    Now I have this vivid backstory, but the viewer has no idea about that story or information in this photograph. However, viewers find this photograph interesting because the outfit of the man looks like he’s from the 1950s — a relic of the past. The viewer then makes up their own story about the man, based on the TV shows (Madmen) or films they have seen.

    Morale of the story? If you have a photograph which is weak without having a compelling story, ditch the shot. When you have to “explain” the back-story of a street photograph, it is like explaining a joke. The funniest jokes don’t need to be “explained” (or else it isn’t a good joke). A good photograph shouldn’t need an intricate backstory or explanation in the caption.

    Lesson #6: Provoke your subjects

    “Rather than catching people unaware, they show the face they want to show. Unposed, caught unaware, they might reveal ambiguous expressions, brows creased in vague internal contemplation, illegible, perhaps meaningless. Why not allow the subject the possibility of revealing his attitude toward life, his neighbor, even the photographer?” – William Klein

    There is a general scorn in street photography against “posed” photos (or photos that aren’t shot candidly). A lot of people follow the Henri Cartier-Bresson school of street photography in which the photographer shouldn’t interact with his/her subjects, to be an unattached observer.

    However, there is more than one approach to street photography. On the other extreme of Henri Cartier-Bresson (who covered his silver Leica with black tape to be more discrete) is William Klein, a street photographer who gave a middle-finger to all of the “rules” in photography, and instead acted like a director. He would provoke his subjects, and interact with them. Even for his most famous “kid with gun” photograph, he told the kid: “Look tough.” At that moment, the kid with the toy gun pointed the gun to Klein’s face with a look of hate, anger, and intensity.

    I often take this approach in street photography (similar to Klein). While I do enjoy shooting a lot of candid street photographs, I also like to engage and provoke my subjects. Sometimes I will tell them to just look into the lens and not smile. Other times I will ask them to explicitly do things for me (look the other direction, cross your arms, take a puff of your cigarette, look down).

    But once you engage your subjects and ask them to do something for you, doesn’t it make the photograph less legitimate? Doesn’t the photograph become less about the subject, and more about you?

    Every photograph we take is a self-portrait of ourselves. We decide how to filter reality. We decide what to put into the frame and what to exclude. So don’t have any personal qualms about showing your own version of reality through your photography. Embrace it.

    “Can you do that again for me?”

    Sometimes you see things happen in the street: certain gestures, facial expressions, or actions by your subjects. A tip: I approach the subject and ask them: “Oh, I just saw you blowing your nose. Can you blow your nose again for me?”, as I did in the photograph above.

    Believe it or not, most people are quite happy to repeat certain gestures for you.

    Another thing you can do if you see an interesting scene, approach the subject and tell them: “Excuse me, I think you look really cool smoking on this corner here. Do you mind if I take a few photographs, and you just pretend like I’m not here?’ The majority of people will laugh, and comply, and literally ignore you.

    If your subjects don’t ignore you, simply linger around. The longer you wait, the more people begin to ignore you, and just continue their business. Once they drop their guard, start shooting.

    Lesson #7: Don’t be a slave to your camera

    “You are not supposed to be a slave of mechanical tools, they are supposed to help you and be as small and unimportant as possible not to disturb the communication.” – Anders Petersen

    There is a disease and a sickness out there. It afflicts thousands (if not millions) of photographers globally, and it costs people hundreds and thousands of dollars. This disease breeds insecurity amongst photographers, and causes photographers to make tons of excuses about their photography.

    The disease? It is called “G.A.S.” (gear acquisition syndrome). The concept is that you become addicted to getting new cameras, new gear, new lenses, and new photographic gadgets, rather than focusing on just becoming a better photographer. You make excuses about your gear, and that your camera and equipment is holding you back. You tell yourself, “Oh if I just had camera ‘X’ I would be more inspired in my photography, and take better photos.

    I personally still suffer from G.A.S. Whenever I am dissatisfied with my photography, I always think that buying a new camera or lens will help inspire me to become a better photographer. It never does.

    The only real way that I have improved my photography is by traveling, attending photography workshops, buying books (not gear), and by just shooting.

    I have discovered that when you are actually out shooting, you become very unaware of your camera. You get caught in the “flow” of shooting— and all the excuses about your camera or lens disappear. You become one with your camera, and it is almost as if the photos take themselves.

    I always lust for gear when I spend too much time online and on gear forums or review sites. Beware: 99.9% of the photography sites online are just dedicated to gear (as advertising and affiliate sales of cameras drive the photography industry).

    How can you cure yourself of “G.A.S”? Unsubscribe (or block) all gear review websites, and whenever you have the urge to buy a new gear just buy a photography book. Realize that your camera is just a tool to create images. As photographer Anders Petersen tells us, just try to get a small camera that is unobtrusive and focus on making images. He shoots with a simple Contax T3 (a point-and-shoot 35mm camera), and focuses on the emotion in his photos. Focus less on the camera, focus more on shooting, telling stories, and use your cash to travel.

    Lesson #8: Embrace “beginner’s mind”

    “My dream is that if you go out in the streets where you were born you see the streets like for the first time in your life even though you have been living there for 60 years.” – Anders Petersen

    Do you remember when you first picked up a camera, and weren’t disturbed by dogma, rules, constraints, or any other “theories” in photography? Do you remember the lightness that you would just roam the streets, and just took photos that interested you without any prejudice or self-criticism? Do you remember how excited it was to just play, like a child?

    In Zen Buddhism they call this approach “beginner’s mind.” When we begin any sort of pursuit, hobby, or art in life, we are unburdened. We see the world as fresh and full of opportunities. We are excited, nimble, fresh, and open-minded. We see possibilities, not obstructions.

    However, the problem is that the more experienced we become in photography (and life), the more we become jaded. Everything just seems to becoming boring. Nothing interests us anymore. You can live in the most interesting city in the world (Paris, Tokyo, New York) and after a while become bored with what you see.

    The secret? Follow Anders Petersen’s advice and hit the streets like it is the first time. Imagine that it is the first time you experienced it. Imagine what you would find interesting and unique. Imagine yourself like a tourist in your own city.

    Sometimes it takes getting out of your comfort zone or out of your routine to appreciate the city or street where you live. Try switching things up. Walk around your city with a different route than you usually take. Perhaps take a short trip out of town, and come back to your city with new and refreshed eyes.

    Or imagine yourself like an alien visiting from another planet. If you were an alien and visited your own city streets for the first time, what would you find interesting or unique?

    For the two photos on the other page I didn’t try to analyze the scene too much when shooting. I just found them interesting and just clicked. I didn’t let theory or definitions deter me from making this image. Some might ask: “But is it street photography?” I don’t care, I just took a photograph like any good beginner would.

    Lesson #9: Limitations are freedom

    “Too many choices will screw up your life. Work on one thing, then expand on your canvas.” – David Alan Harvey

    The problem with modern society is that we have too many choices. Do you remember the last time you went to the grocery store and wanted to get some breakfast cereal? Let’s say you wanted to get some wheat cereal. You go to the cereal aisle, and you see that there are 10 different brands. Even worse, there are different flavors: sugar, chocolate, vanilla, blueberry, and strawberry. On top of that, there are some cereals loaded with probiotics, some with less sugar, and some that is advertised as “heart healthy.”

    Overwhelmed, you just pick up some of the chocolate wheat cereal, and you go home and the next morning you have a bowl of cereal. You are slightly disappointed with your choice, and you kick yourself for not getting the sugar variety.

    This is what psychologist Barry Schwartz calls “The Paradox of Choice.” When we have too many choices or options, we become overwhelmed. This causes more regret, and more stress.

    Having too many choices (having more than 1 camera and more than 1 lens) can be stressful. You are making tons of decisions everyday as a photographer: what camera to use, what lens to use, what film to use, how to post-process your photos, etc.

    Limitations are freedom. Ironically enough, having fewer options leads to less stress, and more inner-peace.

    One of the philosophies I strongly believe in is “one camera, one lens.” Whenever I have owned more than one camera and more than one lens, this has caused me stress and “decision fatigue.” By having only one camera and one lens, you don’t have to think when you’re about to shoot a photograph. You have only one option, and that is that. Therefore you can use more of your decision-making energy on how to make a good photograph.

    The masters in photography have almost universally followed this rule. Henri Cartier-Bresson made the majority of his iconic images with his film Leica, 50mm, and black-and-white film. Alex Webb has stuck to mostly a film Leica, a 35mm lens, and Kodachrome color film. Daido Moriyama has stuck with point-and-shoot Ricoh GR cameras, 28mm, and have stayed consistent with grainy black and white film.

    So try to figure out how you can start to eliminate options and choices from your photography (and life). Having more limitations will force you to be more creative, and set you free.

    The Zen of One Camera, One Lens

    In January 2013, I got the news that my grandfather passed away. I quickly boarded a plane, and only brought one camera and lens with me: the Ricoh GR1v (a point-and-shoot film camera with a 28mm lens). I also only brought 10 rolls of film (Neopan 400) and pushed the film to 1600. I set myself this limitation in terms of my gear and my goal was to document my grandfather’s funeral in a meaningful, present, and mindful way.

    By having this simple point-and-shoot camera, I was able to really focus on the experience of being there for my grandfather’s funeral. Because I used film, I couldn’t “chimp” and check my LCD screen after every photograph I took. I was truly present, and wasn’t distracted by my camera. I think this lack of distraction from my camera helped me create one of the most meaningful projects in my photography career: my “Grandfather” series.

    If you are a photographer that owns more than one camera and one lens, just take one camera and one lens with you when you go out shooting. Or if you’re pursuing a certain photography project, do it all on one camera, one lens, and one film (or style of post-processing if you shoot digital). This will help you photograph more on the shooting process, and less about the equipment involved.

    There is nothing that has given me more zen and peace than having one camera and one lens.

    Lesson #10: Shoot with a “stream-of-consciousness”

    “For me, capturing what I feel with my body is more important than the technicalities of photography. If the image is shaking, it’s OK, if it’s out of focus, it’s OK. Clarity isn’t what photography is about.” – Daido Moriyama

    One of the common mistakes a lot of photographers make is that they are too analytical when they shoot street photography. They forget the most important part of photography: photographing what you feel, with your heart.

    Daido Moriyama is one of Japan’s most famous photographers who popularized the “stream-of-consciousness” style of photography. Not only that, but he popularized the radical “bure boke” (grainy, blurry, out-of-focus) aesthetic, which rebelled against the photography at the time, which focused on making hyper-sharp images with fancy high-end cameras.

    What is “stream-of-consciousness” in photography you ask? Well, the concept is that your thoughts, emotions, and ideas are like a river or stream, flowing through your mind. You trust your intuition, instincts, and gut.

    So when you’re shooting street photography, you just photograph what you find interesting, without any judgement, self-criticism, or frustration. You setup your camera with fully-auto settings, and just point-and-click. It is the purest form of “snapshot” photography, where you aren’t thinking like an “artist.” You are just like a child, exploring the world, and photographing what you find interesting.

    When you shoot with a “stream-of-consciousness,” realize that the majority of your shots won’t be very good. In-fact, you will make a lot of crappy, uninteresting, and boring photographs. However if you channel your emotions into your photos, they will become more personally meaningful to you, and also this feeling will transfer to the viewer.

    This makes the editing process so important. You need to always get a second opinion on your photos, and to see if other people get the same emotions from your photograph as you do.

    If you are a photographer who is “stuck” or facing “photographer’s block,” this approach will suit you very well.

    You can also apply the “stream of consciousness” type of shooting with street photography projects. Simply react to what you see, and then you can compile your projects or series later. Elliott Erwitt explains:

    “I don’t start out with any specific interests, I just react to what I see. I don’t know that I set out to take pictures of dogs; I have a lot of pictures of people and quite a few of cats. But dogs seem to be more sympathetic.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Shooting what it feels like

    “Seeing is not enough; you have to feel what you photograph” – Andre Kertesz

    I shot this above image in Saigon, Vietnam. I was at a bar, and I saw the mysterious mood and feeling of this man through a set of curtains. I was shooting this photo on a Fujifilm x100s, and set the camera to manual-focus, focused on the man, and just started to shoot away in “program” mode (aperture set to auto, shutter-speed set to auto) at ISO 3200.

    I loved the expression of the man’s face, his sense of loneliness, and the mysteriousness of the place. I didn’t think too much about the composition and the framing, I just kept shooting what the scene felt like: dark, estranged, and lost.

    Afterwards when I shared the photo with my friends and other photographers I trusted, they told me that the emotion that I felt in this scene mirrored what they felt.

    The emotions you feel while shooting street photography won’t always translate to your viewers. However the more you shoot with your heart (and not with your brain), the more likely you are to translate what a scene feels like to your viewer.

    Lesson #11: Embrace failure

    “Luck – or perhaps serendipity – plays a big role… But you never know what is going to happen. And what is most exciting is when the utterly unexpected happens, and you manage to be there at the right place at the right time – and push the shutter at the right moment. Most of the time it doesn’t work out that way. [Street] photography is 99.9% about failure.” – Alex Webb

    Street photography is all about failure. Every time you click the shutter, there is only a .1% chance that you will make an interesting shot. The majority of the time, you might shoot an entire day, not get a single good shot, and feel disappointed and frustrated.

    But know that failure is a good thing. The more you fail, the more likely you are to succeed. As Thomas Watson once wrote: “If you want to increase your success rate, double your failure rate.”

    The only thing you can control in your street photography is the amount of effort you put in. Meaning, you can control putting in 8 hours of shooting in one day, and how hard you work. What you can’t control is whether you get a good shot or not.

    In my street photography, I often found that the more I go out and take my camera, the more “lucky” I get. When I have my camera with me, the more opportunities I see.

    Luck isn’t some magical thing that hits us like lightning. Luck favors those who are prepared. Always having your camera with you, always observing your scenes and environment, and know that every once in a while, you will be at the “right place at the right time.” If you’re comfortable with your camera and skilled enough, you will also click the shutter at the right moment.

    When you fail to get the shot, don’t become discouraged. Rather, learn from your failures and mistakes. What caused you to miss the shot? Was it because your camera wasn’t set up properly? Was it because your camera was not in your hand ? Was it because you were too nervous and didn’t have the courage to click the shutter? Learn from your failures, and the closer you will become to mastering street photography.

    Lesson #12: Add “something more” in the frame

    “It’s not just that that and that exists. It’s that that, that, that, and that all exist in the same frame. I’m always looking for something more. You take in too much; perhaps it becomes total chaos. I’m always playing along that line: adding something more, yet keeping it sort of chaos.” – Alex Webb

    The more experienced you get in street photography, the more sophisticated you will become. You might start getting bored with the images you make, and you want something more in your images.

    Alex Webb is famous for creating complex images, with multiple layers and colors while having minimal overlaps in his frame. His photos are bursting with life, energy, and subject-matter. His photos are on the border of chaotic, yet they still work.

    What Alex Webb does is he constantly looks for something more in the frame he can add, especially things in the background. As beginner street photographers, we become obsessed only what is in front of us, and we disregard the background. We don’t know that the background is often as important as the foreground.

    So if you see a single-subject in the foreground, take the shot; but wait and be patient and look for “something more.” Perhaps somewhere to the right of the scene, you see an old lady about the enter the frame. And on the top-left of the scene, you might see a woman pushing a baby stroller into the frame. Try to frame the shot where you can balance the image by dispersing subjects in opposite sides of the frames. Also try to avoid creating overlaps in your images with your subjects by adding a little bit of white-space between them.

    But how do you know when a scene is “too busy”? It is often a matter of taste. What I try to find is “multiple stories” in a single scene, which keeps the viewer engaged and interested. Don’t just put extra subjects in the frame for the sake of it. Only add what you think is essential and will add something of value to the frame.

    Fill the frame

    I was in Downtown LA, walking down Broadway when out of nowhere, a huge crowd of people started streaming down the street. I loved the light and the mystery of these people, and thought of the work of Alex Webb in terms of filling the frame and adding complexity to the scene.

    So I held my camera up, and started to click away, head-on. I tried to fill the frame with interesting elements (the signs on top of the frame), the woman in the bottom-left of the frame, a person with a hat in the bottom-right of the frame, and I clicked the second I saw the man with the “LA” hat make an interesting hand-gesture.

    I really like how the shot turned out in terms of the energy, excitement, and vigor of the scene. I showed this photograph to my friends, and they told me that it felt very “Alex Webb” in terms of how I filled the frame and added energy and chaos to the scene.

    While this isn’t the style of photography I usually shoot (I generally prefer single-subjects in my photos), I was glad that I was able to apply the working style and philosophy of Alex Webb to experiment creating different styles of images.

    When you’re out shooting street photography, try to experiment with filling the frame. Try to see how much you can add to your frame before the image bursts at the seams. Cram in creativity.

    Lesson #13: Master your body language

    “If you photograph for a long time, you get to understand such things as body language. I often do not look at people I photograph, especially afterwards. Also when I want a photo, I become somewhat fearless, and this helps a lot. There will always be someone who objects to being photographed, and when this happens you move on.” – Martin Parr

    As a street photographer, you want to learn how to master your body language. 90% of communication isn’t verbal; it is actually through your facial expressions, body position, hand gestures in which we communicate.

    If you want to shoot more candid street photography and not be noticed, you don’t want your body language to suggest that you just made an image. Rather, you want to use your body language to suggest that you took a photo of something behind a person. Martin Parr gives further advice:

    “I go straight in very close to people and I do that because it’s the only way you can get the picture. You go right up to them. Even now, I don’t find it easy. I don’t announce it. I pretend to be focusing elsewhere. If you take someone’s photograph it is very difficult not to look at them just after. But it’s the one thing that gives the game away. I don’t try and hide what I’m doing – that would be folly.”

    Eye contact often makes a stronger street photograph, but also it makes it very obvious to your subject that you want to photograph them. So if you want to be invisible when shooting street photography, avoid eye contact.

    However there are also moments where you want to engage your subjects and ask for permission to take their photograph. In these circumstances, mastering your body language to show confidence is key. This means standing up straight, speaking in a bold and clear voice, being relaxed, and not hesitating. The less nervous and awkward body language you show, the less nervous and awkward your subjects will feel.

    Assignment: Eye contact

    Variation #1: Don’t make eye contact

    For this assignment, go up to a stranger very close (about 1 arm length away), and take a photograph of them. After you take a photograph, don’t drop your camera. Keep it up to your face, and avoid making eye contact with your subject. Hold up your camera for 15 more seconds, and then drop it and move on. See how your subject responds.

    This assignment will teach you that if you pretend you shot something else (convincingly with your body language), nobody will assume otherwise.

    Variation #2: Make eye contact

    For this assignment, walk around the streets and find someone interesting. Stare at them until they make eye contact with you. Once they make eye contact with you, smile, wave, and say hello. Then with a big smile, give them a compliment and ask them to take their photograph.

    This assignment will help you build confidence via your body language.

    Lesson #13.5: Aim to make 1 good photo a month

    Martin Parr shoots “tens of thousands” of photos, prints “maybe 15,000 a year” and “If there are 10 good ones, it would be a good year.”

    One of the problems of studying the work of the masters of street photography is that you only see their great work. You don’t see their mistakes, their ditched images, or the boring photos they’ve made. They only show their best work.

    Most of the master street photographers I’ve studied admit to only making about 10-12 good photos a year. On average that is one good shot a month.

    A story that I heard (not sure if it is true or not) was between Henri Cartier-Bresson and Josef Koudelka in a taxi cab. Josef Koudelka leans over to Cartier-Bresson and asks him softly, “So, how many good images you make a year?” Cartier-Bresson responds by saying, “Perhaps 10-12 if I’m lucky.” Koudelka than wipes off the sweat on his forehead and says, “Phew, that is wonderful to hear. I thought I was the only one!”

    Whether or not the story is true, remember: you’re only as good as your weakest photograph. Not only that, you’re only as good as your last photograph.

    So don’t settle for mediocrity, but at the same time, be realistic with yourself. It is rare that you make a great street photograph, as street photography is the most challenging form of photographers out there. So if you can manage to get one good street photograph a month, be at ease.

    Assignment: “Kill your babies”

    To start off, think to yourself: if I can only be remembered for 10 photos, which photos would they be? Then choose those 10 images, print them out, put them in a box, and also add them to a “portfolio” set on your website. I can guarantee those will be 10 very strong shots.

    Then moving forward, only aim to make one good street photograph a month. Be patient with yourself, and always think long term.

    Lesson #14: Kill your mentor

    “In those days Henri Cartier-Bresson limited us to lenses from 35 mm to 90 mm. When I showed him the photos he said, ‘brilliant René!’ I went outside and shouted ‘Hah!’ He heard me and said ‘what was that?’ I said, ‘nothing, never mind’. The lens I used was 180 mm – I never told him! At that point I broke loose from my mentor. I killed my mentor!” – Rene Burri

    Ironically enough even though this series on learning from the masters of street photography, there are only so many “lessons” you an learn from the masters before you need to “kill the masters.”

    For example, when Rene Burri started to shoot photography in Magnum, Cartier-Bresson was one of his mentors and “masters.” He hugely admired Cartier-Bresson’s work, and therefore would follow his philosophies in not using telephoto lenses, not cropping, and not posing his subjects.

    Ironically enough one of Burri’s most famous images of silhouetted men in Brazil, he shot it with a 180mm (directly contradicting the rules of Cartier-Bresson). By “breaking the rules,” Burri was able to make one of his most iconic and memorable images.

    So know that after learning from the masters, you need to know when to ignore them or when to go against their teachings. Consider the “masters” of street photography simply as mentors or guides. Don’t listen to them blindly, as one day you need to take off your training wheels and learn to ride on your own.

    Assignment: Contradict a “rule”

    If there is a certain “rule” in photography you normally follow, for a month intentionally try to break it, but do so in a creative way.

    For example if the rule is “don’t crop,” do the exact opposite by experimenting with radical cropping. This is what William Klein and Robert Frank did with their images.

    Lesson #15: Follow your curiosity

    “The camera is like my third eye it is an outlet for my curiosity. I was always curious as a kid and you have to use your senses. I wanted to meet the big giants of the 19th century, a sculptor, an artist, a dictator a musician and then ‘I would find the pictures would just happen’. I respond to situations and I am very fast – fastest gun in the West – even at my age.” – Rene Burri

    One of the best traits a street photographer can have is curiosity. You can’t fake curiosity in life. Curiosity is the fuel of life. Curiosity is what keeps us hungry to learn more, experience more, and live more.

    If you want to become a better photographer, learn how to become more curious in life. Be more like a child and less like an adult. Once we become adults, we become closed off to new ideas and ways of thinking. Rather than exploring things for ourselves and following our curiosity we would rather Google answers.

    Jacob Aue Sobol also mentions the importance of being curious about your subjects:

    “I also photograph because I am curious. I am curious about what the person on the other side of the street is thinking, how he or she lives, and how he or she feels. I am always looking for someone to share a moment with.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Don’t photograph what you think others might find interesting. Rather, photograph what you are personally interested in. If there is a certain neighborhood or part of your town that you are interested in, just go there with a camera and take photos. Don’t think too much. Follow and shoot what you’re curious about.

    Assignment: Curiosity notebook

    This assignment is to help rekindle your sense of curiosity in life and photography. Buy a cheap notebook and carry it with you in your camera bag. Whenever you have an idea for a photography project or find something you are curious in, write it down in your “curiosity notebook.”

    The goal is that everyday try to write down at least one idea or concept or photography project you’re interested or curious about. You can also write down master photographers you are interested in learning more about. For example, if you’ve heard about William Eggleston and don’t know his work but are curious about learning more, write it down in your notebook.

    You don’t need to explore every idea. But the act of writing down ideas will keep your mind sharp and curious.

    Also write down your ideas, no matter how stupid, silly, or childish they may seem. This is a private notebook, nobody else will see it.

    Lesson #16: Leave your photos open to interpretation

    “I leave it to others to say what [my photos] mean. You know my photos, you published them, you exhibited them, and so you can say whether they have meaning or not.” – Josef Koudelka

    One of the common mistakes photographers make is that they don’t leave their photos open to interpretation. They use fancy titles which explain what they want the viewer to take out of the photograph.

    Take the opposite approach: leave your photos open to interpretation to the viewer. The more open to interpretation you make your photos, the more engaging they will be to your viewer.

    A key way to do this is to leave out key information, or to add mystery or ambiguity to your photos. Intentionally cut off heads, limbs, or obscure the background. Kill the sense of context of the scene. Make the viewer work hard to interpret what is going on in the scene.

    A good joke shouldn’t need to be “explained” by the joke teller. Similarly a good street photograph shouldn’t need a detailed backstory in the caption of a photograph.

    Similarly, movies are always the best when they end in an ambiguous way, in which the viewer makes up their own ending. When the director ends a film without a clear ending, the film is unforgettable.

    Photographer Joel Sternfeld shares how when the photographer makes an image, he or she is interpreting the world:

    “Photography has always been capable of manipulation. Even more subtle and more invidious is the fact that any time you put a frame to the world, it’s an interpretation. I could get my camera and point it at two people and not point it at the homeless third person to the right of the frame, or not include the murder that’s going on to the left of the frame… There’s an infinite number of ways you can do this: photographs have always been authored.”

    Richard Kalvar also shares the importance of having mystery behind your shots and not explaining them:

    “First let me address the question “What was going on there?” in general. I try to avoid answering, because when I do, people generally stop looking and turn the page. If you kill the magic and the mystery, what’s left but humdrum reality?”
    Kalvar continues:

    “It’s tempting to satisfy people’s curiosity as to what was “really going on” in a scene, but it always leaves a bad taste in my mouth. If there’s a mystery, the viewer should try to unravel it for him or herself, subjectively, through intelligence, imagination and association. I want people to keep looking, not just move on to the next thing.”

    Assignment: Make an open-ended photo

    Try to make a photograph without a clear explanation. Intentionally try to use blur, out of focus effects, a flash, high contrast black and white, or cut out limbs or body parts. Make an image difficult to interpret, and ask your friends or viewers to come up with their own story.

    Alternatively try to capture people with strong body gestures or emotions, and don’t make it clear what exactly is going on.

    Leaving a photo closed to interpretation

    Sometimes when you’re doing documentary or photojournalism photography, you don’t want your photo open to interpretation. You want it to share a specific viewpoint. In this case, you want a detailed description or caption, for the viewer not to be misled.

    But street photography is more about creating your own interpretation of the world, rather than trying to capture some “objective” reality. The more ambiguous or open ended you make your images, the more engaging for the viewer.

    Lesson #17: Remove your ego from your photos

    “I wouldn’t talk about the photographs. No, I try to separate myself completely from what I do. I try to step back to look at them as somebody who has nothing to do with them.” – Josef Koudelka

    Sometimes we can let our ego get in the way of our photography. We think our photos are like our children, and we become too emotionally attached to them (even if they are bad photos).

    Personally I have a difficult time overcoming my attachments to my photos. When people critique my photos, I feel like they’re critiquing me as a human being.

    But remember: you are not your photos. When people critique or criticize your photos, they aren’t criticizing you. They’re just judging your photos.

    One of the best ways to overcome this is to detach your ego from your photos. By detaching your ego from your photos, you can judge them more honestly and objectively. When you want feedback on your photos, ask people, “Please be straightforward and give the photos a brutally honest critique.” Also when critiquing your own work, imagine that they were shot by someone else.

    Another master photographer, Sebastiao Salgado mirrors this sentiment. He dedicates making images for others to make a positive impact in the world, instead of boosting his own self-ego:

    “The biggest danger for a photographer is if they start thinking they are important.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Edit ruthlessly, and detach your ego from the process.

    Assignment: They’re not your photos

    Ultimately the photo we take don’t belong to us. They are for society and our viewers to interpret, consume, and analyze.

    To overcome having your ego attached to your photos try this assignment: For a year, don’t refer to the photos you take as “my” photos.[a] Rather, refer to them as “the” photos. After you take the photos, take a step back, and let them tell their own story, and exist on their own.

    Lesson #18: Photograph what you love

    “It’s not normal to feel that you have to do something, that you love to do something. If that’s happening you have to pay attention so you don’t lose it.” – Josef Koudelka

    You can’t fake love and passion in what you do in life, and what you photograph. People are good bullshit detectors; they can smell “fakeness” from a mile away.

    On the other hand, enthusiasm is contagious. If you shoot your subject matter with love, compassion, and honesty, this will show in your photos. The viewer will feel the same feelings you did.

    With love also comes fascination. Koudelka shares how he has always been in love of landscapes, but never was able to capture the soul of landscapes, until he picked up a panoramic camera. He shares his experience below:

    “I ran around Paris; I had to photograph everything. I realized that with this camera I could do something I’d never done before. The panoramic camera helped me go to another stage in my career, in my work. It helped me to remain interested in photography, to be fascinated with photography.”

    It is hard to fall in love with your subject matter, project, and to remain fascinated. But having an intense love and fascination of what you’re interested in photographing will help you get to a new stage in your career.

    Once you are no longer interested or fascinated with the world, you lose your artistic vision and insights. In fact, Koudelka mentions how even Henri Cartier-Bresson lost his interest in photography:

    “I’m going to be seventy-seven. When I met Cartier-Bresson, he was sixty-two. I’m 15 years older than Cartier-Bresson was then. And at that time Cartier-Bresson was stopping his work with photography.”

    Koudelka continues in another interview:

    “Many photographers like Robert Frank and Cartier Bresson stopped photographing after 70 years because they felt that they had nothing more to say. In my case I still wake up and want to go and take photographs more than ever before.”

    When your photography no longer fascinates you, or when you are no longer having any fun, it is a good chance for you to reassess yourself as a photographer. Why are you no longer interested? Why do you feel bored? Do you feel like you’re just continuing to do the same thing?

    Avoid boredom at all costs. Remain fascinated. If you consider yourself a “street photographer” yet you no longer find the streets interesting, switch things up. Try shooting landscapes like Koudelka or pursue a different project. Pursue a project that you’re afraid of. Sometimes our best growth opportunities come from what we’re frightened to pursue.

    As a photographer don’t dry up, wither and die. Keep your artistic eye and seed well watered. Do this by reading interviews with photographers and artists you admire, by investing in photography books, classes and workshops, through traveling, and by meeting new people.

    Magnum photographer Jacob Aue Sobol also mentions the importance of being emotionally connected to your work:

    “I do find it difficult to work in places I am not connected to in some way. I simply lose interest in the place, because I don’t have a close relation, which allows me to approach the place in a more personal way. In Greenland, I started photographing Sabine because I was in love with her, but in Tokyo the situation was different because Sara worked long hours and I was left on my own to explore the city. In this way, my love for Sara and the emotions we shared in our relationship mostly appeared in my images from the streets and in my meetings with strangers.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Assignment : What do you love?

    If you have no idea what kind of photography project to pursue, write down a list of things in life you love. Is it music, coffee, dance, theater, films, cafes, night clubs, or books? Brainstorm as many ideas as you possibly can.

    Then ask yourself: “How can I photograph what I love?”

    By starting off with your other interests outside of photography, you can channel your camera to show that love and interest you have in it.

    If you love what you photograph, it will never feel like a chore. It will be fun, exciting, and uplifting.

    Lesson #19: Photograph who you are

    “Photograph who you are!” – Bruce Gilden

    One of the most polarizing street photographers is Bruce Gilden. Love him or hate him, he is true to who he is. He was born and raised in the concrete jungle of New York City, and he professes that his father was a “gangster type.” Bruce has an attitude, shoots up close and personal with a flash and 28mm, and is unapologetic about how he shoots or his work.

    A lot of people criticize him for exploiting his subjects, or being an asshole. Personally I’ve met him and I would say that he stays true to who he is: a rough, tough, no bullshit human being. But at the same time, he has a lot of empathy for the people he photographs:

    “I love the people I photograph. I mean, they’re my friends. I’ve never met most of them or I don’t know them at all, yet through my images I live with them. At the same time, they are symbols. The people in my pictures aren’t Mr. Jones or Mr. Smith or whatever; they’re someone that crossed my path or I’ve crossed their path, and through the medium of photography I’ve been able to make a good picture of that encounter. They have a life of their own, but they are also are symbols. I would say that I respect the viewer, but I don’t want to tell him everything.”

    Also when Bruce Gilden is choosing his subjects, he tries to engage the viewer:

    “Hopefully, there’s an element of mystery involved. I like him to look at a picture and say “Well, that that reminds me of someone,” and make up a little story in his head, make him smile, brighten up his day. I think this is what I’m trying to achieve with my photographs.”

    I’m a very social person, but when I started shooting street photography, I tried to imitate Henri Cartier-Bresson (who was a complete introvert and hated being noticed in the streets). I would look for interesting backgrounds and compositions, and just wait for the right person to enter the scene before clicking the shutter.

    But the problem is that I wasn’t being true to myself. I didn’t photograph who I was. I was imitating a photographer whose personality and worldview was completely different from mine.

    Over the past several years I discovered my style in street photography reflected who I was as a human being: social, chatty, and engaging with others. Ultimately I prefer engaging with my subjects when photographing them (as Bruce Gilden often does), and I prefer to shoot closely and prefer physical intimacy through proximity.

    There is no “right” or “wrong” way to shoot street photography. You need to shoot who you are. What makes your personality unique? If you prefer not to interact with your subjects, shoot from a distance and be candid. If you’re extroverted and like conversation, don’t be afraid to talk with your subjects.

    The ancient Greeks said: “Know thyself.” Similarly, know thyself in street photography, and shoot what suits your personality, mood, and temperament.

    Assignment: Role play

    For this assignment, find a street photographer whose personality, style, and images you admire. Intentionally try to imitate them through “role playing.”

    Imitation is one of the best ways to kick start your photographic journey. The best Renaissance painters all started off as apprentices (copying their masters), before they broke the umbilical cord and started heading off in their own direction.

    Another version of the assignment: “role play” another photographer who is completely different from you. This will help expand your mind, push you outside of your comfort zone, and challenge you. And through this assignment, you will learn more about your own style.

    Discovering what you don’t like to shoot is a better way to discover your voice than knowing what you like to shoot.

    Lesson #20: Don’t repeat yourself

    “When I went out of Czechoslovakia I experienced two changes: The first one is that there wasn’t this situation any longer. I didn’t need wide-angle lenses. And I had understood the technique very well, I was repeating myself, and I’m not interested in repetition, I wanted to change. I took a 50mm/35mm Leica.The second change was that I started to travel the world. I had this possibility and I had a look at this world.” – Josef Koudelka

    There is always a fine line between repetition and variety as a photographer and artist. On one hand you want repetition and consistency in your work to give you a certain style or voice. On the other hand, you want variety in your work to prevent yourself (and viewer) from getting bored.

    When Josef Koudelka worked on his “Gypsies” project, he traveled and lived with the Roma people for around ten years. He shot it all on an slr and a 25mm lens. This helped him shoot in cramped quarters, and create an intimate document of the life of the Roma people.

    However when he was done with the project, he realized that he no longer needed to repeat himself. Therefore he just ended up exploring and traveling the world with a 35mm/50mm Leica. He wanted to also switch up the subject matter that he photographed.

    Koudelka explains more in another interview:

    “I am not interested in repetition. I don’t want to reach the point from where I wouldn’t know how to go further. It’s good to set limits for oneself, but there comes a moment when we must destroy what we have constructed.”

    There is a concept or “creative destruction” in art. The idea is that you need a framework to keep you inspired and creative in your artwork. But at a certain stage, this framework can become more of a cage. Once this happens, you must break out of your cage.

    Assignment : Repetition and Variety

    The fine line we always need to balance is repetition and variety.
    So for this assignment, choose a certain theme, like “old people”, “hands”, or “couples.” Stay focused on this theme, and repeat it.

    But on the other hand, try to find variety in the assignment. So for example if your assignment is “old people”, try to find old people doing a variety of different things. Shopping, having a cup of coffee at a cafe, or walking their grandchildren in the park.

    If your theme is “hands”, you can repeat the same type of framing and distance. But you can create variety by choosing different types of hands (old hands, young hands, dark hands and light hands, hands with fingernails, and hands with cigarettes).

    Lesson #21: Ask for permission

    “I carried this little album of my work. I have three choices. If I see someone in this beautiful mood, I’ll go up to them and ask them, I’d like to take a picture of that mood. If they say yes, I ask if they can get back into that mood. Not everyone can do that. Or, if the said no, then I took out the album and they saw the work. Or I took it, and ran like hell. I had those three choices in the subway.” – Bruce Davidson

    Bruce Davidson is a street photographer who isn’t afraid to ask for permission. He is a street photographer who has deep empathy for his subjects, and tries to make imagery that connects with them.

    His first big body of work was “East 100th street,” when he did a documentary series of people in the impoverished neighborhood in NYC with uncompromising sincerity with his large format camera and black and white. He later moved on working in the gritty subways of NYC in color, using an slr and a flash.

    If you see Davidson’s images in his “Subway” book, most of them look candid and without permission. But in reality, Davidson asked a lot of his subjects for permission. He carried around his portfolio of images, and would often ask his subjects to recreate the mood he first saw them in.

    Davidson did this for several reasons. First of all, shooting in a subway can be very tricky, as you can’t run away after taking someone’s photo. Secondly, when you use a flash, you can shock and surprise people.

    So Davidson would approach people openly, and even offer to give them a print afterwards.

    But the problem with this approach is if the subject said no, “…it was no forever.”

    However at times, Davidson didn’t always ask for permission. But shooting candidly would sometimes draw unnecessary attention. He explains below:

    “Sometimes, I’d take the picture, then apologize, explaining that the mood was so stunning I couldn’t break it, and hoped they didn’t mind. There were times I would take the pictures without saying anything at all. But even with this last approach, my flash made my presence known. When it went off, everyone in the car knew that an event was taking place– the spotlight was on someone.”

    Therefore know that there is no reason you should be afraid of asking for permission. The worst case scenario is that someone will say “no” upon you asking them.

    Diane Arbus is another photographer who was able to overcome her fear of photographing strangers and getting close by asking for permission:

    “I remember one summer I worked a ltot in Washington Square Park. It must have been around 1966. The park was divided. It has these walks, sort of like a sunburst, and there were these territotries stalked out. There were young hippie junkies down one row. There were lesbians down another, really tough amazingly hard-core lesbians and in the middle were winos. They were like the first echelon and the girls who came from the Bronx to become hippies would have to sleep with the winos to get to sit on the other part with the junkie hippies.

    It was really remarkable. And I found it very scary. I mean I could become a nudist, I could become a million things. But I could never become that, whatever all those people were. There were days I just couldn’t work there and then there were days I could.

    “And then, having done it a little, I could do it more. I got to know a few of them I hung around a lot. They were a lot like sculptures in a funny way. I was very keen to get close to them, so I had to ask to photograph them. You cant get that close to somebody and not say a word, although I have done that.” – Diane Arbus

    Zoe Strauss, a contemporary Magnum Photographer also has to deal with a lot of rejection in her work when asking for permission:

    “I’ve stopped hundreds of people and asked to make their photo. If it’s an up-close portrait, I always ask the person if I can take the photo. Often the answer is “no”.”

    Assignment: The 10 yes, 10 no challenge

    If you want to quickly break out of your shell in street photography, start off by asking for permission. The goal is by the end of the day, you want 10 people to say “yes” being photographed, and 10 people saying “no” to being photographed.

    In terms of approach, tell your subject that your assignment is to make portraits of strangers. Also if you tell them you’re a photography student, people are more sympathetic and willing. Even though you might not be enrolled in a photography school, the truth is you are still a photography student.

    Another tip: offer to email your subject the photograph afterwards. Better yet: carry a small Instax wifi printer and give them a small print afterwards.

    You can also show your subject your LCD screen after taking their photo, to show them what you’re trying to achieve. You can also ask your subject which photo of them they prefer. This engages your subject, and makes them more comfortable being photographed.

    Lesson #22: Don’t hesitate

    “Despite my fantasies of being a hunter stalking a wild animal, I was still afraid. It was hard for me to approach even a little old lady. There’s a barrier between people riding the subway – eyes are averted, a wall is set up. To break through this painful tension I had to act quickly on impulse, for if I hesitated, my subject might get off at the next station and be lost forever.” – Bruce Davidson

    There is a phrase which directly applies to street photographers: “paralysis by analysis.” Sometimes thinking too much whether you want to take a shot or not leads to hesitation. And with hesitation, you become nervous and self conscious and end up not taking the photograph.

    The secret is to know that if you hesitate to make a photograph of someone, you will regret it for the rest of your life (or at least when you go to sleep that night). Live life without regrets. It is better to take the shot and deal with the consequences, rather than not to take the photograph at all.

    Don’t get me wrong, I’ve missed thousands of potential good street photographs because I hesitated. This was due to self consciousness, fear of getting yelled at (or hit), or of making people feel uncomfortable.

    But know as a street photographer, you have a higher calling. Your task in life is to make the most beautiful street photographs, to inspire people and contribute to society. So keep that in mind before you hesitate taking a shot.

    Assignment: when in doubt, click

    A phrase I picked up from my friend (and talented street photographer) Charlie Kirk is this: “When in doubt, click.”

    Keep that phrase embedded in your mind. Whenever you have even a tiny doubt whether the shot will be good or not, just take the shot. Don’t hesitate. Don’t worry too much about the framing or composition. Just take the shot. And after taking the first shot you can better “work the scene” and make some other better shots.

    Break through that barrier. Shoot without regrets.

    Lesson #23: Don’t become pigeonholed by definitions

    “Oh people you’re a documentary photographer. I don’t even know what that means. Oh people say you are a photojournalist. I’m rarely published in journals. Oh then yore a fine art photographer. Then I say I’m not. I aspire to be a fine photographer.” – Bruce Davidson

    Even though this book is focused on street photography, know that if you want to truly become a great photographer, you don’t want to become pigeon-holed by definitions. Most of the “street photographers” profiled in this book never call themselves “street photographers.” They just see themselves as photographers, and they simply photograph what they are interested or passionate about.

    Similarly, the way that Bruce Davidson shoots crosses definitions and boundaries in photography. Some of his work is “documentary” in the sense that he spends a lot of time with the same subjects. Some of his work is “street photography” in the sense that he shoots photos of subjects candidly, in public spaces.

    Ultimately, it is better to say that you are a “photographer” rather than trying to define yourself. Let your photos define you, not any sort of classifications or external definitions.

    Once you shed external definitions, this opens up your view to the world. No longer do you not shoot certain subject matter because it isn’t “street photography.” Simply photograph anything that interests you.

    Don’t aim to be a “street photographer”, aim to be a great photographer. And don’t ask people whether they think some of your photos are “street photography” or not. Simply ask them whether they are great photos or not.

    People like to define others, because it makes life more comfortable and easy for them. People are uncomfortable with unambiguity, and they always want to see where they are in comparison to you.

    I often get ridiculed that I am not a “street photographer.” Rather than arguing with them, I just resort to self-deprecating humor by saying, “You’re right, I’m not a street photographer. I’m just an Asian tourist with a camera.”

    At the end of the day, you don’t even need to define yourself as a “photographer.” Just see yourself as a human being interested in others and in life, and you happen to make photos of what you’re passionate about.

    So what is Davidson ultimately interested in? He explains below:

    “I’m just a humanist. I just photograph the human condition as I find it. It can be serious. It can also be ironic or humorous. I’m political, but not in an overt way.”

    Even Garry Winogrand hated the term “street photographer.” In one interview he joked that when people asked him what kind of photographer he was, he would just that that he was a “zoo photographer.”

    Assignment: Try shooting another genre

    If there is a genre of photography that you don’t understand, appreciate, or “get,” try it out and try to understand why others may be interested in it.

    For example, let’s say you hate HDR photography. Ask yourself: “Why do others like this type of photography?” Then genuinely try to understand and connect with that genre of photography. Or perhaps you can try out macro, landscape, or studio photography.

    Even within the genre of “street photography”, there are many different approaches. Some people prefer shooting candidly, others prefer asking for permission, and some like to keep a distance, others like to get up close and personal.

    So try an opposite approach of what you are comfortable with. This will help open up your mind, not care as much about definitions, and help you realize that at the end of the day, no matter what kind of photographs we make, we are all unified with this love of making images.

    Lesson #24: Don’t stop your projects too soon

    “I find that young people tend to stop too soon. They mimic something they’ve seen, but they don’t stay long enough. If you’re going to photograph anything, you have to spend a long time with it so your subconscious has a chance to bubble to the surface.” – Bruce Davidson

    One of the problems that many photographers starting off is that they stop their photography projects too soon. They quickly get bored before really delving deep into their subject matter, theme, or concepts.

    A truly great photography project require time, depth, consideration, hard work, sweat, passion, and endurance.

    For example for Davidson’s “Subway” project, he rode the subway nearly every single day (at random hours in the day) for two years straight. By spending so much time in the subway, he became part of the subway. He learned the nuances of the subway, was able to capture different types of subject matter, and a variety of images.

    But the problem with modern day society is that we often suffer from photographic “ADD”; we can’t concentrate on one project, vision, or subject matter. We quickly flit from one fashionable type of photography to another.

    An analogy I like is that you should imagine your photography projects and style like a seed. It takes a long time for a seed to sprout into a great tree. But if you remove the seed from the ground prematurely it will never grow.

    Similarly, when you’re cooking a fish, you don’t want to poke it too much. You want to let it cook a bit on its own before moving it around.

    But how do you find a photographic project that is interesting? Davidson gives great advice below:

    “If I were a student right now and I had a teacher like me I’d say, ‘You have to carry your camera everyday and take a picture everyday. And by the end of the week you should have 36 pictures exposed. And then suddenly you’ll latch onto someone, maybe a street vendor- oh he or she is very interesting I might have to be with him or her. So things open up visually.”

    Dorothea Lange, the famous photographer of “migrant mother” also shares the philosophy of working your theme until exhaustion, and not giving up too soon:

    “Pick a theme and work it to exhaustion… the subject must be something you truly love or truly hate.” – Dorothea Lange

    Lange expands in another interview:

    “Photographers stop photographing a subject too soon before they have exhausted the possibilities.”

    Assignment : One square block

    An assignment I was given in Downtown LA by the Think tank gallery was this: for an entire month you could only shoot once square block in the Fashion district in Downtown LA (both sides for street), and I had to edit down to my best 3 shots for an exhibition.

    It was a daunting task at first because I know myself: I am prone to boredom, and I have a hard time sticking around to one location.

    In the beginning the assignment was frustrating. I felt annoyed that I couldn’t wander off to different parts of the city. I craved more variety in terms of the scene.

    But as time went on, I became to enjoy the meditative pace of slowly walking in the same neighborhood. Soon the vendors began to recognize me and say hello. Every time I circled the block, I noticed one thing that I didn’t notice before. I started to pick up small differences and nuances. The square block soon became my own home. And at the end of the month I ended up making 3 of my strongest shots, 2 of which entered my portfolio (fingernails and a guy blowing his nose).

    So regardless of how boring your neighborhood or street is, there is always something interesting to photograph, as long as you try hard enough.

    So give yourself a creative restriction in terms of location. Find a place you want to photograph, and you’re only allowed to shoot that one square block (both sides) for a month. Then edit down to your 3 best shots. I can guarantee you they will be damn good.

    If you are even more ambitious, try to slowly expand that location by a block or two. Then try to shoot that one neighborhood for a year, and then do an exhibition of your best 12-15 photos. Invite people from the neighborhood to attend, and have a great party.

    Lesson #25: It’s okay to shoot bad photos

    “You shoot a lot of shit and you’re bound to come up with a few good ones.” – Trent Parke

    I know a lot of street photographers that suffer from “photographer’s block” in the sense that they are perfectionists. They have a lot of good ideas for projects and images, but they get too caught up in the details and they forget the most importantly thing: just going out and shooting.

    A lot of perfectionists shoot themselves in the foot because everytime they go out and shoot street photography, they expect all their shots to be great. But realize, the more “shit” you shoot, the more likely you are to get a great shot.

    For me, I get easily disappointed when I shoot street photography on digital cameras. Why? Because at the end of the day I can quickly look through all of my images and see all of my mistakes. Not only that but the likelihood of getting a good street photograph after only one day of shooting is highly unlikely.

    The upside of shooting film is that it has given me more permission to shoot a lot of “shit”, without the disappointment of seeing my shitty photos afterwards.

    I also usually get my film processed 6 months to a year after I shoot, which means once I finally get my images scanned and look at them on the computer, there is a higher likelihood that I will get a great image that I’m proud of.

    Wayne Gretzky, one of the best hockey players of all time once said: “You miss 100% of the shots you don’t take.” Applied in street photography, whenever you see a scene that you think has some promise, just shoot it. Every time you click the shutter and make a bad photo, the closer you are to make a great photo.

    So don’t be afraid to shoot shitty photos. Just be a brutal editor, and refuse to show the shitty shots you take.

    Even Trent Parke had to shoot a lot of “shitty” photos before he got one that he was satisfied with.

    For one of his most famous images of dark silhouetted subjects against a bus in Sydney, he went there 3-4 times a week for a month to get the shot he imaged. He explains:

    “I shot a hundred rolls of film, but once I’d got that image I just couldn’t get anywhere near it again. That’s always a good sign: you know you’ve got something special.”

    Fortunately most of us shoot digitally now, which means we can shoot a lot of bad photos to get one good one.

    So we don’t really have any excuses to get the images we want. The question you want to ask yourself is: “How bad do I want this shot?”

    Diane Arbus also agrees the importance of shooting bad shots:

    “Some pictures are tentative forays without your even knowing it. They become methods. It’s important to take bad pictures. It’s the bad ones that have to do with what you’ve never done before. They can make you recognize something you had seen in a way that will make you recognize it when you see it again.”

    Assignment : take 10,000 shitty photos

    Henri Cartier-Bresson once said, “Your first 10,000 photos are your worst.’ That was in the days of film. Nowadays I think your first 1 million photos are your worst.

    Anyways, I don’t think it is possible to take 10,000 shitty photos in a row. If you go out to the streets, assert yourself, and try to make good images, you are bound to get a few good ones.

    So as an assignment, try to take 10,000 street photos as quickly as you can. If you’re trigger happy and shoot 1,000 in a day, it will take you about 10 days of dedicated shooting (assuming you shoot every weekend, that is around 2-3 months). For some others it might take you 6 months-1 year.

    After you shoot those 10,000 shots, you are only allowed to keep one image. Yeah it will be really hard, but I can guarantee it will be a damn good shot.

    Then once you’re done, onto your next 10,000 shots!

    Lesson #26: Chase the light

    “I am forever chasing light. Light turns the ordinary into the magical.” – Trent Parke

    The root of the word “photography” in Greek means “drawing with light.” Without light, photography couldn’t exist.

    When I started shooting photography, I could never get the epic photos I wanted. I saw all of these incredible images on the internet with glowing faces, dark shadows, and images that took my breath away.

    I soon realized that I had no concept of light in my photography. I didn’t think about the importance of “golden hour”, and shooting when the light was beautiful (sunrise and sunset). I didn’t pay attention to what direction the sun was in. I didn’t try using a flash to add artificial light. I didn’t know the difference between direct and harsh light versus diffused light.

    But as time went on, I started to study and seek the light. And it has made all of the difference in my photography. When I go out during the day and the light is too harsh (around noon), I use a flash and photograph people in shady places or indoors. Ultimately natural light is preferable but using a flash helps give you more freedom to shoot other times in the day. If you have no experience shooting with a flash, I recommend using your camera’s integrated pop-up flash in “P” (program mode) at ISO 400. If your camera doesn’t have an integrated flash, just buy the cheapest and smallest “TTL” (through the lens) automated flash for your camera.

    Another practical tip is when you’re shooting when the light is harsh, expose for the highlights and try to get really dramatic and dark shadows. On a digital camera you can set your exposure to -2 compensation.

    But ultimately you want to chase the light. Go to where the light is, and be patient. As street photographer Blake Andrews says, “Don’t try to fight the light you will always lose.”

    So if you’re shooting during sunset, follow where the light is. Start seeing where rays of light hit, and be patient. When you start losing the light, follow the streets where the light is still good.

    If you prefer to shoot natural light, don’t shoot when the light is harsh (mid day). Shoot early in the morning during sunrise and when the light becomes harsh, have lunch and take a nap. Then in the afternoon go location scouting and find some interesting areas you want to shoot. Then once the sun starts to set and the light becomes good, shoot in that area like there is no tomorrow. This is a more efficient way to shoot: containing your shooting time to 1-2 hours during both sunrise and sunset, rather than shooting for 8 hours straight through the whole day.

    Assignment : Study the light

    Find an interesting area to shoot, and try to shoot at 3 different times of the day: sunrise, noon, and sunset. When you go home review the images, and see how the color, quality, and intensity of the light is different. Which do you prefer?

    Also try experimenting shooting with a flash in your street photography. Go an entire day only shooting with flash, and see what effect it has on your images.

    Remember: no amount of post processing can make a photograph good without great light.

    Another way you can use this assignment: during sunrise or sunset just stay at one busy intersection with good light. When you have a good scene, a good background, and good light, stand there, and just wait for your subjects to come to you. Expose for the highlights and get dramatic shadows, and capture the drama of your subjects.

    Once you start losing the light, continue to chase the light, until it fades away.

    Lesson #27: Channel your emotions into your photos

    “When I came to Sydney at the age of 21 I left everything behind – all my childhood friends and my best mate – at first I just felt this sense of complete loneliness in the big city. So, I did what I always do: I went out and used my Leica to channel those personal emotions into images.” – Trent Parke

    There is no photography which is truly “objective”. Reality is always filtered through your lens. You decide what to include in the frame and what to exclude from the frame. You are also a “subject selector”; you only make images which you find personally interesting and relevant.

    One of the best ways to make great images is to channel your emotions in your work. This is why often the greatest artistic work is done when an artist suffers a death, a break up, or when there is immense joy in his or her life. Trent Parke describes the importance of channeling personal emotions into your work:

    “I’m always trying to channel those personal emotions into my work. That is very different from a lot of documentary photographers who want to depict the city more objectively. For me it is very personal – it’s about what is inside me. I don’t think about what other people will make of it. I shoot for myself.”

    I personally find street photography as a sort of self therapy. When I’m feeling stressed about family, relationships, money, haters, etc, there is nothing that clears my head more than pursuing “walking meditation” when shooting street photography.

    Also the more I shoot street photography, the more I learn about myself. Street photography is self discovery. Through street photography, I learned that I love interacting with people, which shoes through the intimate” street portraits” I shoot. Trent Parke has a similar philosophy: that photography is discovering yourself and your place in the world:

    “My mum died when I was 10 and it changed everything about me. It made me question everything around me. Photography is a discovery of life which makes you look at things you’ve never looked at before. It’s about discovering yourself and your place in the world.”

    Jacob Aue Sobol is another Magnum Photographer who puts his heart and soul into his images:

    “The year after I started at the European Film College, I started writing short stories and, later, taking pictures. Once I realized that I was able to isolate my emotions and communicate them through my pictures, I felt like I had found an ability which was unique and which I wanted to explore further. Now, a lot of experiences in life and the people I have shared my time with have added to my memories, my fear and my love, and through this they have inspired me to continue photographing.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Joel Meyerowitz also shares how he is trying to communicate less of his thoughts, but more of his feelings in his photos:

    “What are we all trying to get to in the making of anything? We’re trying to get to ourselves. What I want is more of my feelings and less of my thoughts. I want to be clear. I see the photograph as a chip of experience itself. It exists in the world. It is not a comment on the world. In a photograph you don’t look for, you look at! It’s close to the thing itself. It’s like an excitation. I want the experience that I am sensitive to to pass back into the world, fixed by chemistry and light to be reexamined. That’s what all photographs are about—looking at things hard. I want to find an instrument with the fidelity of its own technology to carry my feelings in a true, clear, and simple way. That’s how I want to think about less is more.”

    Assignment : Shoot how you feel

    Our emotions are highly variable. On some days we are super optimistic and think everything in life is perfect and super dandy. The future is limitless, and we feel extreme joy and contentment with our lives.

    However on other days we can feel pretty shitty. We feel stressed from our job and personal issues. We feel lost. We don’t know what direction our life is heading in. We don’t have enough money in our bank accounts. We have hit a wall in our photography. We don’t feel inspired.

    The only cure is action via shooting. So for this assignment, shoot how you feel. If you’re feeling moody and depressed, channel your emotions when you’re shooting. Perhaps having this mood will help you identify and empathize with other random people on the streets that might feel the same way. Generally when I’m feeling moody I find that gritty black and white suits my mood.

    However when you are in a good mood, look for the good and joyful moments out there. Photograph kids playing freely. Photograph old couples in love. Photograph your loved ones.

    Work on shooting an emotion and mood based on how you feel. Try to do this for a year, and make a series of 10-12 images that fit a mood like “despair, hope, joy, or isolation.” The more emotional you make your photos the more your viewers can feel what you feel.

    > “A portrait is not a likeness. The moment an emotion or fact is transformed into a photograph it is no longer a fact but an opinion. There is no such thing as inaccuracy in a photograph. All photographs are accurate. None of them is truth.” – Richard Avedon

    Richard Avedon isn’t known as a “street photographer.” He is famous for his large format 8×10 portraits of celebrities, musicians, and fashion photography.

    Often overlooked is Avedon’s “street portraits” in his book: “In the American West”, he traveled across America and shot portraits of people he found interesting from 1979-84. He asked his subjects for permission, placed them in front of a huge white backdrop, and caught moments of hope, despair, longing, strength, confusion, and love.

    Avedon describes how when he made photos of these people it was more of a “fiction than documentary:

    “I think the larger issue is that photography is not reportage, it is not journalism— it is fiction. When I go to the west and do the working class (it is more about the working class than the west)—it is my view. Like John Wayne is Hollywood’s view. So it means my idea of the working class is a fiction.”

    Avedon is one of the greatest portrait photographers in history, and he boldly stated that every photo we make is an opinion. We decide when to click the shutter, because we personally find a certain moment or expression interesting.

    However he also states that all photos are “accurate” in the sense that the moment your camera captures an image, the moment you caught is precise. However there is no objective “truth” in your photos.

    In that sense all the photos we tell are “lies”.

    So what is the secret of making great photos? It isn’t to tell the truth but to show your subjective view of reality.

    Mary Ellen Mark also shares how a photographer can never be 100% objective:

    “I don’t think you’re ever an objective observer. By making a frame you’re being selective, then you edit the pictures you want published and you’re being selective again. You develop a point of view that you want to express. You try to go into a situation with an open mind, but then you form an opinion and you express it in your photographs. It is very important for a photographer to have a point of view- that contributes to a great photograph.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    The humanist photographer Sebastiao Salgado also says:

    “Photography is not objective. It is deeply subjective – my photography is consistent ideologically and ethically with the person I am.” – Sebastião Salgado

    Assignment : Lie through a photograph

    For this assignment you are required to try to make a convincing lie. Find a stranger in the streets who looks very happy. Then approach that person, ask to make a portrait of them. If they say yes, start off by asking them to smile really big doe the camera. Then try to ask them to look sad or melancholy. Tell them to tell you a sad story, or something unfortunate that happened to them recently.

    Now when you made several images, go home and try to find the most convincing image of that subject looking sad. Try to show it to some friends or colleagues and ask them how the photo makes them feel. Notice whether or not the viewer is “fooled” by thinking that this person is genuinely sad (whereas in “reality” they were quite happy).

    Example

    For example this one photograph I shot of an old man in Amsterdam on a train looks quite lonely and miserable. The viewer might come up with a story about him: how he worked his entire life and never had a loving family or partner. In the frame he looks isolated and alone.

    But in reality, his wife was sitting next to him. However I made the decision not to include her in the frame. I told a lie; the version of reality I was trying to create.

    In another photograph of a man taking a bite out of a sandwich for my “Suits” series, I also recreated the scene. I saw him about to take a bite out of his sandwich, and I brought up my camera to make an image. He saw me, and stopped. I then asked him through the window to take a bite. He listened and took a bite, and I took a photograph. The image looks candid, but it was staged and recreated.

    So don’t feel guilty about telling lies in your photos. Remember: all photos are accurate, none of them is truth.

    Lesson #29: Disturb your viewer

    “It’s so strange to me that anyone would ever think that a work of art shouldn’t be disturbing or shouldn’t be invasive. That’s the property of work— that’s the arena of a work of art. It is to disturb, it to make you think, to make you feel. If my work didn’t disturb from time to time, it would be a failure in my own eyes. It’s meant to disturb— in a positive way.” – Richard Avedon

    Sometimes as photographers and artists, we are afraid of being criticized. We are afraid of having out work criticized, but also criticized for not being a loving, empathetic, or mindful human being.

    There is not one great photographer in history without his or her critics. No matter how good you are as a photographer, you’re always going to court some sort of controversy or hate. In fact, I believe that the more hated or criticized a photographer is, the most successful he or she is.

    When Robert Frank made his book: “The Americans”, it was largely seen as a horrible and anti American book. It got trashed by editors and photography magazines. But several decades later it was seen to be one of the finest photography books in history.

    When Daido Moriyama first started to shoot street photography with a cheap point and shoot Ricoh GR camera, he was ridiculed by other photographer for his grainy, out of focus, and technically imperfect images. But now it is a generally accepted aesthetic, with lots of photographers who admire this type of shooting.

    As Richard Avedon states: the best art is disturbing and invasive to the viewer. Great art disturbs the viewer by pushing themself out of their comfort zone, to challenge their thinking, thoughts, world view, and beliefs. It challenges the viewer to feel a different way.

    The worst thing you can be as an artist and photographer is to be boring. The secret to failure as a photographer is to make work that doesn’t offend anybody.

    Assignment: Haters are gonna hate

    For this assignment, do research on a photographer or artist you admire. Search in Google for their name and add keywords like “overrated” or “critique”. No matter how successful or talented a photographer is, he or she is always going to have “haters.”

    So realize, you cannot go through life and your photographic journey without having someone dislike your work. My suggestion: embrace it, and intentionally try to disturb your viewer.

    Example

    This one photograph I took was quite controversial. It pissed off a lot of people, as people found it rude and controversial. It is a photograph of a woman inside a money-exchange booth in Hong Kong. I saw the woman who looked lonely and trapped inside, and I wanted to catch that emotion. So I brought up my camera and prepared to take a photograph. At that moment, she started to bang against the window (signaling me not to take the photograph). But I reacted to that gesture, and took an image with a flash.

    Many viewers were upset because I took the photograph against this woman’s wishes. But still, I feel that by conveying her anxiety and energy in the photo make it engaging, full of energy and passion, which shows her emotions.

    Was it “right” or “wrong” for me to have taken the shot? Ultimately it is the ethical judgement of the viewer which decides, not that of the photographer.

    “Modern technology has taken the angst out of achieving the perfect shot. For me, the only thing that counts is the idea behind the image: what you want to see and what you’re trying to say. The idea is crucial. You have to think of something you want to say and expand upon it.” – Martin Parr

    Nowadays with smartphones and modern digital photography, a photographer doesn’t need to rely on manual or technical settings anymore. If you just set your camera to “P” (program mode), your camera automatically chooses the exposure, aperture, shutter speed, and often does a better job than the photographer. This liberates the photographer to focus on composing and framing the scene well.

    Ultimately the technical settings matter insofar much as you need to make a strong image with a strong idea. Many Magnum photographers shoot in “P” mode (even nowadays Steve McCurry). The real master photographers don’t care so much about technical settings, but what they are trying to say through their images.

    Magnum photographer Constantine Manos also mirror the importance of ideas in photography:

    “Ideas are very important and underrated in photography. A photograph, like a written text or a short story, is an idea. A photograph is an idea. A visual idea. It doesn’t need any words. But it is an idea– a visual idea. If you see something, a good photograph is the expression of an idea. This doesn’t require captions and explanations. A photo should make a statement.” – Constantine Manos

    Even going back further in time to the work of Andre Kertesz in the early 20th century, he stresses the importance of mood and emotion, not technique:

    “Technique isn’t important. Technique is in the blood. Events and mood are more important than good light and the happening is what is important.” – Andre Kertesz

    Kertesz expands on saying that even though you might have a technically perfect image, it doesn’t mean anything without expression or soul:

    “If you want to write, you should learn the alphabet. You write and write and in the end you have a beautiful, perfect alphabet. But it isn’t the alphabet that is important. The important thing is what you are writing, what you are expressing. The same thing goes for photography. Photographs can be technically perfect and even beautiful, but they have no expression.” – Andre Kertesz

    Assignment: Try out “P” mode

    When you’re out making images, you only have a limited amount of brainpower. So don’t waste your effort in thinking about your camera settings. Focus on capturing the moment, the mood, and the soul behind an image.

    If you’ve never tried “P” mode, give it a go. Set your camera to “P” (or program), center-point autofocus, and ISO 1600. This will automatically prevent you from worrying about the technical settings, and more on the image-making aspect of things. Try it out for a month, and see if this liberates and helps your photography.

    Example

    In this photograph I took in Downtown LA, it was sunset and I saw this fascinating girl with a shadow that looked like a Pinnochio nose. I shot it on a Ricoh GR, and had the camera set to “P” mode and center autofocus. This allowed me to focus on “working the scene,” and not worrying about technical settings. Ultimately, I got the shot that I wanted, because I didn’t have to waste energy on worrying about what my aperture or shutter speed was.

    If you ever exhibit your photos or print them in a book, nobody is going to ask you if you shot it fully-manually or not. Ultimately only the image and idea matters.

    Lesson #31: Enjoy the process

    “I was taking pictures for myself. I felt free. Photography was a lot of fun for me. First of all I’d get really excited waiting to see if the pictures would come out the next day. I didn’t really know anything about photography, but I loved the camera.” – William Klein

    If you’re not having fun in photography, you’re doing something wrong. Not only that, but why would you make photos if you didn’t enjoy it? We already have enough stress and anxiety from our jobs, relationships, and other aspects of our lives.

    The more fun you have while making images, the more your enthusiasm will communicate to the viewer.

    William Klein expresses his love and enthusiasm for photography vividly. Through his words, you can see how much love and passion he has for his craft:

    “… a photographer can love his camera and what it can do in the same way that a painter can love his brush and paints, love the feel of it and the excitement.”

    When William Klein shot on the streets, he would experiment and try out different techniques. He wasn’t 100% sure what he would get, but he harnessed luck and chance, all the while enjoying the process:

    “I would look at my contact sheets and my heart would be beating, you know. To see if I’d caught what I wanted. Sometimes, I’d take shots without aiming, just to see what happened. I’d rush into crowds – bang! Bang! I liked the idea of luck and taking a chance, other times I’d frame a composition I saw and plant myself somewhere, longing for some accident to happen.”

    While it is important to work hard in your photography, don’t push yourself so hard that you no longer enjoy the process of photography. Constantine Manos explains:

    “…Don’t drive yourself [too hard]. If you’re tired, sit down. If you’re not enjoying it [photographing], you’re doing something wrong. Photography should always be a pleasurable search for something wonderful.” – Constantine Manos

    Another tip: don’t take yourself too seriously, just like Elliott Erwitt:

    “I’m not a serious photographer like most of my colleagues. That is to say, I’m serious about not being serious.” Elliott Erwitt

    Assignment: Make yourself miserable

    Sometimes it is hard to know whether you are having “fun” or not. But it is easy to tell whether you are feeling miserable, are bored, or don’t enjoy something.

    So for this assignment, we are going to learn how to have more “fun” in photography by intentionally learning what makes us miserable in photography.

    Take out a notebook and write down a list of things which you don’t enjoy or things that makes you miserable or bored in photography. Everyone differs in their perspectives. So here are some ideas, just pick and choose what resonates with you:

    • I dislike shooting everyday.
    • I dislike not shooting everyday.
    • I dislike shooting alone.
    • I dislike shooting with others.
    • I dislike shooting with a project in mind.
    • I dislike going out and shooting without having a propose.
    • I dislike talking and engaging with strangers in public, I prefer to be candid.
    • I dislike shooting without permission, I would prefer to ask.

    So after you write down a list of things you don’t enjoy in photography, to have fun just do the exact opposite.

    Lesson #32: Single photos can’t tell stories

    “For me this just reveals, once again, the biggest problem with photography. Photographs aren’t good at telling stories. Stories require a beginning, middle and end. They require the progression of time. Photographs stop time. They are frozen. Mute. As viewers of the picture, we have no idea what those people on the waterfront are talking about.” – Alec soth

    Alec Soth is one of the most successful and hard working contemporary master photographers. He is a master storyteller, and also constantly experiments with his photography. Although he is a photographer, he is less interested in making single images and more interested in telling good stories.

    Soth makes the bold statement that a single image cannot tell a story. While a single image can suggest a story to the viewer, a real story needs a beginning middle and end. And you can only achieve that through a series of images. Soth expands on the idea:

    “So what are photographs good at? While they can’t tell stories, they are brilliant at suggesting stories.”

    Furthermore, the problem with single images is that they often don’t provide enough context. Soth states:

    “You can’t tell provide context in 1/500th of a second.”

    Photography has only been around for less than 150 years. But story telling has been around for millenia. Soth views the storytelling as the ultimate goal in his photography:

    “This is the never ending struggle, I think storytelling is the most powerful art, for me. I just think there’s nothing more satisfying than the narrative thrust: beginning, middle, and end, what’s gonna happen. The thing I’m always bumping up against is that photography doesn’t function that way. Because it’s not a time-based medium, it’s frozen in time, they suggest stories, they don’t tell stories. So it is not narrative. So it functions much more like poetry than it does like the novel. It’s just these impressions and you leave it to the viewer to put together. ”

    Garry Winogrand also shares his perspective that photographs by themselves are just images; light reflected off surfaces. The meanings created through images are through the viewer, not the images themselves:

    “Photos have no narrative content. They only describe light on surface.” – Garry Winogrand

    Joel Sternfeld also shares the problem of photography, that single images can’t explain anything:

    “You take 35 degrees out of 360 degrees and call it a photo. No individual photo explains anything. That’s what makes photography such a wonderful and problematic medium.” – Joel Sternfeld

    Sebastiao Salgado ties it all together by also hammering in the point that he only works for a group of images to tell a story:

    “I always work for a group of pictures, to tell a story. If you ask which picture in a story I like most, it is impossible for me to tell you this. I don’t work for an individual picture. If I must select one individual picture for a client, it is very difficult for me.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    One last piece of advice from Alec Soth: think of yourself less as a photographer, and more of a film maker. This will help you, because making great photography projects isn’t just shooting; the editing, sequencing, and publishing are just as important:

    “I don’t come close to shooting every day. For better or worse, I don’t carry a camera with me everywhere I go. I liken my process to that of filmmaking. First I conceive of the idea. Then I do pre-production and fundraising. Then shooting. Then editing. Then distribution (books and galleries). As with most filmmakers, the shooting takes just a fraction of my time.” – Alec Soth

    Assignment : Tell a story

    One of the best ways to learn how to tell better stories in photography with a series is to study film, novels, and stories. See how the stories have a beginning, middle, and end.

    In terms of sequencing, think about the flow of images you want, and how you want the feel to be. Do you want your story to start off with a drama or problem, and slowly introduce protagonists to your story, and have them resolve it at the end? Or perhaps do you want your story to be like a fairytale like photographer Jason Eskenazi did in his “Wonderland” book?

    When putting together a book or series, I recommend printing out your photos as small 4×6 prints, and spreading them out on a table. Try to find some sort of flow to the images, and even ask your friends to help sequence your images to tell different stories. If you prefer a digital approach, you can also try sequencing your images on an iPad.

    If you’ve never created a series before, constrain your story to 10 images. Think about what your opening shot will be, the sequencing of the next images, and the final shot.

    As a final suggestion, if you want to learn how to focus on storytelling, take a break from social media which focuses on single images (Instagram and Flickr).

    Work on your story for 3 months. Spend 1 month shooting, 1 month editing and sequencing, and 1 month printing and publishing your work.

    Lesson #33: Think like a film maker (got combined with lesson #32)

    “I don’t come close to shooting every day. For better or worse, I don’t carry a camera with me everywhere I go. I liken my process to that of filmmaking. First I conceive of the idea. Then I do pre-production and fundraising. Then shooting. Then editing. Then distribution (books and galleries). As with most filmmakers, the shooting takes just a fraction of my time.” – Alec Soth

    Another practical lesson I learned from Alec Soth was to think of yourself less as a photographer, and more of a film maker. This will help you, because making great photography projects isn’t just shooting; the editing, sequencing, and publishing are just as important.

    Lesson #34: Focus on the work (before the promotion)

    “Now I’m in the position where I see a lot of young photographers pushing their work, and I think that’s fine, but so often it’s wasted effort before the work is ready. Everyone’s running around trying to promote themselves, and you kinda have to put in those years of hard work to make something decent before you do that. Particularly that first project is the hardest thing. I always say the 20s are the hardest decade because you don’t have money and you don’t have a reputation. In relation to this kind of issue, I’m always wary that the advice is like “you need to put together this promo package that you send out to these 100 people.” No, you need to do the work, and worry about that later.” – Alec Soth

    In today’s society we all want to become famous. Social media has only intensified this. We start to focus on how to become more famous; how to get more followers, more views, more comments, more likes, more awards, more commissions, more exhibitions, more money, and more popularity.

    However know that before you worry about promotion, fame, and wealth, you should focus on the most important thing in photography and art: the work itself.

    It is true that you need some promotion if you want to have your work recognized. For example, Vivian Maier died penniless because she never showed her work to anybody else while she was alive (even though she was a master photographer).

    But at the same time, the problem that a lot of photographers make is they focus on the promotion of their images before getting better.

    In today’s world with social media, if you make good work, sooner or later you will become “discovered” and have your work appreciated.

    I find the photographers who best become “discovered” are the ones who work on meaningful projects, that have a cohesive concept and theme, and publish it as a “body of work.” This often works much better than publishing random photos to Facebook, Instagram, or Flickr.

    Assignment : don’t publish any photos for 6 months

    If you want to learn how to focus on your work it is important to not get distracted. So as an assignment: try to abstain from publishing any of your photos online for 6 months.

    Personally I did this assignment (suggested from my friend and photographer Charlie Kirk) and it was the best thing I ever did. It taught me to focus less about how many “likes” and “favorites” I would get on my images, and more about how to make powerful and meaningful images and projects.

    6 months might seem like a long time, and learning not to upload your photos all the time on social media will teach you patience. Not only that, but the longer you wait before publishing your work the better you can judge your images objectively; whether they are worth publishing or not.

    “I have this thing, the camera’s on a tripod, it’s like an easel “Ok, I can only take a couple, I gotta makes this great.” Then I tried to get everything in the frame, which, in fact, is not a good strategy for photography. Its pulling stuff out of the frame is usually what you want to do, to simplify it. But I didn’t know that. So that was one of the lessons learned.” – Alec Soth

    Photography is much more about subtraction than addition. As a photographer, you want to show your viewer the significance of a scene. You want to be specific.

    By having too many subjects or objects in a frame, you only confuse your viewer. A cluttered photograph is difficult to look at, and often uninteresting.

    Subtraction is addition. By removing unnecessary elements from the frame, you give more focus and importance to what actually exists in the frame.

    Photographer Joel Meyerowitz also shares how determining what to include and exclude is what determines the meaning of a photograph:

    “And early on I sensed the power of that in this regard: when you put your frame up to your eye, the world continues outside the frame. So what you put in and what you leave out are what determines the meaning or potential of your photograph. But you must continue to keep in mind that there are plenty of stuff off-stage. And what bearing might the rest of the off-stage have on this?” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Furthermore, remove from the frame which might distract the viewer. Photographer Richard Kalvar explains:

    “The framing is very important – you have to keep out things that distract from the little drama that’s in the picture. I’d like my pictures to exist almost in a dream state and have people react to them almost as if they’re coming in and out of daydreams, you know?” – Richard Kalvar

    Assignment : Subtract until there isn’t anything left to subtract

    This assignment is a zen assignment: try to subtract from your frame until there is nothing left to subtract.

    So for example, take a photograph of a scene you find interesting. Then subtract from it, perhaps by taking a step closer or by framing the scene differently. Then try to subtract some more by asking yourself, “What information in this scene is not really necessary?” You might subtract unnecessary trees, cars, lamp poles, people, or even body limbs. Keep subtracting and cutting from your frame until there isn’t anything left to subtract.

    Then go back and choose which of your photos works the best. Try to find that balance of simplicity and minimalism in your frame which highlights the “little drama” happening in your frame.

    Lesson #36: Make yourself vulnerable

    “One thing I’m really interested in is vulnerability. When you talk about Arbus and Hujar . . . I like being exposed to vulnerabilities. I think there’s something really beautiful about it. That’s kind of what I’ve been doing with these little stories, amping up the vulnerability, but also my own vulnerabilities, exposing more of myself. Because I knew with that “journalist” line I’m exposing my own shit there. I’m trying to get down to something raw.” – Alec Soth

    The more vulnerable you make yourself as a photographer, the more vulnerable your subjects will make themselves to you. And the more vulnerable your subjects, the deeper you can connect with then emotionally.

    If you look at many of Alec Soth’s portraits of people, you might wonder how he was able to make them open up so much to him. His subjects are totally open, transparent, and sometimes even nude (metaphorically and literally).

    You can’t expect your subjects to open up to you if you don’t open up to them. People respond to you reciprocally.

    Another photographer who gets very deep with his subjects is Jacob Aue Sobol. He sees photography as an exchange between photographer and subject. You must make yourself equal to your subjects as well:

    “You have to be completely open and demonstrate that you are also vulnerable. You can’t be just a photographer – you have to discover who you are yourself. If you don’t, people won’t open up to you. That means that you mustn’t avoid being vulnerable. For me, it’s a kind of exchange. Even though I’m the one taking the pictures, my ambition is to achieve an equal exchange between myself and the person I’m photographing.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Assignment: What does it feel like to be on the other side?

    If you want to make your photos more personal, it is important to make an equal exchange with your subject.

    Ironically, I know a lot of photographers who don’t like being photographed. This is a huge hurdle to overcome, because if you’re not comfortable being photographed, how can you expect your subjects to also feel comfortable being photographed? Not only that, but you will also assume that everyone else doesn’t like being photographed.

    So experiment by being on the other side of the camera. If you have a friend who is a portrait photographer, ask them to take portraits of you. Then make notes in terms of what makes you feel comfortable or uncomfortable when you’re being photographed.

    Another idea: if you approach a stranger on the streets and you’re interested in them, start off by asking them to shoot a portrait of you. Then once they’re done, kindly ask if you can take a portrait of them as well.

    Then afterwards, show them the photos you took of them on the LCD screen of your camera, and ask them which of the photos they prefer of themselves. Then offer to email them the shots, or even send them a print.

    Make your photography an exchange, and make yourself vulnerable to your subjects. Only this way can you get deeper emotionally to your subjects.

    Lesson #37: Stay an amateur

    “I am an amateur and intend to remain one my whole life long. I attribute to photography the task of recording the real nature of things, their interior, their life. The photographer’s art is a continuous discovery, which requires patience and time. A photograph draws its beauty from the truth with which it’s marked.” – Andre Kertesz

    Often being called an “amateur” is an insult. Being called an “amateur” connotates that you are unskilled, a beginner, and someone without vision.

    However in reality the root of the word “amateur” is to do something for the love of it (as opposed to a “professional” who does something for money).

    Just because you’re a “professional” photographer doesn’t mean that you’re good. You can be a baby photographer in a mall and be a “professional.” Or you can have a full time job doing something else and only make photos of what you love being an “amateur.”

    My suggestion: embrace being an amateur. Revel in it. Love is the energy and passion which keeps your photography moving forward. Sometimes when you think too much about monetizing your photography professionally, you lose your passion for what you photograph.

    Assignment: Give away your photography

    Thinking too much about making money off your photography (especially if you already have a full time job) can hurt you creatively.

    As an experiment, I would suggest giving away your photography, and seeing how it makes you feel.

    Start off by printing out your favorite photos, and give them away for free to friends, family, and colleagues. See how much joy this brings them.

    Personally, all of my photos are “open-source”, meaning that they are free to download, print, share, etc. All of them are available full resolution on my Flickr page (flickr.com/ekizz).

    While I make my living teaching photography workshops, I give away all my photos, books, videos, and articles away for free. This helps me to keep this “amateur” side of photography, where I do it purely for the love of it, and not always worrying how I can “monetize” my photography.

    I have gained much more energy and inspiration in my photography from the appreciation I get from others rather than money.

    Forever be an amateur.

    Lesson #38: Stay hungry

    Even when Andre Kertesz was 90 years old, he created a new portfolio and shared it with the photographer Susan May Tell. When Tell asked him what kept him going, Kertesz responded: “I am still hungry.”

    Many of us have excuses in our photography: that we are too old, and that we wish that we started sooner.

    However our age, nationality, background, heritage, or skill in photography doesn’t matter. The only thing that matters is how passionate and hungry we are in our photography.

    Many photographers become jaded after years of shooting. They lose a sense of their hunger and passion.

    Andre Kertesz (after a lifetime of shooting) still created new work in his 80s and even presented a new portfolio when he was 90. He wasn’t easily satisfied with his work, he was still hungry to explore the world and shoot more, and to see the limits of the photographic medium.

    One of my favorite quotes that is similar is from Steve Jobs, who said: “Stay hungry, stay foolish.”

    We all need a bit of hunger in our life to propel us to action, and to keep going. If you’re constantly full and bloated with food, you have no motivation to move or do anything.

    Personally I find my best writing, photography, and exercise happens when I am physically hungry. That hunger compels me to act.

    Similarly in photography, stir up your appetite and hunger. Whenever I don’t feel motivated or inspired, I look at the photography and work of the masters. Whenever I see their images or read their thoughts, it makes me hungry to also make images in photography.

    Assignment: Shoot without film or a memory card

    If you feel you have “photographer’s block” in your work and don’t feel inspired, try out this assignment: for an entire day, shoot without having film or a memory card in your camera.

    Walk around for an entire day with your camera, and take photos of anything that interests you. But without having any film or memory cards in your camera, you will frustrated and upset that you didn’t record anything that entire day. Then you can rush home, put in some real film or memory cards, and then go out and shoot with a reignited sense of vigor and hunger to make images.

    “Shooting people is more beautiful, because it is more difficult.” – Constantine Manos

    One of the best things about street photography is that it is so challenging. Anything in life which is too easy is no fun. As human beings we crave adventure, difficulty, and challenge.

    Street photography is one of the most difficult genres of photography out there, because it is difficult to shoot human beings. We have so little control over the background, the subject, and the light. We have a fear of pissing people off. We have the fear of missing the “decisive moment.”

    If you find yourself being bored with photography, it probably has become too easy for you. So push yourself out of your comfort zone, and aim to make more difficult images.

    For example, let’s say your photography is mostly of single subjects, which has become too easy for you. Try to add complexity, layers, and depth to your shots (like the work of Constantine Manos or Alex Webb).

    Assignment: Shoot what you’re afraid of

    Have you ever had a situation when you were out shooting all day and you didn’t find anything interesting? Happens to me all the time.

    However have you ever seen a scene that you wanted to capture but were too nervous or afraid to do so?

    Channel that fear. Photograph what you are afraid of. The only reason that you’re afraid of shooting a scene is because you want to photograph it, but you’re afraid of the consequences.

    By doing what we’re afraid of we continue to grow. We escape complacency.

    So try to photograph a neighborhood or type of subject matter which frightens you. Of course do this within common sense and with safety in mind.

    But whenever you see a shot you’re afraid of, shoot it.

    Lesson #40: Print your photos

    “A photograph doesn’t exist until it is printed.” – Constantine Manos

    In today’s digital age, we are so used to seeing our images on a screen. We see them on our laptops, tablets, and smartphones. But the print is a dying medium. When is the last time you printed 4×6 prints of a holiday trip, instead of just sharing and tagging them on Facebook?

    Constantine Manos says a photograph doesn’t exist until it is printed. I would have to agree. If a photograph isn’t printed, it only exists metaphorically in pixels, and in 1’s and 0’s digitally in the ether. Printing a photograph makes it physical and brings it into the “real world.” A printed photograph has texture, weight, and takes up physical space.

    In a manifesto called “The Print”, Constantine Manos professes his life and shares the importance of printing our images:

    The Print

    “There are still photographers who believe that a photograph does not exist until it is a print. There remains in their memory the experience of working in a darkroom and recalling the magic of seeing an image gradually appear on a piece of paper in a tray of liquid; all this lit by a warm golden light.

    If processed and stored properly this print can last for generations. It becomes archival; it becomes vintage. It becomes a treasure to be put in a fine box between soft acid-free tissues. It can be framed and hung in a favorite spot, to become an object of daily pleasure and comfort. It is a real object we can hold in our hands, not a negative or an image floating around in space and stored in cold machines.

    Whether captured on film or captured digitally, this print, this object, reflects the craft and skill and pride of its maker. Its quality is a reflection of the skill and art of its making.

    Let us sign it with our name as an expression of pride and accomplishment– whether we have made it ourselves or have entrusted it’s making to a skilled artisan. Let us be collectors and guardians of these beautiful artifacts. Let us celebrate the print.” – Constantine Manos, September 2014

    Assignment : Print your photos

    Have you ever had a hard drive crash on you which caused you to lose priceless images? If so, remind yourself how painful that experience was. If this has never happened to you, trust me; it will happen sooner or later. The average hard drive is rated to only survive 3 years. Even though we have data stored online in “the cloud,” can you expect people to retrieve that data 200 (or even 2000 years from now?)

    Make it a habit to print your photos. While photos can burn in a fire, they are still more stable than digital files. Print out your favorite photos and put them into boxes, folders, or scrapbooks. Enjoy physically holding, touching, and arranging your photos.

    Experiment printing your photos in different sizes, and see how that changes how you feel about your images.

    Always remind yourself, a photograph never truly exists until you turn it into physical atoms through the print.

    Lesson #41: Don’t get suckered by ‘the exotic’

    “It is not enough to just photograph what something looks like. We need to make it into something that is unique, a surprise. Photography has been used forever to show what things look like, like when photographers photographed objects and landscapes.” – Constantine Manos

    Have you ever been to India for the first time, where you strove to make all your photos look “National Geographic” and exotic? But we have all already seen those types of images before, they are quite boring.

    The job of a photographer isn’t to just make beautiful postcards of exotic places. The job of the photographer is to make a unique image that hasn’t been done before. Rather than simply duplicating what has been done in the past, we should strive to add to the conversation of photography by adding something a little extra.

    Constantine Manos advised me not to get “suckered by the exotic.” I have to admit, this happens to me all the time, especially when I travel to exotic locations which are novel to me, like India, Tokyo, or Paris. I have a mental repository of all the exotic photos I have seen in the past, and I try to simply replicate it.

    Also as a photographer, we need to imbue meaning into the images we make. We aren’t there to simply capture what is before our very eyes. We have already seen a million photos of the Eiffel tower, the Taj Mahal, and of a sunset. We shouldn’t photograph what things look like. We should photograph what things feel like.

    Assignment: Shoot your own backyard

    Many of us photographers daydream and fantasize about going to exotic places in the world to make fantastical images.

    However realize the best photographs are to be taken in your own backyard; your own city, neighborhood, or town.

    So try this as an experiment: be a tourist in your own hometown. Imagine that you visited your own city for the first time. What would you find interesting and unique? At the same time, you know what is a “cliché” photo, so try to avoid that. Find the beauty in the mundane in your town, and know you don’t have to rely on exotic happenings, places, or events to make powerful images.

    Lesson #42: Why are you pushing the button?

    “The best way to take a bad picture is to take it. Ask yourself: ’Why am I pushing the button?’ You want to get rid of the clutter before putting it into the machine.” – Constantine Manos

    As photographers we sometimes ask the wrong questions to ourselves. We ask how to take photos, where to take photos, when to take photos. But rarely do we ask ourselves why we take photos.

    You need a reason why you click the shutter. What about a scene interests you? Why did you make that image? What kind of mood does it have? What kind of juxtaposition does it have? What kind of oddness is there?

    Assignment: why do I take photos?

    For this assignment, take out your notebook and write why you make images.

    For me, I studied sociology as an undergraduate in university and I strive to make images that are sociological; that challenges the viewer to look at society differently.

    Everyone will have a different answer. But it is a question that is difficult and takes a long time to contemplate and ask oneself.

    As the ancients once said, “Know thyself.” and Socrates said, “The unexamined life is not worth living.”

    Lesson #43: Create specific photographs

    “A photograph has to be specific. I remember a long time ago when I first began to photograph I thought, There are an awful lot of people in the world and it’s going to be terribly hard to photograph all of them, so if I photograph some kind of generalized human being, everybody’ll recognize it. It’ll be like what they used to call the common man or something. It was my teacher Lisette Model, who finally made it clear to me that the more specific you are, the more general it’ll be. You really have to face that thing. And there are certain evasions, certain nicenesses that I think you have to get out of.” – Diane Arbus

    A common mistake I see a lot of beginning photographers make is that their photos are too general. If you make your photos too general, there isn’t enough interest for the viewer.

    Viewers want their eyes to latch on certain details they find interesting in a photograph. They want a visual anchor they find interesting to keep their eyes from wandering outside of the frame.

    For Diane Arbus, she learned the lesson from her teacher (Lisette Model) that the more specific you make your photos, the more people they will reach and touch.

    For example, Diane Arbus would find specific details in her subjects that she found interesting. She would be drawn to their face, body gestures, or their expressions. Not only that, but she was specific in the types of subjects she photographed; people generally ignored or ostracized in society. These included dwarves, transgendered people, and others commonly known in her era as “freaks.”

    So to make more interesting photographs, strive to make more specific photographs.

    This goes back to the concept of “creative constraints,” in which setting boundaries in your art help you creatively. Don’t seek to photograph everything but constrain yourself from photographing the general.

    So if you plan to do a photography project, don’t aim to shoot the entire city. Constrain yourself to one neighborhood. Don’t try to photograph all the types of people you come across, photograph just one type of person.

    Assignment: See one color

    For this assignment it will show you the power of being specific. To start off just choose one color you find interesting. Then for the entire day, only shoot that one color.

    For example let’s say you decide to shoot the color red. I can guarantee you that once you narrow your focus and be specific to that one type of color, you will start seeing it everywhere.

    Once you’re done with this assignment you can try to be specific with other types of subject matter: shadows, cars, dogs, children, the elderly, hands, sunglass, etc.

    The more specific you make your photos, the more interesting they will be to the general public.

    Lesson #44: Compose intuitively

    “Composition must be one of our constant preoccupations, but at the moment of shooting it can stem only from our intuition, for we are out to capture the fugitive moment, and all the interrelationships involved are on the move.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    There are two main things that make a great photograph: content (what’s in the frame) and form (how it is composed). You need a perfect marriage of these two elements to make a memorable photograph.

    As photographers we must constantly be preoccupied with how we compose our photos, as Henri Cartier-Bresson mentioned. However, especially when it comes to street photography, how can we compose quickly when the moment we see can be so fleeting?

    Henri Cartier-Bresson states that composition can only be derived from intuition. It is hard to see diagonals, triangles, circles, leading lines, etc when you’re shooting. But the more you study the composition of your photos after you shoot it, the more you can learn how to better compose your images. Cartier-Bresson continues below:

    “Any geometrical analysis, any reducing of the picture to a schema, can be done only (because of its very nature) after the photograph has been taken, developed, and printed– and then it can be used only for a post-mortem examination of the picture.”

    Having a “post mortem” examination is one of the key points to improving your composition. We learn more from our mistakes than our successes. If you make a photo with poor composition, don’t beat yourself up. Rather, ask yourself, “How can I learn from this compositional mistake, and improve upon it for next time?”

    Another practical tip from Henri Cartier-Bresson: trace the geometric shapes you see in your photos after you’ve shot them to analyze and learn from them:

    “You can take a print of this picture, trace it on the geometric figures which come up under analysis, and you’ll observe that, if the shutter was released at the decisive moment, you have instinctively fixed a geometric pattern without which the photograph would have been both formless and lifeless.”

    The greatest street photographers also agree on this point, that composition is mostly intuitive and comes with practice. Diane Arbus shares her ideas below:

    “I hate the idea of composition. I don’t know what good composition is. I mean I guess I must know something about it from doing it a lot and feeling my way into and into what I like. Sometimes for me composition has to do with a certain brightness or a certain coming to restness and other times it has to do with funny mistakes. Theres a kind of rightness and wrongness and sometimes I like rightness and sometimes I like wrongness. Composition is like that.” – Diane Arbus

    Helen Levitt also draws on the importance on focusing on practice and intuition, less on theory in composition:

    “It would be mistaken to suppose that any of the best photography is come at by intellection; it is like all art, essentially the result of an intuitive process, drawing on all that the artist is rather than on anything he thinks, far less theorizes about.” – Helen Levitt

    Walker Evans also shares how he doesn’t think much viciously when composing his images:

    “I don’t think very much about it consciously, but I’m very aware of it unconsciously, instinctively. Deliberately discard it every once in a while not to be artistic. Composition is a schoolteacher’s word. Any artist composes. I prefer to compose originally, naturally rather than self-consciously. Form and composition both are terribly important. I can’t stand a bad design or a bad object in a room. So much for form. That way it’s placed is composition… when you stop to think about what an artist is doing one question is, what is the driving force, the motive.” – Walker Evans

    Assignment : Trace over your photos

    For this assignment, print out your most successful photos (and some unsuccessful) photos as cheap xerox prints. Then you’re going to take a red marker and start to draw all the lines, diagonals, triangles, circles, leading lines, and other compositional elements you see.

    Then ask yourself: if you could have framed this photograph again but differently, what would you change?

    Try not to force yourself to think too much about composition when you’re out shooting on the streets. Rather, study it after you’ve taken images. Then this will help you make your compositions more intuitive over time.

    Lesson #45: Arrange yourself, not others

    “I work from awkwardness. By that I mean I don’t like to arrange things if I stand in front of something, instead of arranging it, I arrange myself”. – Diane Arbus

    In photography, position is everything. The perspective and point of view you get as a photographer greatly affects and influences how an image turns out.

    When you’re shooting on the streets, you can’t always arrange your subjects to be the way you want them to be. However you always have the control of arranging yourself in a certain way.

    So if you want certain compositions or framing when you’re out on the streets, learn how to dance on the streets, almost like a ballerina. Stay light on your toes, just like a boxer. Move left, move right, take a step back, and forward. Learn to crouch, and when to tippy toe. Henri Cartier-Bresson explains how we can change our perspectives just by changing our position by a millimeter:

    “A photographer’s eye is perpetually evaluating. A photographer can bring coincidence of line simply by moving his head a fraction of a millimetre. He can modify perspectives by a slight bending of the knees. By placing the camera closer to or farther from the subject, he draws a detail. But he composes a picture in very nearly the same amount of time it takes to click the shutter, at the speed of a reflex action.”

    Assignment: 360 degrees

    For this assignment, you are going to practice getting a 360 degree perspective of a subject.

    Start off by asking a friend or loved one to photograph. Try to take a portrait of them from every single angle from a 360 degree perspective. Analyze how the light on their face changes. Analyze how at certain angles you can see both eyes, and at certain angles you can only see one eye. Consider how interesting you find the back of their head versus the front of their face.

    Then when you’re on the streets, don’t keep your feet glued to the same perspective when shooting. Learn to “work the scene” by embracing different perspectives. Also remind yourself that one millimeter in terms of perspective can change everything.

    Also when you’re playing with perspectives, as a simple assignment try this: go to a public place where you see a long horizontal pole. Then try to see someone in the background and place them that it looks like they’re sitting on the pole.

    Or another example: try to make surreal photos by placing common objects on top of people’s heads. For example if you see a vendor selling balloons, try to time it perfectly that it looks like one of the balloons have replaced somebody’s head.

    Lesson #46: Don’t just take photos of people

    “The manifestation of people, whether it’s actual people or what people do, it’s the same thing.” – Elliott Erwitt

    As street photographers, our primary concern is to document humanity and society. But that doesn’t always have to be done by photographing human beings. Rather, we can focus on capturing the “manifestation of people” as well.

    For example, many street photographers are drawn to “urban landscapes” in the sense that they are interested in the environments that humans live in and interact in. Sometimes an urban landscape can tell us more about human society than just photographing a portrait of a human being.

    Similarly, you can also photograph certain objects or juxtapositions which you think make sociological statements. For example, one of Elliott Erwitt’s most famous photos show Jesus on the cross juxtaposed next to a Pepsi advertisement. What does this say about human society, and the separation of advertising, money, and religion?

    Assignment : Show soul from an intimate object

    For this assignment try to make a photograph that evokes a human emotion from an intimate object. Perhaps you can see a human face in the holes of a cardboard box. Perhaps you can see a lonely traffic cone that looks ignored. Maybe you can see the facade of a once great building that is falling into ruins.

    Know that at the end of the day, you don’t always have to photograph human beings. Try to make images that evoke strong emotions about human beings.

    Lesson #47: Focus on content over form

    “My wish for the future of photography is that it might continue to have some relevance to the human condition and might represent work that evokes knowledge and emotions. That photography has content rather than just form. And I hope that there will be enough produce to balance out the visual garbage that one sees in our current life.”- Elliott Erwitt

    Sometimes in photography we can focus too much about the composition, framing, color, light, and technical settings of a photograph instead of the emotion and soul behind an image.

    Our primary concern as street photographers is to document and to convey the vastness of the human experience and condition.

    Of course there needs to be a balance between form and content. We can have the most emotional photograph in the world, but without the right composition, we cannot convey that emotion.

    Assignment: The human condition

    Write down a list of all the human emotions that you know of. This can include joy, despair, hope, loneliness, and companionship.

    Then as an assignment for yourself, try to take a photograph which explains each of these human emotions and conditions.

    This will be a great assignment to help you become a more emotional and empathetic photographer.

    Lesson #48: Learn how to see

    “Seeing is more than a physiological phenomenon… We see not only with our eyes but with all that we are and all that our culture is. The artist is a professional see-er.” – Dorothea Lange

    The most important tool of a photographer is his or her eyes. What differentiates an ordinary from a great photographer is how perceptive his or her eyes are.

    Some people simply look at the world, without truly “seeing” the world. Others “see” the walls by analyzing, studying, and psychologically penetrating what is before their very eyes.

    If you take Dorothea Lange’s advice: your job as a photographer is to see the world from a unique perspective. You are a professional “see-er.”

    So how can you better learn to see? Well, one tip Lange gives us is to pause, take our time, and truly analyze what is before our very eyes. This will also allow the viewer to be a more keen observer in terms of what they see:

    “This benefit of seeing… can come only if you pause a while, extricate yourself from the maddening mob of quick impressions ceaselessly battering our lives, and look thoughtfully at a quiet image… the viewer must be willing to pause, to look again, to meditate.” – Dorothea Lange

    Sometimes photographers make the mistake of thinking that buying a new camera will help inspire their vision and way of seeing the world. But that is pure folly. Dorothea Lange explains what the camera is useful for; to see the world with it a camera:

    “A camera is a tool for learning how to see without a camera.”

    Another practical tip from Lange: have a sense of urgency to your image making. You can do this by pretending as if you’re going to lose your vision tomorrow:

    “One should really use the camera as though tomorrow you’d be stricken blind.” – Dorothea Lange

    Elliott Erwitt also mirrors the thinking of Lange that he is constantly aware of his surroundings, and trying to always notice what might make a good photo, even when he doesn’t have a camera with him:

    “Noticing possible pictures — with or without carrying a camera — is fundamental to any working photographer. I would never get tired of noticing, although I would probably not be moved to take pictures that repeat and repeat.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Assignment: imagine if you were to become blind tomorrow

    The world is truly a marvel; a visual feast. Sometimes we complain that our camera isn’t good enough, that we don’t live in an interesting place to photograph, or that we don’t have enough time to photograph.

    A way to break out of that way of thinking: imagine if the doctor told you that you had a rare disease and that you would lose your vision tomorrow. If you were to hear that news, how would you spend your day as a photographer? What would you find valuable that you wanted to document and record? Is there a certain documentary project you would pursue for a day? Or take photos of friends and loved ones? Or shoot a certain neighborhood you’re interested in?

    In reality, there are a lot of blind people who will never have the pleasure (or once had the pleasure) of seeing. So no matter how shitty our life situation may be, how little money we may have, etc, always be thankful for your gift of sight; the most valuable gift of being a photographer.

    Lesson #49: Every photo you take is a self portrait

    “Every image he sees, every photograph he takes, becomes in a sense a self-portrait. The portrait is made more meaningful by intimacy – an intimacy shared not only by the photographer with his subject but by the audience.” – Dorothea Lange

    The photos you make are less about your subject and more about yourself. Whenever you hold your camera to your subject, you are really holding up a mirror and facing yourself.

    When you’re shooting portraits, there needs to be collaboration between the photographer and subject. But ultimately, the photographs you decide to take of a subject is more a judgement of what you find interesting about that person (rather than what your subject finds interesting about him or herself).

    This is a fine line we must tread as photographers, but know that once again, there is no true “objectivity” in photography. It is subjective, and there is no ultimate truth. Richard Avedon explains below after decades of making portraits:

    “There is no truth in photography. There is no truth about anyone’s person. My portraits are much more about me than they are about the people I photograph. I used to think that it was a collaboration, that it was something that happened as a result of what the subject wanted to project and what the photographer wanted to photograph. I no longer think it is that at all.” – Richard Avedon

    Assignment: Self portrait

    If you believe that every portrait you take of someone else is a self portrait, try off by taking self portraits of yourself (literally).

    You can do self portraits in many different ways. You can set your camera on a tripod and timer, and shoot yourself. You can shoot yourself through a mirror or reflection in a puddle. You can photograph your own shadow.

    Sometimes you are your best own subject, when you have nothing else to photograph.

    The more you shoot self portraits, the more you will discover about yourself. Then try to apply the same philosophy when you shoot others.

    Lesson #50: Don’t shoot your preconceived notions

    “To know ahead of time what you’re looking for means you’re then only photographing your own preconceptions, which is very limiting, and often false.” – Dorothea Lange

    To be a great photographer is to have a flexible and open ended mind.

    Think of this zen example: if there is a great storm, the trees that are rigid and rooted into the ground will be blown away. But the bamboo trees which are nimble and flexible will simply sway in the wind and not break.

    Similarly, try your best to have a fluid mind as a photographer. When you’re pursuing a photography project in a certain foreign place, don’t enter that place with any preconceived notions. Have an open mind, without any of your personal prejudices. Start off with a blank slate.

    By approaching a place, subject matter or project with an open mind, you open up more possibilities. You also get a deeper glimpse into another reality of a place that you might not have known existed.

    In fact, being ignorant is a gift. Lange explains:

    “The best way to go into an unknown territory is to go in ignorant, ignorant as possible, with your mind wide open, as wide open as possible and not having to meet anyone else’s requirement but my own.” – Dorothea Lange

    Garry Winogrand also tried to enter the streets without any preconceived notions. He simply documented what he saw and perceived before his very eyes:

    “I don’t have anything to say in any picture. My only interest in photography is to see what something looks like as a photograph. I have no preconceptions.” – Garry Winogrand

    Assignment : Reset your mind

    For this assignment enter a certain neighborhood in your city that you know a lot about. Perhaps it is known as the “posh” or the “ghetto” part of town.

    But enter that place and manually reset your mind. Wipe it clear of any preconceived notions you may have. Then simply document what you see before your eyes without any preconceived notions. See what kinds of images or scenes will come to you, without your filter of preconceptions blinding you.

    This also means the next time you travel to a foreign city, try not to look at too many photos of that place by other photographers. This will allow you to document your version of reality rather than simply copying what you’ve seen before.

    For example, every photographer who goes to India is highly influences by the vivid portraits or Steve McCurry. Therefore many photos shot in India are simply weak attempts to repeat what Steve McCurry has already done. But our job as a photographer is to try to pave new ground, and go somewhere nobody else has gone before.

    Lesson #51: Time is your ultimate resource

    “The important thing is management of time, because there’s so much going around. There’s so many things happening that take your concentration away from things that you want to be doing. What I want to be doing is taking pictures. Management of time becomes more complicated as your photographic life gets complicated.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Time is the ultimate non-renewable resource that we have in our lives. In theory if we lose $100, we can easily earn another $100 down the line. But if we lose a year of our life, no matter how rich we are, we cannot buy another year of life.

    Life is a ticking death clock, with each day subtracting time from us. Once we’ve lost time we can never gain it back.

    Know that as a photographer your ultimate resource is time. It is ironic that a lot of people trade their time for money, where in actuality we should trade our money to have more time.

    As a thought experiment what would you prefer: to spend 3 months working and saving up money to buy a new camera? Or would you rather spend 3 months working and saving up money for a vacation so you don’t have to work for perhaps 6 months in southeast Asia?

    Many photographers complain that they don’t have enough time to shoot. It isn’t that we don’t have enough time but we just spend it wastefully. Instead of spending time going out to shoot during our lunch breaks, we sit in front of a computer to answer a few more (unimportant) emails. Instead of shooting after work, we rush home to watch Netflix. Instead of having a part time job that would give us more time to shoot, we put in extra hours in the office to earn a raise, to earn more money, and to buy more material things we don’t need.

    Assignment : What if you were to did tomorrow?

    To vividly imagine time as a ticking death clock, imagine if you were to die tomorrow. How would you live your life as a photographer differently today? What kind of extraneous things would you cut out of your schedule? Would you really watch that episode of Game of Thrones, read that gossip magazine, go to a networking event full of people you don’t really care about or waste time lusting after a camera you don’t really need?

    I can guarantee if you were to die tomorrow, you would spend your time more wisely to shoot what is important to you.

    Lesson #52: Stage your photos for a greater purpose

    “I don’t object to staging if and only if I feel that it is an intensification of something that is absolutely authentic to the place.” – W. Eugene Smith

    In photography (especially street photography) there is a general scorn against posing photos. Photos which are posed don’t feel as authentic or real. We romanticize candid and unposed moments.

    However ultimately photos are just reflections of light against a piece of paper. Photos don’t show any “truth” or ultimate “reality” of the world. Photos are just tools to communicate some sort of message or emotion to the viewer.

    W Eugene Smith was one of the most prolific and passionate photographers who have ever lived. He had no objections to posing images, as long as he felt that they intensified some sort of “authenticity” he perceived in a scene.

    Furthermore, Smith felt that arranging scenes wasn’t dishonest, as long as he personally felt that it was legitimate. He trusted his intuition and feelings, and his own ability to understand as he explains:

    “I ask and arrange if I feel it is legitimate. The honesty lies in my — the photographer’s — ability to understand.” – W. Eugene Smith

    Assignment : Direct your subject

    The next time you see a stranger on the streets with a certain emotion or mood you want to convey, ask them to pose for you in a certain way.

    For example, if you want them to look contemplative, ask them to put their finger on their chin and look down. If you want them to look hopeful, ask them to look up.

    Try to pose or stage the scene, and disregard the concept of “candidness.” A posed photograph, as long as it evokes some sort of genuine emotion is authentic.

    Lesson #53: Discover projects after you shoot

    “My obsession is with making photographs. I generally do not have a theme when in the act of photographing. Themes emerge after the photographs begin to accumulate. This happened in a clear way with my new book and exhibition Twirl / Run. For me picture taking is pure instinct. Gut. That is why I love doing it. I’m not thinking when I am working.” – Jeff Mermelstein

    Jeff Mermelstein is probably one of the most focused and intense contemporary street photographers. He has made several photography books, one of them titled “Twirl / Run”, which is a compilation of street photos he shot of women twirling their hair and of people running.

    Working on street photography projects can be very challenging if you have too rigid of a concept before you go out and shoot. This can make your mind rigid to new opportunities.

    So as an approach you can intentionally go out without a theme in mind. Then as time goes on you become to discover a theme as you go.

    Simply react to what you see, and then you can compile your projects or series later. Elliott Erwitt follows the same way of working and explains:

    “I don’t start out with any specific interests, I just react to what I see. I don’t know that I set out to take pictures of dogs; I have a lot of pictures of people and quite a few of cats. But dogs seem to be more sympathetic.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Elliott Erwitt has shot for many decades, and after compiling thousands of images, he discovers common threads and themes in his work. Now towards the later part of his life, he is compiling his images into books of certain subject matter and places.

    Helen Levitt, one of the pioneers of color street photography also rebelled against the notion of having a “project,” she simply photographed what she noticed:

    “I never had a ‘project.’ I would go out and shoot, follow my eyes—what they noticed, I tried to capture with my camera, for others to see.” – Helen Levitt

    Another way to discover what kinds of projects to pursue in your photography is to print out your photos and start sorting them into different boxes. Once the boxes start to fill up, you’ve got a project as Lee Friedlander explains:

    “I just work and I throw the pictures in a box that says “X” or whatever, and eventually if the box gets full it merits looking at. I often work on two or three or four of those things at once. People tell me that they all look like they’ve been well thought out, and that’s because I’ve worked on them for so long.” – Lee Friedlander

    Assignment : find a common theme or pattern in your work

    If you feel that you don’t have a direction or focus in your work, go to your entire catalogue of images and start to look for patterns or themes in your work.

    What you can do is look at all your photos, and start to categorize and apply tags to your images. Then after going through your body of work, you can start to count which tags or categories you have a lot of photos.

    This process might cause you to discover that there is a certain part of town you are really drawn to. Perhaps you will discover that the majority of the work you prefer is in color. Perhaps this can help you discover that you love taking “street portraits.”

    Also by analyzing your metadata in your catalogue of images, you can see which cameras, lenses, or focal lengths you use the most. If you find there is a certain camera and lens you use 90% of the time perhaps you should stick with it and be consistent with it.

    Lesson #54: Improve a little everyday

    “Without instruction, at a very early age, I could play the piano. Anything, particularly—after hearing it once. Not reading music. I would pass a quite fine piano in my house everytime we came from the back from the front—and everytime I would pass it I would play a few things, and without any success at all. And I got a little better and better, and time went on. And maybe never playing the same one twice. It aint much different the way I work today, still [in photography].” – William Eggleston

    It is easy to look at a body of work by an accomplished master photographer and feel that no matter how hard we work, we can never achieve as much as that photographer.

    But realize that the journey of a thousand steps begins with the first step. If you want to create a body of work in photography, you need to start off with a single photograph.

    If you want to improve your photography, just aim to become slightly a better photographer everyday. Simply aim to improve your photography by 1% everyday. You can improve your photography by taking more photos, studying master photographers, or analyzing photography books.

    By improving 1% everyday, you will see huge compounded interest in the course of a year.

    Great bodies of work take time. We need to be patient. Zen Master Hakuin explains below:

    “It’s like chopping down a huge tree of immense girth. You won’t accomplish it with one swing of your axe. If you keep chopping away at it, though, and do not let up, eventually, whether it wants to or not, it will suddenly topple down…But if the woodcutter stopped after one or two strokes of his axe to ask, ‘Why doesn’t this tree fall?’ and after three or four more strokes stopped again, ‘Why doesn’t this tree fall?’ he would never succeed in felling the tree. It is no different from someone who is practicing the Way.”

    Assignment: take at least 1 photograph everyday

    One thing I read about physical fitness is that it is hard to overcome the mental block of going to the gym everyday. What is a lot more realistic? Just doing 1 pushup everyday. When you go on the ground to do 1 pushup, you will find it is easy to do 5, 10, perhaps even 20 pushups. And if you aim to do at least 1 pushup everyday, in the course of just a month you can become quite fit.

    Similarly in your photography, aim to take just 1 photograph a day. Not every photograph you take everyday is going to be a good shot. But it is a good practice that keeps your eye sharp, and your trigger finger well greased and lubricated. And if you aim to just make 1 photo a day, that might lead you to making 5, 10, 20 or even more photos.

    Then compound that over the course of a week, a month, a year, and a decade, and before you know it, you will have an incredible body of work in photography.

    Lesson #55: Make something extraordinary from the ordinary

    “I think it’s exciting to make something extraordinary out of the banal. I’m not the kind of photographer that needs to travel to take pictures. I am not saying that there aren’t extraordinary images being made in Gaza and sometimes I wonder I should go to Gaza. But I’d probably get sick and be scared. I don’t want it. I’m comfortable, I’m not drawn to bullets. I’m not drawn to danger.” – Jeff Mermelstein

    One of the great things about street photography is that we don’t need to live in a super exotic or interesting place to make good photos. The beauty of street photography is to make powerful images from the ordinary and mundane.

    But what if you live in a really boring place, and you can’t see any beauty? Start off by taking photos of “ugly stuff”, as Rosa Eggleston (the wife of William Eggleston) shares:

    “Bill at one time said to his great, highly respected friend: ‘Well, what am I going to photograph? Everything here is so ugly.’ And our friend said, ‘Photograph the ugly stuff.’ Well we were surrounded everywhere by this plethora of shopping centers and ugly stuff. And that is really initially what he started photographing.”

    Then over the course of several decades, William Eggleston made an incredible body of work of pretty mundane and boring scenes. His city Memphis isn’t New York City, but he has really made his banal city beautiful.

    Photographer Joel Meyerowitz also agreed that the most beautiful art often comes from the ordinary of everyday life:

    “Why is it that the best poetry comes out of the most ordinary circumstances? You don’t have to have extreme beauty to write beautifully. You don’t have to have grand subject matter. I don’t need the Parthenon. This little dinky bungalow is my Parthenon. It has scale; it has color; it has presence; it is real: I’m not trying to work with grandeur. I’m trying to work with ordinariness. I’m trying to find what spirits me away. Ordinary things. – What did I say when I drove by those bungalows—something about the lives lived in them?” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Embrace the plain, boring, mundane. Don’t strive to create high-brow “art”. Just document ordinary things as a photographer:

    “Forty years ago when I was going around with a camera I was doing some things that I myself thought were too plain to be works of art. I began to wonder – I knew I was an artist or wanted to be one – but I was wondering whether I really was an artist. I was doing such ordinary things that I could feel the difference. But I didn’t have any support. Most people would look at those things and say, “Well, that’s nothing. What did you do that for? That’s just a wreck of a car or a wreck of a man. That’s nothing. That isn’t art.” They don’t say that anymore.” – Walker Evans

    Assignment : Make something ugly into something beautiful

    For this assignment, go out and intentionally look for ugly things to photograph. The uglier and more ordinary, the better.

    Now your job is to make that ugly thing interesting or beautiful. How could you do that? Perhaps wait until the light turns good (sunset). Maybe try to use a flash. Maybe try a diagonal composition. Perhaps try to get a good angle or try shooting it in black and white.

    When you realize you can turn the ugly, boring, and banal into beautiful and interesting photos, this will liberate you.

    Lesson #56: Don’t see your photos as art

    “I don’t think of my photos as works of art—I see them as a fraction of a second in which my understanding and the worlds offering are unified in some way. That allows us to have some sort of open experience to share with whoever happens to look at the photo. So it isn’t formal, it is more experiential.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Pretentiousness is what often blocks or obstructs many photographers. If you want to create more inspired images, don’t force yourself to create “art.” If you start thinking that your work has to be “Art” with a capital A, you will put unnecessary pressure on yourself, which can actually prevent you from creating beautiful photographs which can be considered as “art.”

    Also by not thinking of your work as art, you can be more open to experimentation and failing and tying out different things for fun.

    Assignment : Self depreciating humor

    If you feel too much pressure to create good images, give yourself some compassion through self depreciating humor (making fun of your own photos).

    Start referring to your images just as snapshots, and don’t take them too seriously. Don’t take yourself seriously either. Don’t call yourself a “photographer” or “artist.” Just consider yourself as somebody who is curious and fascinated with the world, and happens to like to make images.

    This mode of thinking will ultimately liberate you, and help you create more inspired “art” in the long run.

    Lesson #57: Constantly question yourself

    “It’s me asking myself: ‘How interesting is this medium? And how interesting can I make it for me? And, by the way, who the fuck am I?‘” – Joel Meyerowitz

    It can be painful to feel lost and confused in our photography. But don’t fret, this is absolutely normal. Even the master photographers constantly grapple with these questions.

    Photography is often a form of self discovery. And the more questions you ask yourself and the more you analyze your intentions in photography, the more you will grow, and the more you will become focused in your work.

    Joel Meyerowitz, who was one of the most influential pioneers in color photographs even admits that he hasn’t found the definitive answer for himself yet: “No, not yet [smiling], and time is running out. But I’m getting there.”

    Assignment: Everyday question yourself

    If you feel lost in your photography, and feel you don’t have direction or purpose, keep a journal in which you answer the prompt: “Why do I photograph?” on a daily basis. The more you self reflect, the more clarity you will give yourself and the more focus and meaning you will give your work.

    Lesson #58: Feel emotions in color

    “Color plays itself out along a richer band of feelings—more wavelengths, more radiance, more sensation. I wanted to se more and experience more feelings from a photograph, and I wanted bigger images that would describe things more fully, more cohesively. Slow-speed color film provided that.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Shooting color isn’t just purely for decorative purposes. Shooting color reveals a deeper psychological depth and emotions in a scene.

    Joel Meyerowitz explains the importance of how colors can evoke feelings, memories, and certain life experiences:

    “A color photograph gives you a chance to study and remember how things look and feel in color. It enables you to have feelings along the full wavelength of the spectrum, to retrieve emotions that were perhaps bred in you from infancy—from the warmth and pinkness of your mother’s breast, the loving brown of you puppy’s face, and the friendly yellow of your pudding. Color is always part of experience. Grass is green, not gray; flesh is color, not gray. Black and white is a very cultivated response.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Whether you decide to shoot color or black and white realize that you have control over your palette:

    “A photographer must choose a palette as painters choose theirs.” – Joel Sternfeld

    Joel Sternfeld, another pioneer in color photography also shares the challenge of color, which is how to abstract reality:

    “Black and white is abstract; color is not. Looking at a black and white photograph, you are already looking at a strange world. Color is the real world. The job of the color photographer is to provide some level of abstraction that can take the image out of the daily.” – Joel Sternfeld

    Assignment : Photograph a color and mood

    Colors are primarily split into two categories: warm and cool colors. Warm colors include red, yellow, orange, brown, and other colors that evokes warmth, sunsets, heat, passion, and love. Cool colors include blue, green, violet, which evokes the color of water, tranquility, peace, and nature.

    One of the strongest colors is red, as it mimics the color of blood. The color red psychologically draws us. We think about death, passion, life, fire and energy.

    So for this assignment choose a specific color you’re drawn to, but also think about the psychology of that color. What kind of emotions do that certain color provoke? Keep this in mind and shoot while trying to match the mood and colors of a scene.

    Lesson #59: Always have a camera with you

    “I carry [the 8×10 camera] with me as I would carry a 35mm camera. In the very beginning, if I went for a drive or to the A&P, the camera was in the back seat of the car; if I went for a walk down the street to visit a neighbor, or if I went to the beach, the camera was on my shoulder. No matter where I went, that camera was ever-present: parties, walks, shopping. It came from the discipline of carrying a 35mm at all times—in the early years you never saw me without a camera. I didn’t want to be in that position of saying, “Oh I saw a great shot, if only I had my camera.” At that time no photographer was without a camera. We got that from Henri Cartier-Bresson’s being ready for “the decisive moment,” and from Robert Frank’s traveling everywhere in America and making pictures of the Americans that seemed to occur in the most unexpected moments. Since my discipline was always to carry a camera, it didn’t matter that when the size changed it became big and awkward; I still wanted to have it at all times. So I provided myself with the opportunity of making large-scale, highly detailed photographs of unusual moments.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Have you ever seen a great potential photograph, but you didn’t have your camera with you? It has happened to all of us at least once.

    I think one of the best disciplines that a photographer can have is always have a camera with him or her. I don’t necessarily feel that a photographer must take a photograph everyday (unless you want to), but the peace of mind of always having a camera on you (just in case) is wonderful.

    Most people in the western world have smartphones, with more than capable cameras. So if you find yourself without your main camera, know you can always use your smartphone camera. It is better to shoot a scene with a smartphone camera than not take a photograph at all.

    Assignment : Always have your camera with you

    So as an assignment (or better yet, as a way of life), always have a camera with you. Bring your camera to the most mundane situations like going to the grocery store, going to the tax office, dropping off mail, visiting a friend for dinner.

    Bonus points if you always have your camera around your neck or hand. I find when I am physically holding a camera I see more photography opportunities.

    Lesson #60: Make books

    “Before I lay out a book, I read the pictures many many times, until I’ve absorbed the so-called meaning of each picture. My feeling about it – not intellectually, but my gut feeling about these pictures and how I relate to them, and then I just collect them all as miniatures, at three inches across, and I carry them with me like a deck of cards, and I lay them out, everytime I have a few minutes, I lay them out – I’m doing it now, for this next book – I lay them out and look and look, and then I’ll see something that looks like a starting point. So I’ll put that picture first, and then I’ll see what happens. What does it call, like magnetism, to itself? And what do these two call themselves, and what do these three call? Because it’s not just about the next picture, it’s the weight of the three of them in a row. Five of them in a row. Ten! I can set-up certain rhythms or cadences, so that when you get to the third or fourth picture, you begin to realize the first picture again, like, ‘oh yeah, the first and fourth are linked!’ And there are these links so that if you were to make a drawing of this book, if there were forty pictures – I could probably make a diagram that comes after the fact, not before the fact, that the first connects to the fourth and the tenth and on and on – and that there are these interconnections. It’d be a fun thing to do, actually!” – Joel Meyerowitz

    I feel that every photographer should aim to make at least 1 personally meaningful book in his or her lifetime. Why? A book can last decades, centuries, or perhaps even millenia (if well stored). A digital photograph on Instagram on your hard drive? Who knows how long that will be accessible (do you remember floppy or hard disks?)

    Also seeing your photos printed out in a book is a unique experience. It is a unique way of looking at your images which more tangible, real, and personal. Furthermore, a book allows you to pair, sequence, and arrange images in novel and flexible ways.

    You don’t need to get your books printed by some fancy publisher. Nowadays there are many great print on demand services like Blurb which give you high quality photo books without having to print 1,000s of them.

    So if you have no experience putting together a photography book, where do you start? You can start off by dissecting your favorite photography books from other photographers. Joel Meyerowitz gives some advice below:

    “You should take your favorite book and take it apart that way and see why it works that way. What is it about the rhythm of these pictures that make you see it as a book, rather than a collection of pictures. I think, too many photographers make books that are just collections of pictures. You could throw them together any way and they’d be alright. And there are other photographers that make books that are works of art, as a book.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Lee Friedlander also shares the joy of the process of putting together books:

    “I like making books… I realise that the nature of photography is such that I can’t see everything on first look, because photography has this ability to deal so well with information. There’s so much information in a picture that often I don’t see until the fifth reading or 30 years later.I can pick up Walker’s book American Photographs today and see something I never saw before – and I’ve owned that book for over 30 years. So I think that books are a great medium for photography. They seem to be the best. I can go back and re-read things – ‘Oh shit, I didn’t see that before’.” – Lee Friedlander

    Assignment : make a “zine”

    Photography magazines or “zines” are rising in popularity. The concept that it is a printed collection of your images, that isn’t as expensive as a hardcover photography book. This makes it easier for you to print, distribute, at a fraction of the price of a traditional photography book.

    Start off by making a “zine” of around 15 images. Think of some sort of concept or theme and compile your images together.

    Experiment, have fun, and in the long run aspire to also make a “proper” photography book.

    Lesson #61: Create relationships in your frame

    “I believe that recognition and the power of the frame to put disparate, unrelated things together—suddenly this guy who was going on his business doing all this stuff and this woman with her poodle—they have no knowledge of each other. But in your frame, it is context.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    One way to make stronger images is to put together unrelated things into a frame, which create a sense of juxtaposition, contrast, and context.

    For example if you’re out shooting street photography and you identify one interesting thing going on, see if you can add another element of interest to make the frame more complex.

    Joel Meyerowitz continues on the point of making relationships in his photos:

    “I’m going to go on record here—when I think about my photographs, I understand that my interest all along has not been in identifying a singular thing. But in photographing the relationship between things. The unspoken relationships, the tacit relationship—all of these variables are there if you choose to see in this way. But if you choose to only make objects out of singular things you will end up shooting the arrow into the bull’s-eye all the time, and you will get copies of objects in space.”

    It us only through comparison, analogy, similarities, and differences can we create meaning. Without sadness we couldn’t have joy. Without dark we couldn’t have light. Without man we couldn’t have woman.

    Much of street photography is to also show the hidden drama of everyday life. So if you’re able to make photos that show this tension between happiness and sorrow, hope and despair, old age versus youth in a single frame, you’re connecting with the viewer. Also by capturing these relationships in your photos, you’re also acknowledging your own humanity, as Meyerowitz continues:

    “I didn’t want copies of objects—I wanted the ephemeral connections between unrelated things to vibrate. And if my pictures work at all, at their best—they are suggesting these tenuous relationships. And that fragility is what is so human about them. And I think its what is in the ‘romantic tradition’—it is a form of humanism that says we’re all part of this together. I’m not just a selector of objects.

    Assignment: Juxtapose two unrelated things in a single frame

    If you’re not familiar with the term “juxtaposition”, it is essentially a fancy word which means contrast. It is when you put two different things or concepts together (side by side) that directly contrast or contradict one another, yet there is some sort of relationship.

    For example a great juxtaposition in a photograph would include a young kid next to an old man, a tall person next to a short person, a person with a dark complexion next to a person with light complexion.

    So for this assignment put together two people in a single frame whom directly juxtapose one another. Sometimes this takes patience; you start off by identifying a single subject you find interesting, and you wait until someone else walks into the frame.

    Seek to find these juxtapositions and relationships in your frame to create and capture more of the human drama.

    Lesson #62: Pave your own path

    “I was enthralled by Eggleston, as everybody was. But I knew if I was ever to make a mark, I’d have to go to places he hadn’t headed. He owned the poetic snapshot, but I’d always had this leaning towards narrative, and so I began to lean a little harder.” – Joel Sternfeld

    When learning photography, it is always great to study the work of the masters. The masters have put in decades of work, and have dedicated their lives to photography and their craft.

    We can gain a lot of inspiration from them but we should consider us more of our guides, rather than trying to follow them blindly and duplicate them.

    For example when Joel Sternfeld started shooting, he was greatly inspired by the color photography of William Eggleston (as were many other photographers). But Sternfeld knew that if he wanted to make his mark in the world of photography, he needed to go down his own path and road.

    Assignment: Creatively Isolate yourself

    I think it is useful to study the theory and philosophy of photography from the masters, but only up to a certain point. If you want to truly find your voice, you need to isolate yourself for a while to really focus on your own work (without getting distracted by the work of others).

    So for this assignment, you’re going to intentionally creatively isolate yourself. For an entire month, don’t look at any other photos from other photographers, nor read their philosophies. Try abstain from consuming images on social media. Uninstall Instagram and Facebook from your phone for a month.

    For that month, try to create images without the outside influence of others. Of course all the accumulated inspirations of the past will seep into your work. But slowly try to isolate yourself during this month, and see what kind of work emerges from your work, organically and fluidly.

    Let your own voice emerge. It might start off as quiet but the more you shut up outside voices, the more you can hear it.

    Lesson #63: Learn where to stand (cut?)

    “The question of where to stand is interesting. What we’re really talking about is a vantage point. If you look at amateurs or people taking pictures, they do funny things. Most people obviously don’t know where to stand. They’re standing too close, they’re contorted.” – Lee Friedlander

    One of the lessons I learned from Magnum photographer David Hurn is that the two main things you control in photography is where to stand (your position) and when to click the shutter (your timing). Lee Friedlander shares the importance of your position, and knowing where to stand when hitting the shutter:

    “You don’t have to be a fancy photographer to learn where to stand. Basically you’re stuck with the frame and just like the person taking a picture of his family, who needs to go half a foot back – well, he doesn’t step half a foot back—but on the other hand, he knows where to be if he hits it right.” – Lee Friedlander

    You don’t need an expensive camera or equipment to know where to stand. Sometimes all you need to do to make a better photo is to take a step forward or backwards.

    Lesson #64: Stick with one camera for a long time

    “They’re humorous to watch, people who photograph, especially people who aren’t in tune with their equipment, because they don’t know when they pick it up what it will do. If you work with the same equipment for a very long time, you will get more in tune to what is possible. But within that there are still surprises. But using a camera day after day after day, within a framework, I’ll do the same thing. I’ll back up and I’ll go forward with my body.” – Lee Friedlander

    In today’s society we are plagued by the disease of “G.A.S” (Gear Acquisition Syndrome). The concept is that when we are dissatisfied with our photography (or don’t feel inspired), we wrongly believe that buying new cameras, lenses, or equipment will make us more creative or inspired.

    However in reality what ends up happening is that we waste our valuable money, flit from one camera system to the next, trying to find the “perfect” camera for our needs.

    The reality? No perfect camera exists. With every upside there is a downside. Not only that but because there are so many cameras out there, we never get really comfortable with one system.

    Personally it has taken me a long time before I settled down shooting with my film Leica and 35mm lens. Furthermore, I found the more cameras and lenses I owned the more stressed out I was. Before going out to shoot, I wouldn’t know which camera to use. I fell victim to “paralysis by analysis” and having too many choices hurt me.

    The solution? One camera and one lens. With only one camera and one lens, the benefit is there is no stress. You know exactly which camera and lens to take to shoot because you have no other options. This is another “creative constraint” that will help your vision as a photographer.

    Not only that, but when you stick with one camera and lens for a long time, you get to know the camera inside and out. You can change the controls of the camera without even thinking about it. You know all the buttons, dials, and how much to twist the focusing tab of your lens for a certain distance. You begin to worry less about technical settings and more about making the images you want.

    Assignment : One camera, one lens

    For this assignment you are to stick with one camera, one lens, and one film (or style of post processing if you shoot digital) for a year. If you own other cameras, either sell them, give them away, or lock them in a cupboard (give the key to someone you trust).

    You will find that you will have more consistent looking images, you will make fewer excuses in your photography, you will have less stress in your photography, and will ultimately make more photos.

    Lesson #65: Expect to be disappointed

    “It’s generally rather depressing to look at my contacts– one always has great expectations, and they’re not always fulfilled.” – Elliott Erwitt

    No matter how good you are in photography, expect to be disappointed. Even the masters of photography are often disappointed when they’re looking through their photos.

    “I hate looking at my work. I delay it for as long as possible… I just know that it won’t live up to my own expectations.” – David Alan Harvey

    But don’t be disappointed at being disappointed. Rather know that your disappointment comes from the fact that you have high expectations for yourself. If you had low expectations for yourself, you would never be disappointed.

    I think in photography it is important to have high expectations. If you set your mark high, even if you miss, you still achieve a higher caliber of work.

    However learning from your mistakes can be the best instructor, as David Hurn explains:

    “The contact sheet is a valuable instructor. Presumably, when a photographer releases the shutter, it is become he believes the image worthwhile. It rarely is. If the photographer is self-crucial, he can attempt to analyze the reasons for the gap between expectation and actuality. How does one think? Could the image be improved by moving backwards or forwards, by moving to the right or left? What would have been the result if the shutter were released a moment earlier or later? Ruthless examination of the contact sheet, whether one’s own or another’s , is one of the best teaching methods.” – David Hurn

    Assignment: Learn from your mistakes

    We learn more from our mistakes than our successes in photography. So don’t look at your failed photos with disappointment. Rather, look at your failed photographs as your most valuable teachers.

    When looking at your failed photos, ask yourself what didn’t work out. Were you too far away from your subject? Did you fail to fill the frame? Was the light poor? Did you not crouch enough? Should you have taken a step closer? Should you have taken a step to the left or right? Did you click the shutter a second too soon or late?

    As long as you keep learning from your mistakes, you are on your way to mastering your photography.

    Lesson #66: On digital vs film

    “The workload with digital has certainly doubled with fieldwork. You have now to photograph, edit and send your images on the same day. You go back to your car or hotel room to download, caption and transmit your work. It’s much more immediate and it becomes much more difficult to revisit the work.” – Paolo Pellegrin

    Digital photography is one of the greatest blessings in photography. It has helped democratize photography to the masses. With digital photography, we can learn a lot quicker from our mistakes.

    However there of course is downsides to digital photography. With digital photography, sometimes we feel too rushed to share our images. Other times, it is difficult to revisit our work after letting our images “marinate.” Digital photography can also cut out some of the collaborative process:

    “Digital photography can permit greater sharing in the field, but cuts out collectively at the other end. Fewer people share the whole process. It used to be that you sent raw film in and often the Magnum editorial or another photographer would take a look at the contacts.” – Susan Meiselas

    Not only that but the LCD screen is a blessing and a curse. One of the downsides of being able to see your images immediately is that you are given a false sense of certainty. Not seeing your photos on film made you work harder to get the image because the process was more uncertain:

    “I still think not knowing what you ‘have’ at the end of the day with film gives strength of the intensity when you work. It is a mystery and surprise. Now everyone spends more time looking at their screens, first on the camera and then the computer.” – Susan Meiselas

    Gilles Peress also shares how with digital it is harder to reflect at the end of the day after a full day of shooting:

    “With film you kept track in your head of what you were shooting, and evenings could be spent on a mental recap of the work you had made: the technical demands of digital editing in the field, at their worst, mean ‘less reflection, less intelligence, less thinking time‘. – Gilles Peress

    Assignment : Shoot film

    I think ultimately it doesn’t matter whether you shoot film or digital. There is not one “superior” format; they’re just different.

    But if you have never shot film before, try it out. Just buy the cheapest film camera you can buy, some cheap film, and go out and shoot 20 rolls, and get them developed and scanned some local lab (many pharmacies and drugstores still process color film).

    Reflect on how the process of shooting film is different from digital. Then ultimately take those lessons and apply it to your digital photography. Or perhaps you can just end up sticking with film (or shooting both film and digital).

    What you will find with film is that it will teach you patience, appreciation of images, the enjoyment of the slower process, and the excitement and joy of finally seeing your images after a long time.

    Lesson #67: Kill your babies

    “I am a tough editor of my work, and usually when I look at my contacts I find that I can go as many as fifty rolls without getting a good photo.” – Bruce Gilden

    Editing (choosing your best images) is one of the most important things in photography. The problem is nowadays “editing” is used interchangeably with “post processing.” So when many photographers say that they’re going to go home and “edit” their shots, what they really mean is that they’re going to go home and post-process their photos.

    What is the problem with this? The issue is that there is much more emphasis on post processing images (rather than having the discipline of choosing only your best photos). What ends up happening is that you think that post processing a so-so photo will suddenly make it better. But no amount of post processing can make a mediocre photo into a great photo.

    Know that photography is hard, especially street photography. Bruce Gilden admits that sometimes he has to shoot 50 rolls of film (1,800 images) before he gets a photo he likes.

    But choosing your best shots is one of the most difficult decisions, especially when we shoot many photos of the same scene. The difficulty is that ultimately, you can only choose one image to represent your vision:

    “It can be difficult to make a decision because you can like this frame for this reason, and that frame for that reason. Each photograph has its particular strength. But you only pick one. One has to represent all. So I am always trying to put everything into one image: the statement, the foundation, the composition, the story, the individual personality – all of that together into one image…” Leonard Freed

    So how do we best edit our photos? Part of it is following your gut:

    “Over three or four days I shot something like forty rolls of film. When I edit, I go for a gut, instinctual feeling. I started editing when I got the film back a day or two after I returned to the states. You are so aware of what you saw; the experiences that reflect in your mind. You don’ really forget the people and what they are going through. So I wanted to work on it immediately. Like anything else, when you’re trying to put down what you witnessed, you go for the pictures that speak to you.” – Eli Reed

    Another way is to edit your images is by listening to your heart and feelings:

    “When I look at a contact sheet, I try to remember the feeling I had when I took the frame. The memory of feeling helps me edit. Art for me is really simple. It’s when a feeling overcomes you and you convey your feeling with symbols. In photography the symbols are the thing itself.” – Larry Towell

    Sometimes when you’re looking through your images, there are some that simply “jump off the page”:

    “When I look at a contact sheet, I go in order from no 1 to no 36. I mark the ones I like, and unless something really jumps off the page at me, I go over them again to see which is the best one. With my personal work, I only print what I think is good. When something jumps off the page, it’s easy”. – Bruce Gilden

    Another practical piece of advice: ask yourself what you are trying to communicate through your photos, and what they are really about:

    “During the four years I spent making The Shipping Forecast I exposed nearly 1,200 rolls of film, which amounts to 14,000 individual pictures. Editing this down to a manageable number was a major exercise. I had advice from several people whose opinion I respected, but this only served to confuse me more. So instead I asked myself what the work was really about, and the answer was far clearer: it was about my childhood. In the end, The Shipping Forecast doesn’t depend on outstanding individual pictures, but instead on its collective strength.” – Mark Power

    It is often hard to edit your images just by yourself. Having outside opinions and advice can greatly help the process. Mary Ellen Mark trusts the opinions of those close to her:

    “Then I ask my husband or Teri who works for me in New York, to also look through the contact sheets and to pick the ones they like. It always helps to have an outside opinion. You are so close and so personally involved with your work, it’s hard to separate yourself from it and see it objectively.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    Assignment: Kill your babies

    The problem with editing our own images is that we are often too emotionally attached to them. Sometimes the memory of taking certain shots is so vivid that we think a shot is good. We treat our images like our children, and if you know anyone with ugly children you know, we think all of our children are beautiful.

    But realize your photos aren’t your babies or children. They’re just photographs. So you need to learn how to “kill your babies.”

    There are many ways to kill your babies. You can first off ask people you trust to be brutally honest with you. You can show people certain shots you’re unsure of and simply ask them: “Keep or ditch?”, then ask them to explain why.

    You can also let your photos marinate and sit for a long time before looking at them. This makes you forget having taken the shot, so it’s almost like you’re killing someone else’s babies (which is always easier). Garry Winogrand famously wouldn’t process his photos for a year after he shot it to totally emotionally disconnect himself with his images, and to forget the photos he shot.

    You don’t have to wait an entire year, but I do advise for you to at least sit on your photos for a week before looking at them. This gives you enough distance with your photos which can help you make more objective decisions when editing your shots.

    Lesson #68: Milk the cow, a lot

    “Sometimes you need to milk the cow a lot to get a little bit of cheese.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    It is rare that you make a good photo. It is also rare that you find scenes that you find very interesting.

    If you happen to be lucky enough to stumble upon an interesting scene, learn to “work the scene” and take as many photos of the scene as humanly possible. Know that especially in street photography, once you see a scene, you will never see it again.

    There is a common misconception that Henri Cartier-Bresson (who coined “the decisive moment”) would only take one shot of a scene. In reality, he took many photos of a scene, and would select” the decisive moment” after the fact.

    Even if you shoot film, don’t feel bad shooting an entire roll for just one image, as Elliott Erwitt did for one of his most famous images of a bulldog sitting on a man’s lap:

    “I was out walking with my friend Hiroji Kubota around the corner from my studio on the upper west side of Manhattan, and i didn’t have my camera. I saw the situation and i said, “Could I borrow your camera?” And I borrowed his Leica. He was very generous and let me use it and I shot the whole roll of film on it.” [..] “Its a lot of pictures getting to the good one.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Assignment : The 1,000 photo challenge

    If you find yourself having a hard time to “work the scene” and you only typically shoot one or two photos of a scene, this assignment will help loosen your trigger finger.

    The idea is that in a day, you have to take at least 1,000 photos. Don’t just set your camera to burst mode and “spray and pray.” Rather, keep it in single shot mode and shoot intentionally, but a lot.

    I’m not saying you always have to shoot 1,000 photos a day, but rather this assignment will teach you to shoot more, and not be afraid to click the shutter more.

    Especially if you shoot digital, there is no downside to taking extra photos. The more you click the shutter the more likely you are to capture “the decisive moment.” Every time you click the shutter, it is like you are swinging the bat another time. As the more time you can swing the bat, the more likely you are to hit a home run.

    Lesson #69: Take photos for yourself

    “What was happening in Czechoslovakia concerned my life directly: it was my country, my problem. That’s what made the difference between me and the other photographers who came there from abroad. I was not a reporter. I didn’t know anything about photojournalism. I never photograph ‘news’. I photographed gypsies and theatre. Suddenly, for the first time in my life, I was confronted with that kind of situation, and I responded to it. I knew it was important to photograph, so I photographed. I took these pictures for myself, with no intention of publishing them”. – Josef Koudelka

    There are many photographers who make images hoping that they will get a lot of attention, acclaim, and “likes” on social media. But that is the wrong approach; you need to first start off by shooting for yourself.

    Shoot as if you will never show your photos to anybody. This will make your images much more authentic and personal:

    “Photograph because you love doing it, because you absolutely have to do it, because the chief reward is going to be the process of doing it. Other rewards — recognition, financial remuneration — come to so few and are so fleeting. And even if you are somewhat successful, there will almost inevitably be stretches of time when you will be ignored, have little income, or — often — both. Certainly there are many other easier ways to make a living in this society. Take photography on as a passion, not a career.” – Alex Webb

    Sometimes a lot of photographers pick up a camera as a hobby and because they love it. But then the idea of becoming a “professional” can taint their vision. Start off by taking photos for yourself; photos you care about. Then let everything follow as Christopher Anderson explains:

    “Forget about the profession of being a photographer. First be a photographer and maybe the profession will come after. Don’t be in a rush to make pay your rent with your camera. Jimi Hendrix didn’t decide on the career of professional musician before he learned to play guitar. No, he loved music and and created something beautiful and that THEN became a profession. Make the pictures you feel compelled to make and perhaps that will lead to a career. But if you try to make the career first, you will just make shitty pictures that you don’t care about.” – Christopher Anderson

    Only shoot photos what you feel like shooting, rather than what you think others will find interesting:

    “I think that I do what I feel like doing, which may not follow contemporary fashions but which comes spontaneously from the heart, the guts and the brain. To me, that’s what counts.“ – Richard Kalvar

    Assignment : Document your own life

    There is nobody who knows your life as intimately as you do.

    Sometimes it is hard to find a subject matter to document and photograph. So if you have no idea, just document your own life.

    Anders Petersen calls this “personal documentary”, that you photograph your own life instead of documenting the lives of others. This will open up a lot of doors for you, as you can photograph yourself (self portraits), your loved ones, and things you like to do.

    This way, photography becomes less of a forced project, and more of a lifestyle. You just take photos of your own life without stress and pressure.

    Take photos that you feel compelled to shoot for yourself. You are the ultimate filter in terms of knowing what you like and what you dislike.

    Disregard fame, attention and the concept of making “good photos.” Only by starting to please yourself that maybe one day you can also please others.

    Lesson #70: Photograph your own backyard

    “I just made my photos in Wilkes-Barre and a few other places because I wasn’t the kind of photographer who liked to, or needed to, travel around the world. That reminds me, I saw something you had said about how artistic range effects an artist’s development over time. And I work on an extremely narrow range, in terms of my method and technical issues, too. It’s what is in my head that has developed over time. So I’ve just kept taking pictures in the same two counties [Wilkes-Barre and Scranton].” – Mark Cohen

    It is always hard to shoot your own backyard. We become accustomed to our own neighborhood, and it is easy to become jaded.

    Mark Cohen is a great source of inspiration: he documented his own small town for several decades, and made interesting photographs. He didn’t need to be in NYC, Tokyo, or Paris. He made his own backyard his Paris.

    You can often find beauty in the most ordinary places, as Saul Leiter shares:

    “I never thought of the urban environment as isolating. I leave these speculations to others. It’s quite possible that my work represents a search for beauty in the most prosaic and ordinary places. One doesn’t have to be in some faraway dreamland in order to find beauty. I realize that the search for beauty is not highly popular these days. Agony, misery and wretchedness, now these are worth perusing.” – Saul Leiter

    Assignment: Shoot a boring place

    Find the most boring neighborhood in your city and try to make interesting photos there for a week. This will force you to think outside the box, and force you to work and see what can make a good photo.

    You will then discover your can make an interesting photograph regardless of where you are or live.

    Lesson #71: Make strong images that stand in their own

    “To be honest with you, I always try to think of the specific pictures. What’s important to me is to make strong, individual pictures. When I look at a documentary photographer or photojournalist whose work I really love- somebody like Eugene Smith-it’s because the images are single images. I think of his great picture stories as stories where the images really stood by themselves. In Life’s “Country Doctor,” for example, you remember each image. They weren’t only linking images -each one was strong, and each can stand alone. I think in great magazine or newspaper photography every picture can stand on its own; it doesn’t need the other pictures to support it to tell a story.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    One analogy I heard about writing is that instead of thinking of writing a “book”, try to write perfect paragraphs. Every time you write a perfect paragraph, you are making a pearl. And with enough pearls, you can connect them and make a beautiful pearl necklace.

    You can also apply the same thinking to your photos. Try to make each photograph into a perfect pearl. Make each photograph a strong one that can stand on its own, without any sort of caption or outside context.

    Also a strong single image is often universal, and can be appreciated by anybody, regardless of their culture, worldview, or age:

    “What I’m trying to do is make photographs that are universally understood, whether in China or Russia or America‑photographs that cross cultural lines. So if the project is about street performers, it touches those little things and whimsies we’re all interested in -animals and people and anthropomorphic qualities. If it’s about famine in Ethiopia, it’s about the human condition all over the world: It’s about people dying in the streets of New York as much as it’s about Ethiopia. I want my photographs to be about the basic emotions and feelings that we all experience.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    Assignment : Can a child appreciate your photo?

    A test to see if you can make a strong single image: show it to a child. Print it and show it to a child (10 years old). See if the photo catches their attention, and if they’re interesting. Children don’t bullshit or try to spare your feelings. Not only that but they are averse to boredom.

    Another thing you can do: share your photos with a friend (who doesn’t know much about photography) and ask them which photos they find interesting. Even somebody who isn’t educated in photos or art can generally distinguish between an interesting and boring photo.

    Lesson #72: Make universal images (cut)

    “What I’m trying to do is make photographs that are universally understood, whether in China or Russia or America‑photographs that cross cultural lines. So if the project is about street performers, it touches those little things and whimsies we’re all interested in -animals and people and anthropomorphic qualities. If it’s about famine in Ethiopia, it’s about the human condition all over the world: It’s about people dying in the streets of New York as much as it’s about Ethiopia. I want my photographs to be about the basic emotions and feelings that we all experience.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    Lesson #73: Your photo either works or doesn’t work

    “What counts is the result. It works or it doesn’t work. You may think after you’ve taken a picture that you may have something. And then you find out that you don’t have anything, that you almost had something but that in fact, you pressed the button at the wrong time. That you took a lot of pictures, but you were on auto-pilot – that instead of waiting, you shot buckshot at it, so you missed the one that might really work.” – Richard Kalvar

    It is common we make photos that “almost” work. But ultimately, a photo either works or it doesn’t work. There is no need to beat around the bush.

    If you didn’t get the shot right in camera, don’t think that excessive cropping, vignette adding, making it black and white, hdr, selective color, or post processing can salvage the image.

    The process of making photos is important, but know at the end of the day, the result of the photograph is the most important. You can have the most interesting backstory in terms of how you shot a scene, but if the result of the photograph isn’t interesting, nobody will care.

    So learn to be honest with yourself and your images. Be sincere to yourself; ask yourself, “Does this shot work, or not?”

    I have generally found with my photographs, if I have to hesitate whether I think works or not, it doesn’t work. Also when editing my photos, if a photograph is a “maybe”, it doesn’t work. The good photos you take generally tend to be quite obvious.

    Assignment: Yes or no

    When you are editing your photos, ask yourself: does this photo work, yes or no? If you need to hesitate, ditch the shot immediately.

    Lesson #74: Abstract reality

    “In order for the mystery to work, you need abstraction from reality. Black and white is an additional abstraction, in addition to selective framing, to the freezing of the moment that in reality is a part of an infinite number of other moments (you have one moment and it never moves again; you can keep looking at the picture forever). The black and white is one more step away from reality. Color, for me, is realer, but less interesting.” – Richard Kalvar

    Regular reality is boring. What the viewer is interested in seeing is the abstraction of reality, not reality itself. So think to yourself, when you are making photos, what is the extra layer that makes the image interesting?

    So how can we make reality more surreal and abstract? You can start off by trying to “lie with reality”, as Richard Kalvar explains:

    “That’s part of the magic of photography. Look at a picture and you have no idea what was going on. The only thing you can know is what’s visually depicted, and we all know photographers lie. That’s where the fun comes in. To be able to tell a lie with “reality” is a very tough trick.” – Richard Kalvar

    You don’t want to make your photos too obvious. You want the viewer to work hard to come up with his or her own interpretation of reality. You do this by adding mystery and removing context from your images:

    “As a photographer if your photos are too obvious then you’re missing the point. Photos are about mystery, about not knowing, about dreams, and the more you know about that—then you can recognize them on the street.” – Jason Eskenazi

    Another approach you can have in street photography is to try to create “little dramas” in your frame. You want to create little mini-stories in your images, and you want them to stay open ended. You want the viewer to come up with their own interpretation of the scene:

    “I’m trying to create little dramas that lead people to think, to feel, to dream, to fantasize, to smile… It’s more than just catching beautiful moments; I want to fascinate, to hypnotize, to move my viewers. Making greater statements about the world is not my thing. I think there’s a coherence in the work that comes not from an overriding philosophy but from a consistent way of looking and feeling.”- Richard Kalvar

    Assignment: What is going on?

    For this assignment, you want to make your viewer confused. Make a photograph as abstract and confusing as you can. Show it to your subject, and you will know if you are successful if they tilt their head, curl their eyebrows, as if they had a big question mark above their head.

    Then to take it a step further, try to take photos of street scenes where you have the viewer say, “What the fuck is going on?”

    Lesson #75: Make little dramas (cut)

    “I’m trying to create little dramas that lead people to think, to feel, to dream, to fantasize, to smile… It’s more than just catching beautiful moments; I want to fascinate, to hypnotize, to move my viewers. Making greater statements about the world is not my thing. I think there’s a coherence in the work that comes not from an overriding philosophy but from a consistent way of looking and feeling.”- Richard Kalvar

    Lesson #76: Capture your own “decisive moments”

    “Sometimes it happens that you stall, delay, wait for something to happen. Sometimes you have the feeling that here are all the makings of a picture – except for just one thing that seems to be missing. But what one thing? Perhaps someone suddenly walks into your range of view. You follow his progress through the viewfinder. You wait and wait, and then finally you press the button – and you depart with the feeling (though you don’t know why) that you’ve really got something. Later, to substantiate this, you can take a print of this picture, trace it on the geometric figures which come up under analysis, and you’ll observe that, if the shutter was released at the decisive moment, you have instinctively fixed a geometric pattern without which the photograph would have been both formless and lifeless.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    When we are shooting images, we never fully know which moment will be “decisive.” But when we are shooting, we sometimes have a gut feeling or an intuition that a certain moment might be significant. At that moment, we must click the shutter.

    It is hard to know which moments are significant while we’re shooting, so we need to take a risk. Whenever you’re in doubt or think a moment might be interesting, don’t think too much. Just click the shutter.

    Henri Cartier-Bresson expands the concept of “the decisive moment” below:

    “To me, photography is the simultaneous recognition, in a fraction of a second, of the significance of an event as well as of a precise organization of forms which give that event its proper expression.”

    But which moment is “decisive” and which moment isn’t “decisive?” Ultimately, it is a judgement call. Every single moment which we think might be significant is personal:

    “Your decisive moment is not the same as mine, but most of us are looking for a moment that is necessary for what we’re trying to do. Unnecessary moments quickly become easy, common, and boring.” – Richard Kalvar

    Assignment: Shoot hand gestures

    Sometimes it is hard to identify a “decisive moment.” Generally for me, I think the most significant decisive moments are emotions, which are manifested through body language and gestures.

    So for this assignment, you aren’t allowed to shoot a person without a gesture. Go out for an entire day, and look for people with interesting hand gestures. Look for people covering their eyes, people with their hands on their hips, or scratching their head.

    Then think a step further: how do these gestures show certain emotions? Ponder this to yourself, as ultimately you are trying to capture emotions, not mere hand gestures.

    Lesson #77: Rules will set you free

    “I didn’t write the rules, but following them set me free.” – Richard Kalvar

    As artists we have a knee-jerk reaction against “rules.” We want to be open, free, and unlimited in our creativity.

    But know that often having rules can help us be more creative. Certain “rules” in photography include not cropping, not mixing color and black and white in a series, not posing your photos, n to use zoom lenses, and not applying gimmicky post-processing to your photos.

    However know that once again, these “rules” are simply “creative constraints.” Richard Kalvar followed a lot of the “rules” from Henri Cartier-Bresson, and first disdained them. But over time, he found out how these rules ended up helping his photography:

    “Sometimes it turns out that the things that you do for the wrong reasons turn out to be the right things to do anyway. In retrospect, I’m really glad that I decided not to crop, because that developed my compositional discipline and my ability to organize a picture instinctively, in the viewfinder. It also obliged me to work very close up to my subjects in order to fill my 35mm lens frame. I had to be a toreador, not a sniper. Also, I had the feeling of doing something difficult, getting the picture right in the first place; anyone could crop a picture and find something interesting, but doing it in the camera was special. These things were essential to my photographic development.” – Richard Kalvar

    So when you’re starting off any creative endeavor, you don’t want to have too many options. It is good to set these artificial boundaries and rules for yourself.

    Assignment: Create a rule for yourself

    It is harder to listen to rules of others; so try to make your own rules. Perhaps your rule can be that you’re not allowed to upload a photograph until you have let it “marinate” for a month. Perhaps it can that you’re not allowed to own more than one camera or lens. Or your rule can be that you’re not allowed to crop, shoot in black and white, or pose your subjects.

    Create some sort of rule for yourself, and listen to it for a year. As time goes on, start adding more rules to further constrain you.

    You will discover that in the end, it is rules and constraints which will set you free.

    Lesson #78: Experiment

    “I liked different lenses for different times. I am fond of the telephoto lens, as I am of the normal 50 mm lens. I had at one point a 150 mm lens and I was very fond it. I liked what it did. I experimented a lot. Sometimes I worked with a lens that I had when I might have preferred another lens. I think Picasso once said that he wanted to use green in a painting but since he didn’t have it he used red. Perfection is not something I admire. [Laughs]. A touch of confusion is a desirable ingredient.” – Saul Leiter

    Experimentation is what makes life exciting and fun. If you were to simply do the same thing everyday, life would quickly become boring and dull. Imagine eating the same one dish for the rest of your life. Imagine how quickly you would become bored with it.

    As artists and photographers, it is hard to balance the fine line between experimentation and consistency. However without experimentation, you will never be able to find your voice in photography, or what you enjoy.

    So have fun and experiment. Think of yourself like a scientist, and you can experiment with different approaches, subject-matter, cameras, lenses, films, styles of post processing, etc.

    But once you’ve found a certain experiment that works well, try to stick with it and see how deep you can go with it.

    Assignment: Try out different focal lengths

    Not every shoe fits the same foot. My suggestion is to experiment with different focal lengths and to find a focal length that suits your eye. For some people that is a 28mm, other a 35mm, others a 50mm, and others even a 200mm lens.

    Find out what works for you, and once you have discovered your ideal focal length, try to stick with it for a long time to continue to sharpen your vision and voice.

    Lesson #79: Disregard fame

    I’ve never been overwhelmed with a desire to become famous. It’s not that I didn’t want to have my work appreciated, but for some reason — maybe it’s because my father disapproved of almost everything I did — in some secret place in my being was a desire to avoid success.” – Saul Leiter

    Being famous in photography or life is overrated. Fame can often add unnecessary pressure, anxiety, and stress.

    Saul Leiter is one of the best examples of a great photographer who lived a happy, peaceful, and fulfilled life. Instead of trying to network all the time and try to get his photos seen in prestigious galleries, he preferred to simply sit and enjoy a nice cup of coffee:

    “My friend Henry [Wolf] once said that I had a talent for being indifferent to opportunities. He felt that I could have built more of a career, but instead I went home and drank coffee and looked out the window.” – Saul Leiter

    Also know that whether you become famous or not is out of your control. There are many famous artists in history who died penniless and without any fame, and were discovered after they died. Saul Leiter explains:

    “The cream does not always rise to the surface. The history of art is a history of great things neglected and ignored and bad and mediocre things being admired. As someone once said “life is unfair.” In the 19th Century someone was very lucky. He or she acquired a Vermeer for $ 12. There are always changes and revisions of the appreciation of art, artists, and photography and writers and on and on. The late art of Picasso is no good but then a revision takes place and then it becomes very good as the art records indicate. Things come and go.”

    With social media and today’s modern society, we crave attention. But there is often a great advantage of being ignored, that you can live more peacefully and live life according to your own principles:

    “I spent a great deal of my life being ignored. I was always very happy that way. Being ignored is a great privilege. That is how I think I learnt to see what others do not see and to react to situations differently. I simply looked at the world, not really prepared for anything.” – Saul Leiter

    Even if you become the world’s most famous photographer, there will still be people who don’t know or appreciate your work. Just focus on creating work for yourself, without the added pressure to please others:

    “I have a deep-seated distrust and even contempt for people who are driven by ambition to conquer the world … those who cannot control themselves and produce vast amounts of crap that no one cares about. I find it unattractive. I like the Zen artists: they’d do some work, and then they’d stop for a while.” – Saul Leiter

    Saul Leiter expands on not taking yourself or life too seriously:

    “In order to build a career and to be successful, one has to be determined. One has to be ambitious. I much prefer to drink coffee, listen to music and to paint when I feel like it… Maybe I was irresponsible. But part of the pleasure of being alive is that I didn’t take everything as seriously as one should.”

    Assignment: Create a secret social media profile

    For this assignment, create a social media account and intentionally make it hidden. Don’t try to get any followers, and only upload images to it that you like. Consider it a private diary and scrapbook. This will help you avoid the need for “likes” “followers” and other meaningless demarcations of fame or popularity. This will bring you more “zen” and peace to your photography and life.

    Lesson #80: Think long-term

    “I very much like to work on long-term projects. There is time for the photographer and the people in front of the camera to understand each other. There is time to go to a place and understand what is happening there. When you spend more time on a project, you learn to understand your subjects. There comes a time when it is not you who is taking the pictures. Something special happens between the photographer and the people he is photographing. He realizes that they are giving the pictures to him.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Everything great takes a long time. You can’t expect to become a master photographer overnight. A redwood tree needs decades, centuries, and sometimes even thousands of years to achieve their grandeur.

    Similarly, don’t feel so rushed in your photography to create great work overnight. Some of the best photographers in history need years, sometimes even decades to make a body of work they’re proud of.

    For example, Sebastiao Salgado shares the importance of spending a long time on a project, which really allows you to understand your subject matter deeper. Even though you might be tired and exhausted, you must keep peddling forward:

    “When I started Genesis I was 59 and I thought I was an old man,” he says. “But now I am going to be 70 and I feel fine so I am ready to start again. Life is a bicycle: you must keep going forward and you pedal until you drop.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Zoe Strauss also worked on her “I-95” project for nearly a decade. The effort of her work really shows, the images are powerful, cohesive, and tell a narrative:

    “I-95 was an epic narrative about the beauty and struggle of everyday life, comprising 231 photographs adhered to the concrete support pillars under an elevated highway that runs through South Philadelphia, Interstate 95. The installation of photos went up once a year, from 1pm to 4pm, on the first Sunday of the month. I worked on 95 for a decade, from 2000 to 2010.” – Zoe Strauss

    Why a full decade? Strauss explains:

    “A decade would allow me enough time to make a strong body of work. I needed to learn to make photographs and couldn’t gauge my capability until I actually started working. Setting a time constraint assured that the installation wouldn’t be overworked. Plus, I could go at it as hard as possible without fear of burning out.”

    The more time you can work on a project, the more photos you take, the more you have to push yourself creatively to make interesting images.

    Strauss also did something interesting: she set a time limit on how long she was allowed to work on her project. She figured a decade was enough time to work on her project, but didn’t dare work on it for longer than that.

    Another example: Richard Avedon worked on his epic project: “In the American West” for 6 full years. During that period of time, he photographed 752 people, exposed 17,000 sheets of 8×10 film, traveled to 17 states, 189 towns, and ultimately only showed 123 photos for his exhibition.

    Assignment: Think of a decade-long project

    With social media we think about our photography on a day-to-day basis. But think long-term, think years, or better yet; decades.

    What kind of photography project would you be passionate enough to work on for a decade? Write down some ideas, and commit to working on it for a decade. Stay consistent with one camera, one lens, film (or post processing), and aim that at the end of the decade, you will publish it into a book and as an exhibition.

    I feel it is better to create one epic body of work than dozens of mediocre projects. Give this project your entire life, focus, and soul. Then after you die, people will still be able to appreciate your body of work.

    Lesson #81: Create a relationship with your subjects

    “If you take a picture of a human that does not make him noble, there is no reason to take this picture. That is my way of seeing things.” – Sebastião Salgado

    One of the main problems in street photography is how shallow it can be. Through street photography, we are trying to build a connection with our fellow human beings. But often when we shoot candidly, we aren’t able to make that deeper connection.

    In these circumstances, I feel that it is important to try to build a human connection with your subjects.

    Many proponents of street photography day that street photography must be candid. It is true that sometimes the best street photos are candid. But also some of the best street photos involve the photographer getting intimate with his or her subject. By getting to know your subject, you connect with them on a deeper and emotional level, which might help you uncover some hidden truths about them, which might manifest in the photos that you take.

    Sebastiao Salgado is less of a “street photographer” and more of a documentary photographer, who photographs important socioeconomic and political issues all around the world. But one thing that we can learn about him as street photographers is his deep love of humanity.

    He doesn’t believe that making an image is just a one way process; rather, making a photograph is a collaboration between the subject and photographer. He explains below:

    “The picture is not made by the photographer, the picture is more good or less good in function of the relationship that you have with the people you photograph.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    To get your subjects to open up to you, you also need to open yourself up to your subject:

    “I tell a little bit of my life to them, and they tell a little of theirs to me. The picture itself is just the tip of the iceberg.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Walker Evans also shares the importance of a photographer being able to be with other people, and to have your subjects feel comfortable:

    “Incidentally, part of a photographer’s gift should be with people. You can do some wonderful work if you know how to make people understand what you’re doing and feel all right about it, and you can do terrible work if you put them on the defense, which they all are at the beginning. You’ve got to take them off their defensive attitude and make them participate.” – Walker Evans

    Sometimes there will be moments where you won’t have time to make a deep connection with your subject. However one of the most important things are to create an emotional bond with your subject, by empathizing with them as Weegee shares:

    “When you find yourself beginning to feel a bond between yourself and the people you photograph, when you laugh and cry with their laughter and tears, you will know you are on the right track. ” – Weegee

    Assignment: Talk with a stranger for 10 minutes

    For this assignment, you are to approach a stranger you find interesting and you need to have a conversation with them for 10 minutes. You can approach a stranger at a cafe, bar, restaurant, park, or any other public place.

    Ask them where they’re from, how their day is going, and try to find some common ground for you to connect with them.

    Then at the end of the 10 minutes, tell them that you really valued your conversation with them and want to make a memory for yourself by making a few portraits of them. One lesson is that people are often much more relaxed and opened to being photographed if you first treat them as a human being (not just the subject of a photograph).

    Then if they say yes, make some portraits of them. If they say no, just remember that sometimes the conversation and human connection is more important than the photograph you make.

    Lesson #82: Don’t bore your viewer

    “Don’t take boring photos.” – Tony Ray-Jones

    One of the worst things you can do as a photographer is to bore your viewer. In today’s society we have very limited attention spans and if your work doesn’t instantly invite, captivate, or interest your viewer, you will fail to ever have an audience for your work.

    But how can you make your photos less boring? One piece of advice from Jason Eskenazi is to reveal something personal about yourself:

    “Ultimately any photo project that you do isn’t really about the subject matter, it is about you – and revealing yourself. If you don’t reveal anything about yourself, you are boring everyone. It is a confession in some ways.” – Jason Eskenazi

    So as a general rule, try not to bore your viewer. When you’re working on a photography project, share them with people who aren’t photographers and ask them which of your shots are boring, and which you should cut out.

    Ultimately what you find “interesting” is subjective to how you see the world. So start off by making shots that interest you. If you’re bored with your own work, good luck trying to find anybody else who isn’t bored with your work as well.

    Assignment : Shock and awe

    For this assignment try to create an image that will shock, provoke, and interest your viewer.

    In street photography, you can do this by shooting your subject really closely, using a flash, by photographing an interesting subject, or by intentionally cutting off limbs in a photograph.

    To see whether you have succeeded shocking your viewer, create a collection of 10 images and prepare them as prints or put them on a tablet or your smartphone. Put your “shocking” image somewhere in the middle. And once you land on that shocking image, judge the reaction of your viewer; whether their eyes popped up, if they leaned closer to the image to inspect it, or if they pause on the image and ask you about it.

    Don’t be boring.

    Lesson #83: Embrace your day job

    I know a lot of photographers who wish their full time profession was being a photographer. Or if they were rich, and didn’t have to work, and could simply travel the world and photograph all the time.

    However the reality is that sometimes having too much free time can be bad for your creativity. There is a benefit on having a “day job” as a photographer. Having a steady income allows you to buy photography books, film, attend workshops, travel, and not have to stress to make a living from your photograph.

    In fact, I know a lot of professional photographers who are so burnt out from commercial and wedding photography that they barely have energy or passion left to shoot what they really love, which is street photography.

    Some of the most famous street photographers in history have had normal “day jobs”, like Vivian Maier who worked as a nanny. The benefit of being a nanny was whenever she took her kids to the city, she brought her camera along and made photos. Not only that, but when she was off work, she could fully devote her time to making images, without having to worry about selling her photos or anything to survive.

    Walker Evans also had a job that gave him during the day, which didn’t pay much, but paid for his freedom:

    “I had a night job on Wall Street in order to be free in the daytime. It paid for room and food. You didn’t have to sleep or eat much. In those days I was rather ascetic.”

    Even Albert Einstein worked as a clerk at the Swiss patent office, doing menial labor while he came up with the theory of relativity. So why can you create a great body of work in photography, even with a normal job?

    Assignment : Write down the benefits of having a day job

    If you have a day job, count yourself blessed. Rather than bitching and moaning about how your day job holds back your creativity as a photographer, think about the benefits of having a day job as a photographer. Then write down all the benefits on a piece of paper and tape it to your cubicle wall.

    Another idea: try to find where you can make free time around your day job to do more shooting. Perhaps you can shoot for 30 minutes before work on the train, subway, or in your neighborhood before you go to work. If you drive, perhaps you can shoot photos while stuck in traffic (do this with caution).

    If you have a lunch break, devote that time to shoot your office neighborhood. If you don’t have people in your office area walking around, shoot urban landscapes, or just portraits of your Co workers.

    Don’t stay late after work sending more emails or sucking up to your boss, get out immediately at 6pm and go shooting where you want to go.

    Maximize your weekends for shooting. Devote holidays to shoot. Ask your boss if you can work part time to allow yourself more time to shoot.

    Find the little holes of time in your schedule and maximize it. There are no excuses, only photos to be made.

    Lesson #84: Don’t become married to your beliefs

    “A year ago I would have said that color is vulgar and should never be tried under any circumstances. It’s a paradox that I’m now associated with it and in fact I intend to come out with it seriously.” – Walker Evans

    In today’s society it is frowned upon to be a “flip-flopper” and to go back on previously stated beliefs you might have had. Not only that, but it is true that it is hard for old dogs to learn new tricks. Once we have a certain belief or way of thinking established in our minds, we don’t like to change our beliefs.

    But the secret of continuing to grow, evolve, and learn as a photographer is to not get married to your beliefs. It is important to stay open-minded to new ideas, approaches, and ways of working.

    For example, Walker Evans worked most of his career in black and white. He looked at color photography with disgust, horror, and suspicion. He went on the public record by calling color photography “vulgar.”

    Ironically enough, he started to be more interested in color when he started to shoot with an instant Polaroid camera. He then started to have fun and understand the benefits of shooting color. What I admire about Evans that he was able to admit that he was wrong, and changed his beliefs. Not many photographers or human beings can do that.

    Assignment: Find a counter-example to your beliefs

    Similarly, what are some other beliefs are you married to in photography, and can you find any counter arguments which contradict your belief?

    For example, there were many ideas I was married to in street photography. I used to believe that street photography had to be candid. What I discovered over time was that street photography often was great when you asked for permission. I used to think that a photographer should never crop his or her photos (the Henri Cartier-Bresson school of thinking). I soon learned that many master street photographers actually did crop their photos a lot? While I do believe in the philosophy of “one camera and one lens” in street photography, there are many other great photographers who have been able to make great images using lots of different cameras in their lifetime, Araki being a notable one.

    So write down some of what you believe to be “truths” in photography on a piece of paper, and try to find a counter example to any point you might believe in. You can start by going to Google and searching the opposite of what you believe in.

    This will help you open your mind to new possibilities and to know that there isn’t just one “right” way of doing anything. There are different approaches. Everyone has a different way of working. It is just a matter of finding out what works well for you.

    Lesson #85: You’re only as good as your last photo

    “Keep your eyes open. If you see anything, take it. Remember – you’re as good as your last picture. One day you’re hero, the next day you’re a bum.” – Weegee

    There’s a saying also for film directors that you’re only as good as your last movie. Once you reach a certain quality or bar in your photography, you don’t want to make future work which is worse than your old work. You want to continue to improve, and be judged based on your past work.

    Have a strong work ethic in your photography. Don’t be easily satisfied, try to make the best possible photos you can, judging yourself to your past work.

    The secret isn’t to judge yourself and your work compared to other photography. Rather, only judge yourself to the last photo you took. If you have a certain shot that you’re really proud of, make that photograph your new standard. Aim to make photos as good as that shot, if not better. This will help you continue to pave new ground in your photography, and take your work to the next level.

    Assignment : Only show your best 5 photos

    The common mistake that I see photographers make is that they don’t show their best work. They show too many of their so-so images.

    I believe if every photographer showed only their best 5 photos, they would look like amazing photographers.

    Imagine if you were to die, and you were only allowed to leave behind 5 photos to be remembered by. Which would those 5 photos be?

    Choose those 5 images, and make those your golden standard. Now try to build upon those 5 images with another 5 great images. Don’t stop until you die.

    Lesson #86: Shift the thinking of your viewer

    “In terms of art, there is a possibility to provide someone with an image that will cause them to have a shift in their thinking, not necessarily to change their thinking but the possibility to think about things in a slightly different way. I don’t think that is realistic all the time, but that’s what I work toward. It’s not always successful, but it’s what I am plugging away at.” – Zoe Strauss

    One of your jobs as a photographer and artist is to shift the thinking of your viewer. What you don’t want is for your images to be forgettable and make no impact on the viewer.

    What you want your photos to do is to emotionally impact your viewer and subtly shift how they see the world and reality.

    Think about what kind of meaning your photos have, and what you want your photos to say. Also think to yourself what you want your viewers to take away from your images. Do you want them to see and appreciate more or the beauty of everyday life? Or is there a certain social issue you want to expose them to through a photo series you make? Or do you want your subject to become more empathetic to the suffering of others?

    Assignment : do a documentary project

    For this assignment, think of a concept of an important social issue to you. Choose a project that will be easy for you to access, and also preferably close to where you live.

    Your assignment is to do a documentary project of this place. If you have no experience in documentary photography, don’t worry. Just go to that place every weekend for a month, and get to know that place very well. Make friends with the people who live or work in that area and ask if it is okay that you make photos of them. Then keep going back and making images.

    At the end of the month, edit it down to 10 images, and try to make a story of that place you documented. Try to evoke some sort of emotion through the shots, that will teach your viewer about the soul of the place you documented. Expose them to new ideas, a new place, or a new way of living.

    Don’t miss out on free book updates!

    I am currently working on a print edition of this book. If you would like to stay updated with the book, don’t miss out: Join the street photography newsletter.

    You can also continue to learn more about street photography on the blog.

  • On the Shortness of Life

    On the Shortness of Life

    18063833493_520947b5cd_c

    Read this article as a Google Doc (would love your comments/edits), download and print as a PDF, as an .epub (e-reader), or .mobi (for Kindle).

    I also recommend reading the original: “On the Shortness of Life” by Seneca (order the paperback on Amazon).

    “What you do today is important because you are exchanging a day of your life for it.” —Unknown

    Dear friend,

    Today I want to share something personal with you; for a guy who is so young (I am only 27 years old) I think about death a lot– nearly on a daily basis. Why? I used to have this fear and superstition that I would die young.

    I think this fear of death has given me the sense of “hustle” in my life, not to waste a precious minute of my time. After all, time is the ultimate non-renewable resource in our lives.

    I have a friend who just recently passed away. We were good friends in middle school and high school, having lots of fun playing Counterstrike, hanging out at PC cafes, talking random shit with the boys during lunch, going to the movies, having good laughs, and stuff like that. He was supremely intelligent, talented, and had a bright future ahead of him. He graduated top of the class in high school, and went off to UC Berkeley. Once in college, we didn’t speak much.

    About half a year ago, I heard from a friend that he had seizures– apparently he had some sort of brain tumor that was “under control.” At first when I heard this, I thought about how shitty his situation was. I felt horrible for him, but at the same time I knew that there was nothing I could do about it, but have empathy and pray for him.

    Fast-forward to a few months ago; I get the news that he suddenly died. He was 27 years old, the same age as me.

    We are dying daily

    Friend, we never know when we are going to die. I am only 27 years old, but who knows, I can get hit by a car tomorrow, I can find out that I have lung cancer (have spent time hanging around smokers my entire life), I can find out I have some rare heart condition, I can die in a plane crash, I might accidentally trip while looking at Google Maps, slip, and crack open my head, or (hopefully not) piss off someone from street photography that they stab me or something.

    There is a quote I read from Seneca’s “On the Shortness of Life” which really spoke to me:

    “What man can you show me who places any value on his time, who reckons the worth of each day, who understands that he is dying daily?” – Seneca

    We are dying daily. Time is the ultimate non-renewable resource.

    For example, we can lose $100 and always in the future gain another $100. But when we lose a year of our life, we can never “add” another year of our life (no matter how rich we are). Similarly, every hour we spend in the day is one less hour that we can live.

    I have a mental exercise: I pretend that every night I go to sleep it is the last day on earth that I have. I know some friends in their 70s, and one of their honest-to-God fears is that they won’t wake up the next morning. And when they wake up in the morning, they are excited, happy, and grateful; God has granted them another day to live.

    I try to apply the same philosophy. I try to treat everyday like it were my last. And when I wake up the next morning, it is simply a bonus– a gift from God. Now  whether you believe in “God” or any other supernatural power it doesn’t really matter — being grateful for life is one of the most valuable things in life.

    What is more valuable to you: time or money?

    We often make the worst tradeoff in life; we trade our time for money. Whereas in reality, it should be the opposite; we should trade our money for time.

    For example, will I trade 30 years of my life working in the corporate grind hoping to trade it for a retirement package, BMW, and white picket house? Fuck that. I want to live and enjoy my life to the fullest.

    Don’t get me wrong, I am a greedy and self-interested bastard. I love the security of money, and nothing makes me more excited than adding more 0’s to my bank account.

    But at the end of the day, I can’t take my bank account with  me when I die. No matter how expensive of a car I buy, it will all look shitty and outdated in a few decades.

    I want to tell you one of my vices; I love cars. I have always loved cars since I was young. Perhaps it was because I am an American, and we have such strong car culture. Or perhaps it is because I was addicted to the whole “rice rocket” fast and the furious  phenomenon. Regardless, I think us Americans waste a shitload of tie, money, and effort in trying to get a nice car. And what a useless “investment” that is. After all, according to the “hedonic treadmill” — enough is never enough.

    Let’s say I bought a BMW 3-series, I would get a huge rush of happiness for the first month or so. Then after a month, I get “used” to it. Then I am jealous of my neighbor who has the BMW 5-series. I then (after emptying out my bank account), “upgrade” to the 5-series. It is awesome for another month, then once again, I go to the baseline happiness (similar satisfaction when I had the 3-series). Then I see the friend with the 7-series, upgrade to that. Then you see the friend with the Maserati, the Bentley, the private jet, the private island, then the private spaceship to Mars. When is enough truly enough?

    I still am suckered by cars. I currently drive a 2010 Prius that was a gift from Cindy’s (very generous) sister. It is an awesome car, great on gas, and perfect for that “eco-hippie trendy, conscious citizen” image in Berkeley. But at the same time, I crave a sports car. I had a 1991 Sentra SE-R (modded it out) and a 1990 Miata in college (sister crashed the car). Now I look at envy with those with the Fiat Abarth (sweet little car), as well as the Ford Fiesta ST (even Jeremy Clarkson loves it). Sure these are pretty modest cars, but I know if I ever got them, I would want to upgrade to a BMW M3, than a Tesla, Ferrari– whatever.

    But a technique I have used to try to deter me from buying these material cars is this; I imagine how shitty the car and “outdated” it will look 20 years from now. And not only that, but at the end of the day, a car is just a metal box with 4 wheels that takes you from point “A” to point “B”. The only reason I ever crave a car is when I am bored or dissatisfied with my life, and I want more excitement. Because I am a sucker to advertising, I (wrongly) believe that buying a new car will fix my life’s problems. It never does.

    And a new car is damn expensive. Start at around $30,000 in most cases. But what else can you do with $30,000?

    You can go on 30 round-trip flights around the world. You can shoot 6,000 rolls of film. You can live for 30 months in a south-east Asian country (2.5 years). You can invest that money in yourself; to attend photography classes, to buy photobooks, and travel. Money can only buy you happiness, if you spend it on experiences, not gear.

    Sorry I got distracted, but realize that your time is so much more valuable than any dollar amount in your life.

    Think about death on a daily basis

    Don’t imagine you will live forever. The only two things certain in life; death and taxes. If you’re some Russian mafia tax-dodging boss (who lives cozily in Switzerland), maybe you can avoid the taxes. But death is the only certainty in life.

    Sorry to break it to you (spoiler alert), your mom will soon die, your father will soon die, your loved one will soon die, your friends and other family member will soon die, and you will soon die.

    Thinking about death constantly helps us savor life, and appreciate it.

    I learned this one tip from Marcus Aurelius in “The Meditations” — he says whenever you kiss your child to sleep, you silently tell him, “Good night my son, I love you, and know that you might one day die on accident. I cherish the time we have right now.”

    But isn’t that bad luck, bad karma? That is just superstition and nonsense.

    Another tip: every time you say goodbye to a friend or loved one, imagine it is the last time you will ever see them again. Because nothing is certain in life. So give them a genuine hug, and tell them how much you love and appreciate them. Then if they happen to pass away suddenly or get into a car accident (I had another friend who got killed by a drunk driver at the age of 16) it will not hit you by surprise.

    “Carpe diem” (seize the day)

    Time is the quickest fleeting thing. Imagine you were stranded in a desert island, thirsty, and famished. You have gone 2 days without water in the blazing sun (110+ degrees F or 40+ degrees C). You stumble upon a stream that is gushing with water. But you are informed that this stream will only gush out water for an hour. Would you sit around and let the water go to waste? Hell no, you will fill your stomach with as much water as humanly possible, and not let any drop go to waste.

    I think this is a good analogy to time. Time is like that stream of water; it is constantly flowing out, but sooner or later, it will cut out.

    I am a guy who has a humble goal in life; I just want to be happy. But what is “happiness” to me?

    To me, “happiness” is less of a pleasure-based thing. I  am not a hedonist. I don’t think happiness is eating 3-star Michelin meals everyday, driving a range-rover, living in a mansion, and fucking beautiful women. Rather, I prefer the Greek interpretation: “eudaimonia”, which means “human flourishing.”

    What is “human flourishing?” Well to me, it is on the top of Maslow’s “hierarchy of needs” — seeking “self actualization.” Which means using all of your talents, passions, and energy to create something meaningful that you can ultimately give back to society.

    “He who lives for himself is truly dead to others.” So my goal in life is to live for others; to help others find satisfaction and happiness in their life. To create information that empowers people and brings them joy. I want to build communities, and bring passionate (and lonely) people together. I don’t give a fuck about how many 0’s I have in my bank account, whether I have the fanciest new camera, whether I drive a fancy car, whether I have a bigass house. Just give me my espresso, free wi-fi, and some eggs (so I don’t starve to death) and I have all of my basic needs met.

    But going back to the point, I need to stick this piece of advice from Seneca to my desk:

    “Hold every hour in your grasp. Lay hold of to-day’s task, and you will not need to depend so much upon to-morrow’s. While we are postponing, life speeds by. Nothing is ours, except time.”

    So what is “today’s task” for me? It is to produce information, and to write these articles and letters for you. Tomorrow is uncertain; I don’t know whether I will still be alive or not. But I want to live everyday like it were my last.

    The only thing that pisses me off is if I can’t get any writing done. My only goal in life: to write a little bit everyday, and to contribute a little to the happiness and peace of mind of others. I want to help relieve the suffering of my friends and loved ones; whether that is through my writing, or the time I spend with them. One lesson from Tim Ferriss in his article, “‘Productivity’ Tricks for the Neurotic, Manic-Depressive, and Crazy (Like Me)” is just to block out the first 3 hours of your day to doing the task which brings you the most satisfaction. Once again, that for me is writing. I try not to ever make any appointments before noon. The morning is my sacred time to get writing done.

    “But what if I have a day job or office job, where I am forced to answer emails, and do shit for my boss? Not everybody can live a life of luxury like you Eric, where you have so much free time. You insensitive asshole.”

    Don’t get me wrong, I am extremely blessed to have the life that I do. But realize that me and you are in the same boat. I get tempted by doing bullshit admin work in the morning that doesn’t contribute to my happiness or feeling of “eudaimonia”.

    My advice is this: everyone can make 3 hours of “alone time” for them. It just comes down to the question; “How bad do you want it?” For me when I had an office job (and blogging was my passion), I intentionally got up about an hour or two early everyday to get a little bit of writing done before going into work. Sometimes I would be so in the “flow” of writing that I would actually get into work late and get yelled at my boss. But it was totally worth it.

    Honestly making time for yourself is easier than it may seem. Rather than downloading new “productivity” apps on your phone, rather than reading more “productivity” business books, or listening to podcasts, the secret to creating time is to cut out bullshit and “time-wasting” activities from your day. As Nassim Taleb calls it in his book “Antifragile”, the “via negativa” approach. That you add to your life by subtracting from your life.

    So if you want to find more time for your passion in life and photography, here are some things that I have personally subtracted from my life. Now I have a shitload of time to do what I am passionate about; which include writing, photography, reading, teaching, and spending time with loved ones.

    1.”Networking” meetings

    They never go anywhere. And honestly, the only reason that I ever network is for the hope of some future gain. I think a networking meeting will help me gain more future power, influence, fame, or money. But I don’t need any more money, fame, power, social media following, whatever. So why should I waste my time networking? I’d rather spend time with loves one that I truly care about; without some hope of future gain.

    It is great, Seneca (God I think I might change my middle name to his) gave some practical advice on how networking is a waste of time (incredible that not much has changed over the past 2,000 years):

    “How much time they waste ingratiating themselves with higher-ups or networking or legal matters. Of how many that very powerful friend (who you think is your friend but is just using you for the friends that you have, people he would like to know and perhaps keep in his retinue)?”

    I have to admit, I know some “influential” people and spend time with them (not because I truly enjoy their company), but I hope some sort of “future gain” — and the hope that one day that I need a favor from them, they will be in my back pocket. This is shallow, and I need to stop doing this bullshit.

    I also think that it is better to piss off and disappoint people for the greater good. After all this is the advice I often give myself (and ask myself): “Is this hour or two you spend with this person truly worthwhile, or would I be better off using this time to write an article that can potentially help thousands?”

    Of course I don’t have that same mentality when spending time with loved ones and friends. To me, any time spent with someone you truly love and care about is time well-spent.

    2.Media (blogs, television, video games, magazines, frivolous books)

    I haven’t watched television for the last 10 years. I used to be addicted to it; watching it as a teenager until 1-2am (Adult Swim). But once I got into college, I traded that time for playing video games. But my third year in college, I stopped video games cold turkey as well, because I literally didn’t have time (and had better things to do).

    I honestly think that TV is the biggest waste of time. Sure there are some TV shows on Netflix which are great and inspire. But 99% of it is trash to be honest. It is just like junk food.

    I feel bad for people who have this daily grind; wake up, go to work, come back home from work, watch 2 hours of netflix, and go to sleep, and then rinse and repeat their schedules.

    So many people complain they don’t have enough time to do what they want to do. Television watching is horrible because it is so damn passive. True happiness and having “leisure” time isn’t sitting on your ass on some beach and watching Netflix from your iPad. True “leisure” is being active, and doing something that you are passionate about– something that feels meaningful.

    If you subtracted 2 hours of Netflix or TV watching from your life, how could you better use that time? Perhaps that can help you sleep 2 hours earlier, so you can wake up at 5am instead of 7am to go to work. And from 5-7am you can use that time to shoot street photography (beautiful sunrise early morning shooting), you can use that time to meditate, to read, write for your blog or that novel you’ve always wanted to write, play an instrument (quietly), or any other passion you have in life. Perhaps you can go into the office 2 hours early (before anyone is there, and get some meaningful work done in the office, if that is what you feel is your passion and calling).

    I also think that 99.9% of blogs on the internet are just noise. I know I spew a lot of random noise on this blog too, so feel free to unfollow whenever.

    Honestly, all the greatest ideas and inspirations I have ever gotten were from books, never from blogs. Blogs are just distillations of ideas and information, most of that information is rooted in books. So go straight for the source.

    What do I have against blogs? My biggest problem; they are distracting, and breed dissatisfaction in our lives as well.

    For example, I (still) suffer from G.A.S. (gear acquisition syndrome). I love material possessions, and I always want the newest and greatest equipment or gadgets. Not only that, 99.9% of photo blogs on the internet are just trying to sell you cameras. I have a personal rule, never trust the opinion of a camera review or rumor blog if they have affiliate links (this includes this blog). After all, it is always in the blogger’s best interest to write great things about a camera (or at least downplay the negatives) because if you buy a camera through a blogger’s affiliate link, they will get a small percentage. The solution? First of all, realize you don’t need a new camera. If you really want a new camera, just test and try it out for yourself (rent it and try it out or simply buy it and return it before 30 days).

    Not only that, but I don’t trust any blogs that have display or banner ads. Why not? I do realize they need to make a living; but banner ads always tempt me to buy shit I don’t need. Everyone on the internet is trying to sell you something (even I have the hidden hope that you might attend one of my workshops one day). But I always try to remind myself: the purpose that I blog isn’t to have you attend my workshop. The workshops are a way for me to bring people together and build confidence; but the true purpose of my life is to produce these articles and information that will help the greatest amount of people.

    So as a challenge try this; don’t read any blogs for a month. Trust me, you will have so much more happiness and clarity of thought. And nobody is going to die. Sure you might miss out of the news of that new rumored camera coming out, or Justin Bieber getting into another drinking and driving episode. Rather than falling victim to “FOMO” (fear of missing out), embrace “JOMO” (joy of missing out).

    I used to play a shitload of video games as well growing up. I regret every minute spent on video games. Sure I made some “online” friends and joined “online communities”– but honestly at the end of the day, what good does having virtual gold on World of Warcraft contribute to society as a whole? Do you really need to spend another 100 hours “grinding away” killing monsters to get that treasured mystical sword that you can simply buy in a virtual store for $25? How much do you value your time? Okay if you are paraplegic and your only way of communication is living in second life; that is fine– but I also believe 99.9% of video game playing is a massive waste of time, I wish I told myself that earlier.

    3.Not giving a fuck of what others think of you

    I want to give fewer “fucks” in my life. The problem? I do give a big fuck about what others think about me.

    Because I give such a huge flying fuck about what others think of me, I work hard (and waste time) trying to craft a certain image of myself. I spend a lot of time trying to meet up people that I “should” meet (rather than people I “must” meet). I waste a lot of time worrying whether people are judging me in a positive or a negative way. I waste a lot of time lying on the bed, regretting some stupid shit I said earlier that was insensitive, that hurt someone’s feelings (on accident). I waste a lot of time on social media, trying to argue with trolls and haters that I am a good person and not just some narcissistic asshole.

    But if I want more time in my life, what do I need to do? Give no fucks, yes, NO fucks about what others think of me– whether positive or negative.

    Another lesson of wisdom from Seneca; do not be overjoyed from the compliments of others, nor overly depressed fro the criticisms of others. The secret is to have a steady stream of consciousness, where you are always feeling “pleasant”, mild, constant, unperturbed, and steady.

    This is the source of ultimate freedom.

    It took me a long time to realize this– that praise (and hate) are equally useless.

    Why is praise useless? Well, advice from Marcus Aurelius from “The Meditations” (paraphrased from my memory):

    “Does the vine need ‘praise’ when it produces grapes? Does the sun need ‘praise’ when it wakes up everyday (without fail) and shine its rays upon the earth? Does the horse need ‘praise’ for transporting our things for us? Does the emerald need ‘praise’ to be told that it is beautiful?”

    So why do I need “praise” for what I do? The reward is the act itself. If I clean the dishes and Cindy doesn’t mention it nor pat me on the back, why should this disturb me? I am cleaning the dishes because they need cleaning, not to get some sort of approval from Cindy.

    If I give a friend a hug and tell him/her how much I appreciate them, do I need them to say it back to me? Absolutely not, I am not telling them how much I love and appreciate them in order for them to mutually tell me the same.

    If I donate a dollar to a homeless person, do I need him to thank me? No, I am giving him a dollar to help him, not to feel like a “good” person. In-fact, the only way to be truly “generous” is to give to an ungrateful person (credit Nassim Taleb).

    Similarly, why do we care if others dislike us, hate on us, say negative things about us, gossip about us behind our backs, or judge us?

    For example, let’s say you took a photo of a stranger, and they told you: “Fuck you, you fucking pervert. Who gave you the fucking right to take a photo of me? I’m going to call the fucking police on you, you fucking asshole.”

    Of course this would bother you (it would bother me as well).

    But what are words? Words are just vibrations of sound in the air. It isn’t the words that hurt us, but our interpretation of the words which hurt us.

    A personal way I have been able to not take the hate and criticism of others? Take the piss out of myself.

    For example, once some negative troll left a comment on my blog and said: “Eric, your photos suck, you’re a scammer, you’re only ‘click baiting’ people to have them attend your shitty workshops, and you are only famous because you know how to game social media and add tags to improve your ‘SEO’”. Rather than saying, “fuck you” to this commenter, I said: “I also don’t fold my bed sheets in the morning, and I’m a horrible cook.” Another tip from Nassim Taleb: never take negative hate from anybody if they criticize you for more than one thing (it is superfluous to say that an author is a horrible writer and a bad cook).

    I will tell you another personal story of the real best way to deal with negative people; simply ignore them. Would people shout at a mirror? No way, it would just make them look (and feel like) an idiot. So embrace this “Taoist” philosophy and act like a mirror; don’t retain any negative feelings or emotions, just be still, and don’t respond.

    I remember when I was a kid, a lot of kids would bully me, make fun of me, call me a fag, gay, whatever. It would make me feel like shit, and then I would go home, feel sorry for myself, and then for the next day or so, think of clever ways that I could revenge them. In the shower I  would think of witty comebacks, or ways for my friends to go and beat him up.

    But once again, that is a massive waste of time and energy. Granted I didn’t know any better when I was a kid, but there are adults out there seeking revenge all the time. But according to Marcus Aurelius, his advice is this: “The best revenge is to be unlike him who performed the injury.”

    Think about all the time you’ve one wasted, feeling negative thoughts about someone, or plotting ways to get back at him or her. Think about the time you wasted how you could get “even.” But why not invest your time in more noble pursuits; like complimenting a friend, calling up a friend and telling them how much you appreciate their friendship? Or going out and making some beautiful photos that will make both you and your viewers happy?

    Another last point on not giving a fuck of what others think of me; I want to learn how to be okay with disappointing people.

    One of my character flaws is this; I want everybody to like me. And what causes me the most psychological pain is letting others down, not living up to the expectations of others, not spending enough time with them, etc.

    But honestly, I have a noble and grand mission in life to help society as a whole. So I need to learn that is okay to let some people down, and disappoint some people, for the greater good.

    For example, I might decline a meeting with somebody because  I want to use my time in the morning to write. I’m going to feel really guilty about it, but I need to stop caring about what they might judge me as. Because after all, “letting someone down” or “disappointing them” is just a mental construct that I have in my mind. Who knows, maybe the person that I disappointed will quickly forget feeling offended. This also means being less responsive with my emails, so I can be more productive as a writer.

    4.Not worrying about the future

    If I truly believed that I am “daily dying”, and that today might be the last day I have on earth, why do I concern myself with the future?

    What Seneca taught me is that only a foolish man thinks that he has a long life ahead of him, or can plain with “certainty” about the future. After all, it makes no sense to plan for “retirement” at age 65, if I am not 100% certain that I won’t get hit by a car or get some sort of rare cancer before then. Steve Jobs died at age 56 to cancer. He didn’t worry too much about the future; but what he did was live everyday like it were his last from his Stanford Commencement speech:

    “When I was 17, I read a quote that went something like: ‘If you live each day as if it was your last, some day you’ll most certainly be right.’ It made an impression on me, and since then, for the past 33 years, I have looked in the mirror every morning and asked myself: ‘If today were the last day of my life, would I want to do what I am about to do today?’ And whenever the answer has been ‘no’ for too many days in a row, I know I need to change something.”

    According to the Steve Jobs biography, when Steve Jobs realized that he had cancer, he put a huge emphasis on trying to squeeze the most out of each of his days on earth. He dedicated his entire heart, soul, and being into Apple; to create products that inspired people and contributed to humanity in some sort of way. And contribute he did, most of my best work has been done on Apple products (11’’ Macbook Air and iPad).

    I also recall another quote from Nassim Taleb from “Antifragile” which says; never plan a day in advance.

    I have a problem where I had too rigid schedules and todo lists for myself. I try to live in the future.

    For example, I will go to bed thinking to myself, “Oh, when I wake up in the morning, I am going to do “X”, “Y”, and “Z”. I’m going to wake up super early and get all this shit done.” Of course in reality, I wake up super late, and then I am upset and frustrated at myself. Or perhaps I wake up and I feel sick, and I am no longer able to do the work that I planned the night before.

    Another tip from Nassim Taleb; never plan an appointment with someone unless it is the day-of, because we always under-estimate how chaotic things will be in the future. They call this the “planning fallacy” (first proposed by proposed by Daniel Kahneman and Amos Tversky, read more in the excellent book, “Thinking Fast, and Slow”).

    Regarding the “planning fallacy”, think of the last time you had a project. You first told your boss it would take you a week; then it ended up taking two weeks, and you felt massively guilty. Remember the last time you were running late for a meeting or a dinner appointment with a friend. You text them and tell him: “Sorry, running 10 minutes late” and then you get stuck in traffic (for even longer), and show up 20 minutes late and feel massively guilty. This has happened to me so many times I can’t even count.

    The solution? Always add an approximate buffer of 25% of how long you think something will need. For example, when I am traveling and I think I need $200 for the week, I will get $250. If I think I need 50 rolls of film for a trip, I will bring 75 rolls. If I think I am running 10 minutes late to an appointment, I tell them I’m running 20 minutes late. If I think a book project will take me a year, I make that a year and 3 months.

    Sorry, I got slightly off-topic again. But the point; never worry about the future. You have no control over what the future brings. You only have control over the present moment. Like literally, this present moment. You have the power to think about positive things now, whether you want to go read a book, whether you want to go take some photos, whether you want to look at some photobooks, or whether you want to give a loved one a hug.

    So don’t waste time “planning” for the future, or worrying about the future.

    For example, I have sat down and made a “10-year plan”, trying to set goals and all these other benchmarks for myself. But that is a massive waste of time; who knows if I will still be alive 10 years from now?

    Similarly, I have often lied in bed worrying about the future– and losing sleep over it.

    I will share a personal story for you: Last year (2014) I was in London for about two weeks on my own. It was one of the most depressing times I’ve had in the last 5 years. Why? I rented an Airbnb room on my own, and Cindy had gone back home. I was alone, to think negative thoughts. I had a difficult time finding a dinner partner in London, so I would eat in the apartment alone. Publilius Syrus once wrote

    “Solitude is the mother of anxieties.

    Even though both of my workshops in London were sold out, I realized I had no workshops planned for 2015. I started to panic. I realized I had overdrawn money from my Paypal account, and I felt anxious without having “cash-flow” to my bank account. I started to “catastrophize” and imagine all these “worst-case” scenarios. I imagined that suddenly street photography would fade into obscurity, and nobody would ever attend one of my workshops again. I imagined myself being homeless, destitute, and alone. I imagined dying alone.

    Of course all of these thoughts were overly dramatic; but I wasted so much precious time worrying about my future– when in reality (looking back), everything turned out fine.

    And the truth of life and reality is that everything work out okay in the end.

    A method that I have discovered recently to avoid this anxious fear of the future is to think of the worst-case scenario.

    For me, honestly the worst-case scenario is that I go bankrupt, nobody in the world is interested in street photography, I end up moving in back with my Mom, and becoming an Uber driver. But what is so bad about that? I will have my mother’s delicious cooking, I will spend more time with her and family, and perhaps have a fun time driving my car and meeting new strangers as an Uber driver.

    I think the ultimate fear we all have of his death. But once again, we’re privileged to live in a society where all of our basic needs are met (food, water, shelter).

    So what are we afraid of? That we will have to sell our car? So what? We learn to take public transport, and appreciate being able to take a nap on the bus on the way from one place to another. Are we afraid that we will be homeless? You will be able to get (some) help from the government, so you won’t literally be sleeping on the streets. And if you can always find a friend or family member to stay with (at least for a month or few weeks). Are you afraid that everyone will hate you? Does the opinions of others physically hurt you? Of course not.

    5. Not doing more than one thing

    One of the best books I read was “Essentialism” (another good read being “The One Thing”). The concept in a nutshell: just focus on one noble task or mission in your life, and disregard everything else.

    So for you, if that is photography, focus only on photography. Disregard all your other hobbies (playing music, learning a new language, martial arts, whatever).

    I’m not saying that you shouldn’t have more than one hobby if that makes you happy. But if you want to truly become great at one thing, you can’t divide your attention. The rays of the sun is pleasant when it is spread over the earth. But if you focus the rays of the sun through a magnifying glass, you can burn holes through steel (think of a laser).

    Once again the master Seneca shares from “On the Shortness of Life”:

    “No single worthwhile goal can be successfully pursued by a man who is occupied with many tasks – lawyer, teacher, however – because the mind, when its focus is split, absorbs little in depth and rejects everything that is, so to speak, jammed into it.”

    So practical ways you can apply this to your photography:

    • Focus only on one project
    • Focus only on black and white (or only color)
    • Focus on using only one camera and lens
    • Focus only on one subject matter
    • Focus on shooting only one area or neighborhood
    • Focus on only studying one master photographer

    For me, I would rather be remembered for one great project in my life, than 20 mediocre projects. I would rather be remembered for one great shot, instead of 20 mediocre shots.

    If I could be remembered for one thing in terms of contribution to society as a whole, it is to spread the “open source” school of thought; that information should be open and free to empower people, not locked by “copyright” to be monetized and hoarded.

    Similar line of thought; Nassim Taleb calls it “Bergson’s Razor” in “Antifragile”; the concept that a philosopher shouldn’t be known for more than 1 main contribution to society. Similarly; all the nobel prize winners are generally known for only 1 main contribution.

    Think about the greats in history: Einstein and the Theory of Relativity, Edison and the light bulb, Obama being the first black president, Steve Jobs and the iPhone, Henri Cartier-Bresson and the concept of “The Decisive Moment”, Henri Ford and the automobile, etc.

    So realize that you are dying daily, and you only have a limited time on the earth. But if you are single-minded in your life’s purpose, and give it all your energy, time, and attention, and soul– you can still live a long and meaningful life.

    For example, I mentioned earlier that my friend passed away at 27. That fucking sucks, but at the same time; if his parents were told that he would die at age 5, and he lived to 27, what would you say about the length of his life? You would say that he was blessed to live to 27, would you not?

    Similarly, someone who lives to 80 years old, or even 100 is a “long life” by most standards. But there is a difference between “living long” and “existing” long, as Seneca says:

    “A grey-haired wrinkled man has not necessarily lived long. More accurately he has existed long.”

    Once again, what is the difference between “living” and “existing”? The difference is this; living is to use everyday like it were your last, trying to do everything in your greatest power to make a meaningful contribution to society. “Existing long” is to simply dwell for a long period of time on earth before dying.

    Some people tell me, “Eric, doesn’t thinking about death make you depressed, and lose motivation?”

    Hell no; I appreciate life a hell of a lot more because I know that one day I would die.

    For example, have you ever lost your wallet, and “miraculously” found it under your car seat or in-between the sofa? Think about the extreme joy that gives you. You don’t know how much you appreciate something until you lose it.

    Similarly, you don’t know how much you appreciate your loved ones, until they die (or someone else close to you dies).

    The death of close friends and family have caused me to be more appreciative of my life, and the life of other loved ones in my life.

    6. Don’t delay gratification

    We are often taught that we should delay gratification as long as we can. There are a lot of psychological studies which show that those who are able to delay gratification end up becoming more wealthy, healthy, and well-rounded (look at the “Stanford marshmallow experiment”). The concept was this:

    “In these studies, a child was offered a choice between one small reward provided immediately or two small rewards if they waited for a short period, approximately 15 minutes, during which the tester left the room and then returned. (The reward was sometimes a marshmallow, but often a cookie or a pretzel.) In follow-up studies, the researchers found that children who were able to wait longer for the preferred rewards tended to have better life outcomes, as measured by SAT scores,[2] educational attainment, body mass index (BMI), and other life measures.”

    Part of it is the “puritan work ethic” of Americans, and the Protestant/Christian notion that if we work hard in this life, we will enjoy the fruits of our labor later in our life (or after we die).

    But the problem is that many of us waste our times getting ready to live. We live for tomorrow, rather than for today.

    Think of all the people you know who say, I will work hard for 40 years, and one day retire at age 65, and have a comfortable retirement package, and then finally travel the world.

    Problem? What if you die at age 64? Then all those years were wasted in vain.

    A story I thought of; There was once a married couple that planned their entire life to travel the world. They were both super frugal, never went out, and never enjoyed themselves; thinking that once they retired, they could finally “start living.”

    Sadly, one they both turned their mid 60’s and were able to retire, the wife suddenly died of a heart attack. How sad, they should have spent their days living it to their fullest, and not banking all of their happiness on the future.

    Seneca gives great advice:

    The greatest obstacle to living a full life is having expectations, delaying gratification based on what might happen tomorrow which squanders today.”

    Now don’t misconstrue this as living a “YOLO” (you only live once) lifestyle. Don’t just go out get drunk, do drugs and have sex with strangers, and live irresponsibly. Rather, think of how you can be happy today; rather than happy tomorrow.

    I know a lot of photographers who have a dream of traveling the world, or going to Paris, Tokyo, wherever. But they spend their lives in a fantasy world, not being able to enjoy the opportunity to shoot their own backyard.

    Or I know photographers who have great ideas for photographic projects, but they get so swept up in the details and the concept, that they don’t actually go out and shoot it.

    So don’t delay your gratification creatively; live today. Think about the one small step forward you can make to make your photographic vision and project possible.

    Not only that, but think of what you can do to be happy, at this present moment. Perhaps that is counting your blessings, calling up a dear friend, going out to take photos, taking photos of what is right next to you, or jotting down project ideas, or starting to edit some of your images.

    Another practical way to live life (also from Seneca), which is to live your life, a minute at a time:

    “The present offers one day at a time, divided into minutes.

    So the next time you feel dissatisfied, lost, or curious– ask yourself, “What can I do for the next minute which will help advance my goals and happiness in life?”

    7. Don’t waste time seeking more

    “A man is never satisfied.” – Seneca

    What true words; enough is never enough. We never have enough money, enough power, enough prestige, enough friends, influence, cars, homes, cameras, lenses, gadgets, watches, bags (I have so many camera bags its ridiculous), “time-saving” appliances, social media followers, clothes, jewelry, purses, shoes, books, souvenirs, and of course– we never have enough time.

    But if we cut out all this materialistic bullshit from our lives, imagine how much extra time we would have. Why? Because the less money (and time online shopping) we spend, the more money (and time) we will have to do things we truly love; things that bring us true happiness and joy.

    Even 2,000 years ago– materialism ran rampant (in ancient Rome). Seneca shares how people towards the end of their lives often regret living a life of luxury and materialism:

    “They cry out that they have been fools, because they never really lived, and vow to live a true life if spared from their disease. Too late they realize what time they wasted pursuing worthless things, and how so much hard work seeking happiness from materialism was in vain.”

    Seneca also really looks down upon luxury:

    “Expensive vices fuel their blissful ignorance. Such a life of luxurious despair is beneath human dignity.”

    I’m a materialistic, shallow, self-serving American. I love my materialistic shit. My Leica makes me feel important, special, and “artsy.” My iPad makes me feel more creative. My Prius makes me feel eco-friendly and environmentally conscious (which is absolute bullshit). My love of “third wave” hipster espresso makes me feel important, informed, and sophisticated. The Nike’s I wear make me feel more confident and fashionable when I walk around town. My Lindberg glasses make me feel sophisticated and low-key, because only “true glasses connoisseurs” know the brand. I wear my North jackets with pride; knowing I have the ultimate in water and cold repellant, while still being functional/fashionable. I have far too much useless and superfluous knowledge about designer watches, sports cars, fashion brands, and sunglasses.

    I want to cleanse and purge myself of all this materialistic bullshit. I am a sucker for advertising, and I have been bombarded by it my entire life. But how do I break free from it?

    What has worked well for me is to avoid shopping areas at all costs.

    For example, I live close 4th street, a trendy high-end place in Berkeley, where old rich white people go to buy designer furniture and drink expensive coffee (ironically at Artis coffee, where I spend all my time in Berkeley with my homie Walter and others). Anyways, there is an Apple store on the end of the street. Without fail, I always go there, and am suckered into having a craving or a desire to buy something new. I see the new 27’’ iMac Retina, and I daydream of all the creative opportunities it will give me. I see the new (slightly lighter) iPad Air 2, and imagine myself pretending to be artsy at a cafe, with the golden back, sketching “important” ideas with my fingertip. I see the 15’’ Macbook Pro, and imagine what I would do with all that processing power, and how many more YouTube videos I can produce.

    The solution I need to do is avoid entering the Apple store (at all costs). That little 5 minute journey into the store might give me a week-worth of craving for expensive electronics (I don’t really need). I also try to remind myself how quickly electronics get outdated (look at a 4-year old iPad or iPhone and it looks like it is from a prehistoric time). But then remember when the original iPhone came out, how futuristic everyone thought it was.

    I am also a sucker for clothes. Whenever I enter a mall, I will somehow wander into UNIQLO or some hipster boutique (with $200 flannel shirts). I see these advertisements that sucker me into thinking that once I buy those expensive clothes, I will be more creative, artsy, and important.

    For example, Cindy’s younger sister works at the mall– and whenever we would go to pick her up, I would always happen to buy something at the mall (I didn’t need, and promptly returned the next day). Do I really need  new clothes? No, the purpose of clothing is to keep me warm from the cold, nothing else. Fuck fashion, nobody gives a shit of how I look (except my insecure self-ego).

    Enough is never enough for any of us.

    Even if we do achieve some success in life, Seneca reminds us:

    ”Hope begets more hope, ambition more ambition.”

    Furthermore, Seneca also tells us:

    “The higher up you go, the greater the fall.”

    Even though I have achieved some moderate “success” in my life; having done exhibitions with Leica and Fujifilm. Also having shown my work in Melbourne, Downtown LA, Dubai, Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Paris, Seoul, Cambodia. I’ve been interviewed for VICE, the BBC, Leica, Petapixel, Salon, The Candid Frame, and had work featured in Black and White Magazine and Popular Photography. I’ve done commercial work with Ford, Leica, Fujifilm, Ricoh, Olympus, Samsung, and I have also traveled to most of the big cities all around the world. I make my full-time living traveling and teaching workshops, and rubbing shoulders with other famous photographers.

    Yet it is never enough.

    I am still so jealous of those who are more famous and influential than me. I am jealous of Zack Arias, and the amount of influence and following that he has. I am jealous of Ming Thein, who is smarter than I am, and seems to make more money than I do. I am jealous of Steve Huff, who has more influence than me and a larger and more engaged community. I am jealous of Matt Stuart who is having his work featured all around the world with Leica. There are tons more people I am jealous of, not enough room here to include.

    “As soon as we have some success, we seek more.” – Seneca

    What is the solution to all of this? I need to learn how to be satisfied with what I have. I need to desire the life I already live, rather than looking up at those higher up on the mountain than me, hoping that  I was where they currently are.

    I need to stop bitching and moaning, comparing myself to others. I need to not compare myself with anybody; because my life situation is different from them. My circumstances, and my abilities are different from them. And no matter how rich, successful, handsome, or beautiful someone is– there is always someone else they are jealous of (or comparing themselves to).

    What is the problem of being jealous and coveting what others have?

    Once again to tie it back, it is a waste of time. Why should I be jealous — and waste my precious energy and time desiring the life that they have? Rather than sitting and plotting on how I can gain more money, power, and prestige; I need to look inwards and see how I can be use my (very short) time on Earth to make a difference.

    So how do we find more gratitude in our lives?

    One thing that has helped me; imagine myself from 5 years ago, and how much I would desire the life I currently live. My good friend (and manager) Neil Ta wrote this in a recent essay, “On Feeling Inadequate as a Photographer.”

    So I reflect and appreciate how far I have come. Even taking it a step further back; I reflect on how grateful I am to have the life I have now.

    I came from humble backgrounds; single mom with 3-part time jobs (cleaning houses, cashier, waitress), and not knowing whether the rent would be paid (it didn’t help that my dad didn’t work ever since I was 2 years old, or how he gambled away our rent money). I think about the fear that I had that we would be homeless the next month (a lot of stress for a 12 year old kid). I remember how frightened I was when I saw my parents fight, both physically and verbally. I remember how afraid I was when I would lock myself in my room, wishing that my parents would have money, and we could all live as happy family.

    I know this is cheesy and repetitive; but I think true happiness is to be happy regardless of your external circumstances. It is to be grateful for what you have, to be grateful for how far you’ve come, and how good your life is in comparison to the lives of others.

    Also another tip; imagine life as a race, and even though you see others ahead of you, you must turn back and look at all of those behind you. We all know the cliche; think of the starving kids in Africa. But at the same time think about all the people in America (or the West) that would envy your nice camera, smartphone, car, home, income, and lifestyle.

    I also try to remind myself whenever I bitch and moan about my “problems” in life, it is just a “first world problem.”

    Another embarrassing story; you don’t know how much time I wasted and anguished over whether I should buy an iPhone 6, iPhone 6 plus, Galaxy S6, or Galaxy Note 4. I seriously lost sleep over this. Eventually I got lucky; Samsung gave me a free Galaxy S6, and even after getting it; I would still envy my friends who had iPhone 6’s and 6 plus’s. Sometimes I need to slap myself in the face.

    My next experiment when I go back to Berkeley is this; trying to go a week without a smartphone. While traveling I have had this experiment; trying to uninstall an app a day. The other day I uninstalled Instagram and email from my phone. And wow, how much clarity of thought and happiness this has brought me. When traveling I only need a smartphone for Whatsapp and Google Maps; everything else is extraneous. Honestly, I probably can even do without those applications (but it is a luxury I enjoy).

    What I want to change back home

    So I want to practice what I preach; when I get home, I want to try to go a year without accumulating any more physical possessions. The only thing I might buy is a new laptop or computer; but I might see if I can just get by using my iPad and a keyboard. I will try not to buy any new clothes. I will try not to buy any more books (rather, enjoy the books I already own, and donate the ones I no longer read, or books that others would use better than I would).

    I don’t want to have any desires for any more materialistic crap, and spend more time with friends, family, loved ones, to shoot without concern about external recognition, to not desire a new camera or equipment, a new car, new electronic devices. I want to be perfectly content with what I have, count my blessings, and appreciate what I already have. Even more so; to cut down and edit down my life (giving away more of my possessions).

    I also want to eradicate the desire of wanting to be in a place other than Berkeley, of wanting more money, or wanting more comfort, of wanting to try out new restaurants, or to fall victim to any vices.

    Remember friend, death is approaching, one day at a time.

    Life isn’t short if we savor every minute of it, and live it to the fullest.

    Farewell.

    Your friend,

    Eric

    Written @ cafe in Stockholm. Aug 27, 2015 @ 3:14pm. After drinking an espresso (Nespresso), earl grey tea (with foamed almond milk), a long espresso (Espresso, with foamed almond milk), and a soy cappuccino at Cafe.

    My workspace at ilcafe, just when I finished writing this essay!
    My workspace at ilcafe, just when I finished writing this essay!

    Some life updates:

    The good news is that it looks like perhaps this weird throat-swelling thing was because espresso by itself is quite acidic, and caused some sort of acid-reflux that caused my throat to block up a bit. It seems adding some sort of “base” like almond milk (I’m lactose intolerant) has caused this to go away. I prefer espresso, but whatever– caffeine is caffeine.

    I’m excited to visit my friend Mattias for dinner tonight with his family, and also to start my workshop in Stockholm tomorrow evening! Also super excited to almost be back home to Cindy, I miss her dearly. Flying back to Berkeley on Tuesday.

  • On Feeling Inadequate as a Photographer (and the Worst Sony A7R II Review Ever)

    On Feeling Inadequate as a Photographer (and the Worst Sony A7R II Review Ever)

    A7R Test-11

    This article is written by Neil Ta, originally posted here. The views posted here are his and his alone and may or may not be shared by Eric or any other contributors to the website.

    My life is pretty good. I live in one of the coolest cities in the world, I have a lot of close friends, good family, an amazing girlfriend who loves me, and I’m beginning to think my photography business is sustainable after almost five years of hard work. I’m happier now than I have been for most of my life. But here’s the reality: I am just a blue collar photographer. I hustle my ass off to take photographs for people. If I don’t take photos, I don’t make money, I can’t pay my rent, and I end up homeless and get forced into a job as a fake pan-handling monk. I will likely never amass great riches from photography. And I’m ok with that, I think.

    Recently, I’ve been running into friends who’ve done really well for themselves. A friend still in his 20’s whose tech start-up is worth hundreds of millions of dollars, a close childhood friend who bought a new Porsche 911, several others who run successful businesses or are directors or VPs of large corporations, and everyone who seems to be living in a home larger than 400 square feet (that isn’t packed to the brim with camera equipment). In the photography world, I have friends who are massive industry icons with hefty social media presences. In comparison, I am a virtual nobody. At times, I can feel inadequate compared to them.

    A7R Test-7

    Don’t get me wrong, I’m incredibly proud of my friends’ achievements. They’ve worked extremely hard in order to get where they are. My jealousy is more a reflection of my own insecurities and life choices. So why is it that despite me being happier than I ever have been in my life do I still feel overwhelmed by the successes of others? I wanted to dive into this a little bit more, so I put pen to paper to help try to make sense of it and to find a solution. Here are some of the strategies I’ve come up with to deal with my feelings of inadequacy:

    Remember What Life Used to Be Like

    A7R Test-23

    Holy shit my life used to suck. It wasn’t long ago when I suffered from extreme anxiety. It got to the point that I would roll out of bed dreading to go to work. I had a lot of health issues and legitimately thought I was dying. I had underwent almost every medical test available to me. I didn’t know at the time that anxiety could manifest itself into physical sickness. The illness was largely due to the stresses and discontentment I experienced at my past job. I had been unhappy there for several years but just kept on hanging around hoping things would get better. They never did. When it was evident that things would be getting worse, I decided to leave and take extended time off to travel the world.

    A7R Test-8

    During my travels, I really connected with photography, deciding shortly after I got home that I would be pursuing it as a career. Most of my health problems disappeared and my life got exponentially better. When I look back on how unhappy my life was, I feel grateful that I’m no longer in that situation. The takeaway here is: anything is better than my life from five or six years ago.

    Remember Experiences are More Important than Things

    A7R Test-5

    I’ve tried really hard to value experiences in life over material possessions. Sure, I do love my cameras and shoes but other than that I don’t have a lot of material desires. I drive a 15 year old car, live in the previously mentioned 400 square foot hell hole, and still regularly wear clothes that are 5+ years old. With the money I save from living quasi-frugally, I am able to experience more things – regular travel, decent meals, and lots of Kekou gelato.

    A7R Test-1

    So while others make a boatload more money than I do, they may not have the flexibility to get away for extended periods of time during the winter or duck out of work to see their adorable niece and nephew. These are the types of experiences I value over things.

    Giving your money away can actually make you feel a lot happier as well. Each year I try to support the Rotary Wheels for Learning charity that helps purchase bicycles for needy children in Cambodia so that they have a means of getting to school. It brings me a lot of joy to know that my money is directly influencing the lives of others. Earlier this year, I paid my way to Cambodia and helped the Rotary team assemble bikes for hundreds of kids. It was incredibly enriching and an important reminder of why money is only good if it is used to buy life experiences over material possessions.

    The Money You Have is Never Enough but it’s More Than Enough

    A7R Test-13

    There are studies that show that after the necessities of life are taken care of, the amount of money you make plays little to no factor in your level of happiness. So for example, if you’re making $10,000 a year in Toronto your happiness level will likely be really low since that is not enough to meet the necessities of life. However, if you’re comparing the happiness of someone making $50,000 and another person making $1,000,000 it is likely there is no difference in their levels of happiness. In fact, the person making $1,000,000 is likely to be unhappier because their job would have greater stresses and demands.

    A7R Test-20

    Drawing from our own personal experiences, I think we can all remember happy times when we didn’t make much money. Think about what it was like being a broke college student. When you don’t have money, it can add a lot of stress in your life leading to unhappiness. But once you can meet the basic necessities of life, it really doesn’t have bearing on your overall contentment. Yet we believe that the money we have isn’t enough.

    Somewhere, Someone is Envious of You

    A7R Test-14

    Envy and jealousy are funny things. When I talk to my friends of their successes and I start to wish that Porsche they’re driving was mine, they will often respond back by saying they’re envious of my travel experiences and the flexibility/freedom in my work schedule and being your own boss.

    A7R Test-10

    Last week, I bought the new Sony A7R II camera. It is the hottest camera to hit the streets in years, with long waiting lists to get. It seems that every photographer wants it. I guess some people wish they had my camera, even though I’m more or less over it already (scroll down for my full review). So while I am drooling over my buddy’s Porsche 911, others are drooling over my camera and at the end of the jealousy chain is some poor kid with clean water and food envy. So no matter where you seem to be or what you appear to have or don’t have – there are others who want to be where you are.

    A7R Test-9

    So yes, I do sometimes feel inadequate in life. I know others have more stuff than me and are doing bigger and better things. There’s millions of photographers that are better than I am. But at the end of the day, I am happy where I am. When I started my photography career, all I wanted was to earn an honest living from it. I never thought I would see the successes I’ve experienced so far. I see progress with my photography and have a bit more clarity in my life direction. To my friends who are killing it: keep killing it! And to those who sometimes feel like I’ve felt this past little while, I leave you with some perspective from one of my favourite songwriters, Eddie Vedder: “I wish I was as fortunate, as fortunate as me.”

    Notes (+ A7R II Review): all images used to illustrate this post were taken haphazardly with the new Sony A7R II camera. The camera does exactly what cameras do. It is more similar to the camera you already have than it is different. It’s a nice toy. However, it is highly unlikely that my clients will notice any difference in what I deliver to them. Verdict: buy it if 1) you have enough in your bank account to buy it outright and to cover life expenses for at least three months 2) the differences in this camera compared to yours will result in new business and; 3) it provides greater shooting enjoyment.

    Personally, I would still prefer to use a Fuji X100T for personal work and as an everyday camera over the Sony A7R II. I wouldn’t completely replace my Canon 5D Mark III as my workhorse either because I can’t replicate the skintones I get from the Canons. Plus for the most part I don’t want to shoot weddings at 42MP. My computer will explode.

    Neil’s portfolio.

    Neil’s Instagram.

    Neil’s Xpan Blog.

    Neil’s Facebook.

    A7R Test-4

    A7R Test-21

    A7R Test-2

    A7R Test-12

    A7R Test-22

     

  • Small is Beautiful

    Small is Beautiful

    14001485096_2aa40031c2_c

    Read as a Google Doc or PDF.

    Dear Friend,

    I wanted to share with you some thoughts that are on my mind:

    The first thing that came to mind: “small is beautiful.”

    So I have a problem; I am inflicted with this American obsession that “bigger is better.” We want bigger houses, we want bigger cars, we want bigger bank accounts (more money), we want cameras with bigger sensors (more megapixels), we want bigger houses, bigger closets (to put in more of our shit that we don’t really need), bigger screens on devices (think of the iPhone 6 plus), and a bigger circle of influence (everyone wants to be YouTube and social media famous).

    One of the things that I learned from my 3 months abroad is this; all the material possessions I really “need” can fit into a backpack. The only things I truly “need” to be productive and produce information is a camera and some sort of typing device (can either be a smartphone or a laptop/tablet). As for my clothes, you probably already know that I only travel with two shirts (Uniqlo Airism) and two pairs of boxers (Exofficio) which quickly dry, as I wash them with shampoo in the shower every night. I only have one pair of pants (Uniqlo stretchy denim), and two pairs of socks (also quick-dry), and my trusty Nike Flyknit 4.0 (seriously the most comfortable and lightweight pair of shoes I have ever owned).

    I don’t know if I told you this yet either, but I am moving to Vietnam next summer, and going to live there for a year with Cindy. I have a lot of shit in my house that I can’t take with me, so what am I going to do?

    I have a plan; I want to go to Vietnam with no excess baggage. I only want to bring what I can fit into a single backpack (the trusty Thinktank Perception 15 I picked up in Aix-en-provence after I got my backpack stolen in Paris).

    So what am I to do? I have a shitload of photo books that are just chilling in the closet, and haven’t been read for ages. I know that some of them are sold-out and quite rare and expensive. Rather than selling them on eBay or Amazon, I have a plan; I want to start giving them away to friends and other street photographers I know would love and appreciate them. I want to breathe new life into these books, rather than hoarding them. Perhaps I can throw a big party, invite all my friends, and let my friends take all the books they would like. Not only that, but for them to pay it forward, by continuing to give them to other photographers who might want to read them. I don’t want people to treat books like it “belongs” to them (or anybody for the matter). I want books to be “common property” — and to treat them almost like a public library.

    And the thing is, is there a photo book that I truly love so much that I want to lug it all the way to Vietnam, and waste space in my tiny little backpack? To be honest, I don’t think there are any books that I truly love that much. My plan is this; to just bring my iPad and enjoy one of my favorite photographer’s images (Richard Avedon) on the free Avedon iPad app. I love photography books with all of my heart; I love the texture, the three-dimensionality, the feeling of flipping pages, the matte of the paper, the smell, and the feel of a physical object in my hands.

    But honestly at the end of the day, to me, the image is the most important thing. I don’t care if I see an image as a print, in a book, or on a screen. As long as the image is able to evoke some sort of emotional response out of me, that is good enough.

    Furthermore, I am lucky and blessed that all of my favorite photobooks can be seen online on the magnumphotos.com website.

    I also very much like this idea of purging all of my physical things and starting afresh. In-fact, I try to apply this line of thinking everyday I wake up. I think to myself, “If today I was born anew, and was able to live this day without any baggage from the past, how would I live this day differently?”

    A funny idea I had when I had my backpack stolen in Paris: what if I got my Leica stolen? Would I end up buying a new one?

    The thought was actually quite exciting. In-fact, I wish I did infact get my Leica stolen, to see how I could start all over from scratch.

    So this is advice I would give myself if I started shooting street photography all over again; just buy a digital Ricoh GR, and take photos of anything that interests you, without any sort of self-editing, or pressure or need to share or publish the images on the internet. To truly shoot for myself, and perhaps print out a few photos of the images that are truly meaningful to me. And also not to “chimp” and look at the photos, and let them “marinate” for at least a week (or better yet, a month) before looking at them.

    I don’t know if I would tell myself to buy unnecessary hard drives or any other excess baggage. I’d probably shoot all the photos as JPEG+RAW, and have Google Photos Auto Uploader to store the 2000px wide photos to the cloud for free. And for my favorite images, I would save the full resolution images to Dropbox or Google Drive, (perhaps also Flickr). And for my absolute favorite images, I would print them out and hand them to friends, family, or anybody who would enjoy them.

    I have long aspired to publish a photography book of my series of images, but the funny thing is that I find my ambition dampening. And it has given me a lot of peace of mind. I would love to publish a book one day, but  I’m not in any hurry or rush. I will let the opportunity present itself to me naturally.

    But what if I die in some freak car accident before I ever have a book of my own published? Honestly, I will be dead (so I would have no regrets). Not only that, but most of the people who follow me have already seen my photos online. So how much of me publishing my photos in a book is a self-vanity thing (trying to show off and preserve my “legacy”), or bringing some sort of value to the lives of others?

    I thought something else of last night; I actually prefer prints over photobooks. Why? Well, a print is much easier (and affordable) to give away as a present, that brings so much happiness and joy to others. I’m not sure if you know, but all my images are free to download on Flickr (full-resolution) for people to print themselves. People can also download my entire portfolio (and do whatever they want with them) on Dropbox and Google Drive. Oh yeah by the way, while you’re reading this, don’t forget to download all the free e-books on street photography on Dropbox or Google Drive. In-fact, I have compiled all of my materials for free (and convenient) downloads on the new “Downloads” section of the blog.

    I have no interest in making money off my prints. What  do I prefer? Making a few extra hundred bucks selling prints, or spreading happiness and joy by giving it away with “no strings attached?”

    To get back to the point, a print can be hung on the wall, admired everyday– whereas a photobook can only be appreciated when taken off the shelf, and looked at (with a nice coffee or glass of wine).

    I also had another random idea; I want to start sharing more of my photos as prints, to make a small little collection of 10 photos and print them on some thick paper, and to send them to people who might appreciate them. I shot around 80 rolls of Tri-X black and white film (pushed to 1600) in Europe this summer, and that approach might be suitable. I need to remind myself; less is more. I would rather have 10 strong images from 80 rolls of film, rather than a mediocre book. I remember what I learned from Mary Ellen Mark; each photo should stand on its own, and I want to strive for every photo I share to be “iconic.”

    I apologize for straying off the original point; that small is beautiful.

    So let me share some other ways that I feel that small is beautiful in photography (and life):

    1. Small laptop:

    The benefit? It is portable, you can carry it with you everywhere, and you can do more writing anywhere you would like. I had an 11 inch Macbook Air as my only machine for about 3 years, and the smallness of the screen (and how light it was) was a huge benefit for me. Because the screen was so small, I couldn’t multi-task. This allowed me to be more focused on the thing at hand. Whereas in the past when I had two 24-inch monitors on my desktop computer, I would multi-task so much and never get anything done.

    Multi-tasking is the death; simplicity is to have constraints.

    Focusing is easy when you can only have one thing on the screen at a time. I think my next machine is the 12’’ Retina Macbook, as it is (even) lighter than my old 11’’ Macbook air, and I don’t need that much computing power. In-fact, I would imagine the benefit of getting an “underpowered” machine is that I won’t get tempted to buy any new digital cameras (with tons of megapixels that require a strong machine). It should be good enough to look at photos shot on a digital Ricoh (which I think is the only 1 camera I want to bring to Vietnam).

    2. Small home:

    I have long lamented that I wish I had a bigger apartment; to have more room for my photobooks, to have a private office to do my photography work, and more space to feel open, free, and inspired.

    But I am quite fascinated with the idea of the “tiny home” movement; especially with the “life edited” tiny houses.

    Cindy and I used to live in a 2-bedroom apartment in Berkeley, paying around $1,800 a month (before utilities). We had a spare bedroom that we thought “would be nice” to have guests over. But in reality, we rarely had guests (only one guest every few months)– and that extra room caused us a lot of stress. We wondered whether it was a good idea to rent it out, to host an AirBnb, or else it would go to “waste.”

    The best thing we ended up doing was moving into a smaller 1-bedroom apartment (only $1,300 a month, with utilities included!) There have been so many benefits; we use our space more mindfully, we don’t accumulate shit we don’t need, and other practical stuff– it is easier to clean (fewer floor space to clean), the distance from the kitchen to the living room is much smaller (it is pretty much the same space), we have an extra $500 a month (we can actually afford to eat in San Francisco on the weekends!) and less stress about finances and rent. Not only that, but if I want to experience a bigger space, I just visit Artis, the local cafe with huge floor-to-ceiling windows and 2-story high ceilings. Why aspire to buy my own bigass modern house, when I can go to a cafe and enjoy the same experience for $2? (price of an espresso).

    One of our dreams is in the future to buy our own home. If we do so, I want it to be smaller than we need it to be, and to enjoy every square inch of the house the fullest.

    3. Small group of friends and photographers

    Another realization I had in my life recently; I don’t want to “network” anymore. I only want to spend time with people that I love and care about. I don’t need any more money, power, fame, or influence. All my basic needs are met (food, water, shelter), and the only other things I “need” include love, companionship, and friendship. Was it Aristotle (or perhaps Socrates) who said that “friendship is the ultimate good”?

    I once read, “You are the average of the 5 closest people to you.” That is a quote that has stuck with me for a long time.

    Another quote from Seneca: “He who travels constantly has many acquaintances, but a few true friends.”

    I want to start subtracting more from my life; to spend more time with people I care about, and less time with negative people, time-wasting people, and people who are just like dark clouds, doom, and gloom.

    All I want in my life is 5 good friends, and to give them all my attention, love, and energy. Quality over quantity.

    Similarly, I want to reduce the amount of photographers in my life, and who I am inspired by. I’ve studied so many of the masters of street photography, but there are only 3 who I want to consider being part of my “inner-circle.” They include:

    1. Josef Koudelka
    2. Richard Avedon
    3. Bruce Gilden

    At first I tried to think of 5, but I honestly couldn’t think of another 2 off the top of my head. Perhaps “3” is a better number than 5. So to redact my previous point; perhaps all I need in life is 3 really good friends.

    I was reading “Letters from a Stoic” by Seneca earlier, and he taught me all these great things on the topic of his second letter: “On Discursiveness in Reading”:

    One of his words of wisdom:

    “You must linger among a limited number of master thinkers, and digest their works, if you would derive ideas which shall win firm hold in your mind.”

    So applied to photography, I should only linger among a few master photographers, revisit their work, and thoroughly digest their work.

    Going back to that point that I mentioned earlier, here is the actual quote:

    “When a person spends all his time in foreign travel, he ends up having many acquaintances, but no friends. And the same thing must hold true of men who seek intimate acquaintance with no single author, but visit them all in a hasty and hurried manner. Food does no good if it leaves the stomach as soon as it is eaten; a plant which is often moved can never grow strong.”

    So what I need to do is subtract the number of photographers I am inspired in life by, and just thoroughly chew, digest, and absorb the inspiration and wisdom from the few master photographers I admire.

    But what if I get bored of their photography, and crave something new? The master Seneca gave me some amazing advice:

    “When you crave a change, fall back upon those whom you read before.”

    I have been applying this philosophy to books in general; whenever I crave new books to read, I simply re-read the books that most influenced my life (Letters from a Stoic by Seneca, Tao Te Ching by Laozi, and Meditations by Marcus Aurelius).

    Another random quote I got from Seneca (via the philosopher Epicurus): “It is not the man who has too little, but the man who craves more, that is poor.” That is a nice reminder for me to be contented with what I already own and have in life, and not strive for more.

    I also have an endless thirst for money and “security.” I am lucky in the sense that I have some control over my income. For example, if I want more money, I just can teach more workshops.

    But I have been wondering, how much money do I truly need? At what point do I stop teaching workshops? I came up wit a good rule for myself: “Would I do this activity if I didn’t get paid; and would do it for free?” If the answer is “yes”, it is an honorable activity that is worth doing. I am so lucky that I love doing workshops with all of my heart; I love bringing people together, helping build their confidence, and bringing joy into their lives. And yes, I have taught many free workshops in the past, with equal amounts of enthusiasm (as if I were being paid). So in the future, I plan on doing more free community-oriented workshops (especially for those who cannot afford them), give out more free scholarships, and continue to do “paid” workshops to pay the bills.

    Seneca also gave me some good advice about money:

    “Do you ask what is the proper limit to wealth? It is first, to have what is necessary, and second, to have what is enough.”

    So what is really “necessary” in my life? Paying for food (cheap, I can survive off eggs), paying for water (cheap, I can drink tap water), paying for rent (not as cheap in the San Francisco Bay Area, but still do-able).

    And what is “enough” in my life? The things I already own. I don’t need new clothes (two pairs of clothes is sufficient), I don’t need a new camera, I don’t need a new laptop (although it would be nice, as the keyboard on this $300 Lenovo Windows 8 laptop I bought at the airport in Lisbon has an unresponsive keyboard).

    I don’t need a new smartphone, I don’t need any new photobooks, I don’t need any new philosophy books, I don’t need any new friends, I don’t need more money, I don’t need to travel to any new places, I don’t need a fancy espresso machine (tempting, but I prefer going to the cafe), I don’t need to try out any new restaurants (already had amazing food from all around the word, how much more variety does my tongue need?)

    I don’t need more followers on social media (currently deleted all the social media apps from my phone, wow, what a great sense of serenity this has brought me), I don’t need more information (the less “junk-food” media I get from TV, magazines, and the internet, the better. One of the reasons I don’t own a TV, surf the internet and blogs”, or subscribe to magazines which are 80% advertisements), I don’t need appreciation or admiration from others (I should be content with myself).

    I don’t need to leave a legacy (we’re all going to die and be forgotten anyways), I don’t need a gym membership (pushups, one-legged squats, and chin ups are sufficient), I don’t need bullshit, fear, and negativity.

    Wow, I didn’t realize that there was so few things that I really “needed” in my life.

    4. Small geographic area

    Another idea I have been meditating on a lot; I don’t need to see the world. The whole world is in my own backyard.

    One of my problems is this; I always crave and seek novelty. I am never happy where I am. Even when I was in Istanbul, I remember when I was on Facebook and was jealous of my friend sipping a Corona on the sandy beaches of the Caribbeans. I am an ungrateful bastard. After all, how many other people in the world would be jealous of me being in Istanbul? I always want what is out of my reach, and am never satisfied.

    Once again Seneca comes to the rescue; he gave me this advice (which was initially written to his friend Lucilius):

    “Judging by what you write me, and by what I hear, I am forming a good opinion regarding your future. You do not run hither and thither and distract yourself by hanging your abode, for such restlessness is a sign of a disordered spirit. The primary indication, to my thinking, of a well-ordered mind is a man’s ability to remain in one place and linger in his own company.”

    Once again, my problem is that I always seek novelty in terms of my environment. Even though my apartment in Berkeley is lovely (I have a nice light-wood birch table that I got at the clearance aisle of IKEA that is smooth to the touch, and faces the railroad from my window, where I can see lots of trees, grass) I always crave to get out of the house, and to go to hipster cafes and do work. But I need to enjoy spending more time at home.

    But I always make excuses; I always tell myself that I can only get writing done at a cafe, because I prefer the company of others. But in reality, I can get writing done anywhere, and shouldn’t seek to always change my abode.

    For example, the last two days I’ve been here in Stockholm, I’ve enjoyed staying at my friend Brian’s home, without the need to go outside. After all, I got peace, quiet, access to superfast wifi (without feeling guilty to ask the barista for it), a toilet (no worries about people stealing my stuff at a cafe when I need to piss), free coffee and tea, and power outlets (I seriously get anxiety when my battery runs low on my laptop and smartphone). And damn; I have been productive. I’ve been able to focus and write an epic article on Mary Ellen Mark, the freedom and space to think and meditate on my own, and also to do some yoga, stretches, and exercise.

    I think I have come up with a small epiphany: The best cafe is your own kitchen. And the best place to write is wherever you are sitting. And the best place to take photos is in your own backyard.

    You also know me; I am an extreme extrovert. According to the Myers-Briggs personality test, I am an “ESFP” — which means that I gain energy from being in the company of others. But at the same time, I don’t want to distill my entire personality and human soul into 4 arbitrary letters, as my friend Lara taught me at a recent workshop I had in London. I want to be able to “remain in one place, and linger in my own company” (while enjoying it).

    So perhaps the solution is to learn to spend more time by myself. I still love to see my friends, and enjoy a nice dinner with people I love and care about. So perhaps the solution is this; block off all my time in the morning, and only dedicate that time for myself. Then meet friends in the afternoon or evening, and don’t work for the rest of the day.

    One lesson I learned from Nassim Taleb from his excellent book: “Antifragile” is to never plan a meeting a day in advance. Otherwise, I will feel like a prisoner. What if I start writing in the morning, and I get into a deep “flow” state, and can go on writing for another 5 hours, but I have a “meeting” or lunch appointment? Then effectively, my entire day is ruined.

    So I just need to make more white space in my life; fewer appointments, only with people I truly love and want to see.

    But how can I best enjoy my time alone? I can use time to read more, to write more (the thing that brings me the most satisfaction in life), to daydream more (take more naps instead of just bombarding my system with more caffeine and espressos), and to just chill the fuck out without feeling that I need to “do” anything and be “productive.”

    I often preach that “the best photos to take are in your own backyard.” Unfortunately, even I have a hard time sticking to this rule. Living in Berkeley, I see San Francisco as so much more interesting. Fortunately I have done a lot of urban landscapes in Berkeley, which brought me a lot of pleasure– especially with the “zen” nature of shooting 6×6 on the Hasselblad. To be honest, none of the photos that came out really pleased me (ironically enough, many of the urban landscapes I shot on my smartphone, I preferred).

    Now that I have been on the road for about 3 months away from home, and looking at Berkeley from a distance– it is such a cool place, ripe with so many photo opportunities. Surprisingly, a lot of people from Europe actually know where Berkeley is. Not only that, but historically Berkeley is famous for being the epicenter of the “free speech movement” as well as other socio-political and civil issues — tackling issues like racism and same-sex marriage. It is always easy to get jaded by your own hometown; but I have a dedicated plan when I get back home: to only shoot street photography in Berkeley for the next month, without any desire to shoot in San Francisco.

    The thing too is that there are very few photographers who have done substantial bodies of work in Berkeley. San Francisco, LA, and New York have already been shot to death. I want to shoot my own city with as much vigor and energy as possible; from the perspective of an insider, not an outsider.

    I was talking with my buddy Brian Spark and he brought up a good point to me; there tend to be two different types of photographers. First, there is the type of photographer who travels to exotic locations, and takes ordinary photos of interesting things. Secondly, there are photographers who take photos in their own boring town, but make them extraordinary. I want to be the second type of photographer.

    5. Small books/prints

    Another thing I discovered is that I actually prefer small prints and small photo books. I hate huge photobooks which are huge, expensive, and difficult to hold, and read.

    The smaller photobooks are more beautiful, more personal, more affordable, and more manageable.

    One of my favorite photobooks is Jason Eskenazi’s “Wonderland” — which is the size of a small paperback book. The pages fold flat (workss well with the horizontal spreads), and it is easy to take with you everywhere you go.

    Similarly, if you aspire to make huge prints, you have lots of problems. First of all, they are really expensive, difficult to frame (also expensive to frame), and you need a huge wall or space to hang them. Smaller prints (4×6, 8×12’’, my favorite sizes) are easy to carry around, give to friends, and to edit series or sequence projects. Because they are smaller, they force the viewer to hold the images closer to their faces, which forces them to be more engaged with the images, and for the viewer to try hard to look at the details. This is much more “interactive” than a big ass print in a famous gallery, which looks down at you (rather than you looking at it).

    So moving forward, I don’t plan on publishing my work as huge, expensive, “art pieces.” Rather, I want them to be small, simple, inexpensive, humble, and easily accessible to the masses.

    To conclude, I will just ramble off some other ideas where “small is beautiful” and much more preferable to big, fancy, and expensive:

    Benefit of small cameras: inexpensive, light, easier to carry with you, always with you, chance to catch more “decisive moments.”

    Benefit of small cars: cheaper, more fun to drive, better on fuel economy, easier to park, easier to wash, and less pretentious.

    Benefit of small phones: easier to text with one hand, smaller battery is a benefit (you learn to use your phone less, and not be a slave to your phone), cheaper (iPhone 6 plus and Note 4 “phablets” are quite expensive), fits more easily in the pocket.

    Benefit of small bags: you carry less shit with you, you probably will only bring one camera and one lens (and a few rolls of film or batteries), less strain on the shoulders and back, less expensive than bigger bags, easier to put under the space under your feet in planes.

    Benefit of a small (yet well curated) library: you only own the photobooks you truly love, don’t need to buy more shelves, gives you the chance to re-read more of your books, helps save you money, and saves space (especially if you live in a small apartment).

    Benefit of a small closet: you have less “decision anxiety” when deciding what to wear in the morning, you spend less money on clothes (you have less space to fill your closet with). Apparently Steve Jobs only had one “uniform” (black turtleneck, blue jeans) so he didn’t have to stress what to wear. Similarly, Barack Obama only owns two suits (black and navy blue) so he can reserve his “decision-energy” on more important things (like world politics).

    Benefit of small kitchen: you don’t accumulate useless “labor-saving” devices from IKEA, like blenders, onion choppers, avocado peelers, and waffle irons (honestly, how often do we use these appliances?) Also you have fewer cups, pots, pans, and dishes– so there is less stress of having them fitting neatly in the cupboards.

    Benefit of small bank account: it sucks to have little money in the bank account (I grew up not knowing if we’d be homeless the next month), but it is true that “hunger breeds sophistication” — that the fewer options and choices we have, we are forced to be more creative. For example, the concept behind Airbnb was that two guys had a space living room and air mattress, and thought it would be a good idea to rent their living room (and air mattress) to make a few bucks on the side. Also in the beginning, the founders of Airbnb didn’t have enough money to advertise their startup, so they came up with ingenious ways; like giving away free cereal boxes. Now they are a multi-billion dollar company. Almost all great inventions and ideas are out of necessity. Rarely do great ideas come from mega-rich individuals or companies swimming in millions of dollars for their “R&D teams.”

    Don’t have enough money for a fancy camera in photography? Harness the creative potential of your smartphone. Don’t have money to travel? Shoot your own backyard. Don’t have money for photobooks? See them online for free at magnumphotos.com. Can’t afford to print your own photo book? Either make them available online for free, or print them on-demand (blurb.com) so there is no startup cost.

    Benefit of small notebooks: you only write down your best ideas, are more frugal with your space, improve your handwriting, and easier to carry around.

    Benefit of small ambitions: you are rarely disappointed (preferably never disappointed), and you live a life more true to yourself, rather than relying on the admiration of others for self-fulfillment.

    Benefit of small storage space/hard drive: you delete excess crap, which forces you to “edit down” and focus on what is truly essential. If you have a phone with limited storage, this means following the “via negativa” approach of uninstalling one app a day, rather than trying to add a new app everyday. And the funny thing, the fewer apps I have on my phone, the more productive and focused I am.

    Let me leave you off with one of my favorite Steve Jobs quotes:

    “That’s been one of my mantras– focus and simplicity. Simple can be harder than complex: you have to work hard to get your thinking clean to make it simple. But it’s worth it in the end because once you get there, you can move mountains.”

    Farewell my friend, and Godspeed,

    Eric

    20150826_121404

    Written @ the home of Brian Sparks, with an espresso in the morning (damn Nespresso machine are convenient), an earl grey tea (with foamed almond milk), and another espresso (long) with some foamed almond milk on top. 12:15pm, 8/26/2015, before meeting up Brian and my friend Mattias for lunch :)

     

  • Conquer Your Fears (and Meet New Peers) in SF, New Orleans, and LA!

    Conquer Your Fears (and Meet New Peers) in SF, New Orleans, and LA!

    Group selfie from my Berlin Conquer Your Fear Street Photography Workshop!
    Group selfie from my Berlin Conquer Your Fear Street Photography Workshop!

    Dear streettogs,

    I am excited to share my new upcoming street photography workshops for the rest of the year! If you want to conquer your fears in street photography and meet new peers, don’t miss out on this chance to invest in your education!

    I know the workshop isn’t cheap, but I can guarantee you that it is an experience you will never forget, and something that will help inspire your photography for years to come. Not only that, but you will have a chance to pick my brain, get pushed outside of your comfort zone, and to connect with a community of other passionate street photographers in your own city!

    Below is my full upcoming schedule. If you have any questions, email my manager Neil at neil.ta@erickimphotography.com

    Excited to have you! :)

    August 7-9th

    Berlin –Introduction to Street Photography WorkshopSOLD OUT!

    August 14-16th

    London – Introduction to Street Photography Workshop – SOLD OUT!

    August 21-23rd

    London – Intermediate/Advanced Street Photography Workshop – SOLD OUT!

    August 28-30th

    Stockholm – Introduction to Street Photography WorkshopOPEN!

    September 16-18th 

    Seattle – Introduction to Street Photography Workshop in association with PopUp GPP Seattle  – SOLD OUT!

    October 2-4th

    San Francisco – Conquer Your Fears of Shooting Street Photography – OPEN!

    October 14-18th

    New OrleansWeek-Long Travel Street Photography Workshop – OPEN!

    November 6-8th

    San Francisco – Discover Your Unique Voice in Street Photography – OPEN!

    November 13-15th

    Downtown LA – Conquer Your Fears of Shooting Street PhotographyOPEN!

    November 20-22nd

    Downtown LA –Discover Your Unique Voice in Street PhotographyOPEN!

    You can learn more about my street photography workshops and see the before/after photos!

  • A Real and Unique Pleasure by Pierre Belhassen

    A Real and Unique Pleasure by Pierre Belhassen

    a129 copie

    (Words and Photos by Pierre Belhassen)

    I’m Pierre Belhassen. I started photography 10 years ago. After studying cinema, I was given a camera. I wanted to discover New York City. It became a revelation in my life. I realized that there are endless possibilities and different ways to reinvent reality. For me, there was no doubt. I felt this inner calling which gave sense to everything.

    (more…)

  • How to Love Your Haters

    How to Love Your Haters

    12892992504_ee03bbf43e_c

    Read as a Google Doc or download as PDF.

    Dear Ming,

    I wanted to write you this letter regarding all the trolls and “haters” you have been getting over on your blog. I have a lot of advice for you– advice that has helped me deal with all the negativity on the internet. None of this is meant to sound preachy at all. We both deal with the same issues, and this is advice that has helped me, and I wish to help you too, my brother.

    First of all, I know getting trolled sucks. It is really shitty. You put in all this effort, energy, love, sweat, blood, and tears into your posts, and people still have something negative to say.

    Out of all the photography blogs on the internet, there is none as comprehensive and in-depth as yours. Sometimes I read your articles, and I think to myself, “How the hell does he blog so prolifically, while still doing editorial work, flying all around the world, taking care of his family, answering 200+ emails a day, make powerful images, respond to every comment, without doing cocaine?”

    I say this as a compliment. There is no harder hustler in the photography blog-o-sphere than you. I truly admire you pursuing your passion in photography as well. Having worked in the corporate world of bullshit, office politics, and the chase of money — I know how difficult it is to hustle as an entrepreneur.

    First, I would take it as a badge of honor that you have all these trolls on your blog. It is a huge sign of your success, and honestly– most of this negativity comes from jealousy. Think about all the people in the world who would love to be in your shoes. You are artistically gifted, a shrewd businessman, a hustling entrepreneur, a prolific writer, and someone constantly pushing his boundaries. Most people are dissatisfied with their lives, being stuck in a cubicle. They are insecure about their lives and their photography, and they simply project their frustrations upon you. When you are such an influential person on the internet, it is easy for people to throw punches as you. As photography bloggers, we are easy punching bags (unfortunately).

    But also know that if you weren’t successful and doing such a good job, nobody would be trolling you. After all, at the end of the day, you only have two options in life: to either be judged (usually negatively) or ignored. I think it is much better to be ignored.

    Secondly, I know this is really fucking difficult, but think about the positive people who love and support what you do, rather than the trolls. Trust me, I’m the same– one negative comment can cancel out ten positive comments. But at the end of the day, if you can touch and inspire one individual, it is all worth it.

    I know that sometimes it is hard to visualize the positive impact you have on the world and society. You talk a lot about gear, but you do it from a unique standpoint that you emphasize that both the gear and your artistic vision is important. A painter can’t paint without knowledge of different brushes and different paint mediums such as acrylic, oil, or watercolor. Whoever think that you are a “gearhead” is obviously missing the point.

    I think at the same time, you are concerned and worried about having people getting the wrong idea; that photography is more about the gear, rather than the art of photography. Don’t get me wrong, you’re going to give people GAS whenever you write a camera review. That’s the nature of the beast though; you are going to help people who are curious about a new camera, but at the same time, you’re going to cause dissatisfaction with people who don’t have the newest and greatest equipment. That’s why I personally try not to blog about gear much anymore, as gear is constantly being outdated, and at the end of the day, all cameras are more similar than dissimilar.

    I think your best articles are the ones in which photographers 200 years from now will find value in. Your articles on creativity, inspiration, and travel are the ones which inspire me the most. I also feel that perhaps moving forward, focus more on these. You are a guy who has such limited time anyways; I also know that you’re more passionate about teaching and spreading the love of photography (not just the gear).

    Another tip that has helped me deal with negative people online (and offline); imagine them like barking dogs.

    Have you ever walked on the streets and a dog started to bark at you for no reason? Does that bother or piss you off? Of course not. Why not? The dog is just a dog; it doesn’t know any better.

    Similarly, have you been on a plane and there is an annoying baby crying? Does that bother you? Yeah definitely, it disturbs your sleep, and peace of mind. But do you blame the baby or get angry at the baby? Of course not. Why not? Because the baby doesn’t know any better.
    Similarly, some adult human beings are also like crying babies. Imagine all of these negative trolls online like little babies crying and pounding away at the keyboard. Visualize how hilarious that looks, and it will make you laugh at negative comments or emails, rather than make you feel frustrated, upset, or depressed.

    Another piece of advice that my friend Mijonju told me, who probably get 10x more trolls than I do on YouTube:

    Have you ever been on the bus or subway, and there is a random crazy homeless guy (or psychologically unstable person) who randomly comes up to you, and yells at you while waving his hands? If so, how does that make you feel? For me, I just look at him weird and not take it personally. Why don’t I take it personally? Because he is crazy, and probably does that to everybody. I just happened to be a random target. I then just try to ignore what happened, and carry on with my day.

    Similarly, I honestly think a lot of people have some serious psychological problems. You never know if this online troll is bipolar, just experienced a death in the family, had a partner or spouse leave (or cheat on them), or whatnot. If you think of your trolls as sad, lonely, depressed, angry, or frustrated brothers and sisters, you will pity them and feel bad for the instead of feeling anger or resentment towards them.

    Let me tell you a story. I’ve always wondered about the psychology of “haters” out there, and have discovered some interesting insights about humanity.

    This one time, I received a really negative comment on one of my articles. The user name was like something like “Eric Kim is a con artist” and the comment read: “Eric Kim is rubbish. His street photography fucking sucks, and he is a horrible human being. He is a con artist, and anybody who signs up for his workshop is getting ripped off.”

    At first my knee jerk reaction was, “What the fuck? Who the hell is this guy, and what did I ever do to him?”

    I was curious who this person was, and if they ever left any comments in the past. I use DISQUS to power my comments, and there is a feature which allows you to search comments based on ip address. Funny thing: this guy left 2 comments, one about two years ago, and one as this hateful message. Even funnier? His prior comment was very positive and supportive. Even funnier? He was a street photographer I hugely admired and respected, and even collaborated with in the past before.

    I was puzzled. Why would he be so negative and mean to me, when I was never mean or negative to him?

    I went to his blog to investigate if everything was okay on his end. Funny enough, I discovered that he started teaching street photography workshops too, and perhaps he saw the workshops I taught as a threat.

    So I emailed him, asking him what I ever did to insult or hurt him. I told him how much I respected him, and how much his comment hurt me.

    He then replied and profusely apologized, and let me know that he suffered a death in the family, how his girlfriend left him, and how he has been psychologically sick and depressed. He asked me to delete the comment, and please to forgive him.

    I did so, and realized an important truth; what others say about you is never about you. It is always about the other person.

    Don’t feed the trolls

    In a recent post, you wrote an article about your gear, and tried to reiterate how you’re just trying to carry less stuff in the field:

    “I am not a gearhead for the sake of it or because I’m obsessed with the gear: it’s because I know what I want/need, and you often don’t know which compromises are workable and which are not until you get the stuff in the field. I’d like to carry less and be more focused, but I don’t want to compromise on image quality or printability. I cannot help but think that like our current government, it’s time for yet another major cabinet reshuffle at MT HQ…I don’t know which direction it’s going to take yet, but there’s more than a niggling feeling there will be both a lot of casualties and some unexpected rationalisations at the end of it.”

    Not sure why, but it looked like you had a lot of negative emails and comments. You followed up by writing:

    “Coda: There will be one more change. After the number of incredibly rude emails, messages and comments following the recent post, I have decided I am going to stop pulling punches. If you want to troll, go join the rest of your breathen under the bridge at DPR. If you are immature enough that your camera is your religion and you cannot distinguish between objectivity and personal attack, or had parents who never taught the basics of civil interaction, you will be dispatched and banned. If you want to criticise, remember that your own work is also out there for evisceration – or if it isn’t, then you have zero credibility. It seems to be far too easy to forget that the internet does not absolve you of manners and you are a guest here. I do this for free, and I reserve the right to a) stop when this is no longer enjoyable, and b) kick out those who seem to delight in making life a pain for everybody else. That is all.”

    I read that follow up from you, and felt your pain. You’re putting in all this work and effort for free; what gives others the right to criticize you? Why don’t they just stop reading your blog, and just move on instead?

    But this is what the trolls want; they want you to be negatively hurt. They are like bullies on the playground, they want to see you cry.

    I honestly think the best way to deal with negative criticism is to just not acknowledge it, and to ignore it. Yeah I know, easier said than done. But here are some mental models I’ve learned from the master Stoic philosophers which helped me greatly (from my hero, Seneca, who wrote this nearly 2,000 years ago):

    Let’s do another thought experiment: if there was something that pissed you off, would you vent your frustrations and anger on a rock? Of course not. Why not? A rock wouldn’t respond, and it would not be worth your time.

    Similarly, if you don’t even acknowledge negative criticism, the trolls will eventually go away. Why? They will find it has no effect on you, and they will feel like idiots, and be embarrassed, and love on.

    Another tip: self-depreciating humor helps tremendously.

    I remember when I was in high school, the worst thing you could call another guy was “gay”, “faggot”, or “fag.” Most guys would be fucking pissed off or hurt when they heard that. I know I did, and I was bullied a fair amount growing up.

    But what was the antidote? The next time bullies (or my best friends) would call me a “fag”, I would take the piss out of myself by flicking my wrist (the politically incorrect way to imitate a “gay person”) and say, “So what if I love to suck big black cocks?” Then the bully would be shocked and follow up by saying, “What the fuck? You sick homo” and try to take another blow at me by saying, “Well, I fucked your mom last night!” Instead of getting pissed off, I would just give him a weird look and say,  “Dude, that’s pretty gross. If you like to fuck old women, good for you.” Then the bully would look like an idiot, feel embarrassed, and move on.

    So similarly, you have no need to “defend” yourself regarding being a gearhead or whatever. There is also no need for you to write a disclaimer and publicly state that you’re not a gearhead. Why not? Because you know you’re not.

    It’s almost like writing an article and saying at the end of the article, “By the way, I’m not black, I’m Asian.” Anyone who thinks that you’re black is either a) Colorblind, or b) Confused.

    Perhaps the next time someone insults you or calls you a “gear head” just try out self depreciating humor. Instead of defending yourself, just say something like, “I like to collect Ferrari’s too.” Or say, “But all of my cameras keep me warm at night.” Or if anyone insults your writing style, you can say, “I’m also a horrible cook” (I’ve used this one before).

    Don’t ruin your own self serenity

    At the end of the day, insults are nothing but words. And what are words? Simply vibrations in the air. How can vibrating air hurt you physically? Any sort of mental anguish you get is more of how you process that information and interpret it. Take away your interpretation of a negative criticism and the pain goes away.

    What is a negative criticism or hateful comment in reality? If people write you a hateful email, break it down into physical elements. The “hater” is nothing but an ape-like creature with these appendages called “fingers”. These fingers of his (or hers) will be moving through the air, and hitting little plastic squares called a “keyboard”. This keyboard will then interpret these keys into 1’s and 0’s and input them into the computer. The computer will then decipher this into words, and sentences. Then the email provider will once again interpret this data and relay it into your inbox. Then when you open up the email and read it know that the words you read are nothing but 1’s and 0’s. How can numbers hurt you or have any negative impact on you?

    Ultimately you can’t control whether or not people will say negative things about you. But what you can ultimately control is how you interpret what others say about you in either a positive or negative way.

    I also have another personal rule (that once again, I learned from Seneca). The rule in ancient times was this: wait at least 1 day before deciding to beat your slave. In modern times I interpret it is as this: wait at least 1 day before responding to a negative comment or email. This way, it helps me be more objective when responding, than emotional.

    Usually after waiting one day the sting from the negative comment goes away and there is no longer any need to respond. In the cases that I do want to respond, I try to treat the “hater” as a person as a benevolent teacher, and try to convert them from an enemy to a friend.

    So I’ll respond by telling them that I appreciate their message, and appreciate their love and consideration for trying to help me. I then say that I’ll try to incorporate their feedback into future articles I write, and for them to please continue giving me “constructive feedback.” I then end the email with a smile face and tell them to take care, to continue their passion in photography, and give their loved one a hug (no matter how nasty someone is, there is still people they love and care about).

    What usually happens? They either never respond or they respond and apologize for being harsh, and they end up being positive and supportive. When life gives you lemons, make lemonade.

    Another practical tip: wait at least a week before reading any of the comments on your blog. This is what I do. Why?

    When you write something immediately, you’re emotionally attached to what you wrote. Inevitably there will be at least 1 negative comment or critique. So by waiting at least a week before reading comments you can focus on future articles you want to write, while also considering your reader’s feedback. Not only that, but you can be more objective when considering reader feedback. The two comments you usually get on the blog are either people who say a) “You’re awesome!” or b) “You suck!”. Both are equally useless. So don’t be too overjoyed when getting a positive comment, yet don’t be too gloomy when getting a negative criticism.

    Getting elbowed

    Have you ever been walking somewhere, and someone accidentally elbowed you in the back of the head? Yeah it sucks. It hurts. But you don’t get angry at the person because it was an honest mistake or accident.

    I feel there are also a lot of people out there that “accidentally” hurt you from their feedback. Some people have asperger’s syndrome, or are slightly autistic and have a difficulty understanding the feelings of others, or “social tact.” But what if they are a “normally functioning” person, that isn’t diagnosed with any mental illness? It technically doesn’t matter, because they obviously have something wrong with their mind if they spew negative hate on you.

    That is all the advice I have at the moment. If I come up with more ideas, I’ll send them over.

    But yeah man, what you’re doing is fucking awesome. You’re living the dream life, a life that many envy and wish they lived. Be grateful for the privileged position you have. You’ll always have “haters” no matter what. Even the Beatles, Picasso, Andy Warhol, and all the great artists have had “haters.” Even the most noble people in history who had no malice towards anybody (Jesus, Socrates, Gandhi) had “haters” and we’re killed for their beliefs. Consider us lucky, we will never be killed for our beliefs (hopefully), the worse is that people might spit upon us or call us bad names. But how can the drool or barking of a dog hurt us? Treat the haters like dogs that need love, support, and rehabilitation. Haters are just sad and lost souls that need a hug. Because at the end of the day, no matter how negative a person is, they still desire two things in their life: a) To avoid pain and suffering and b) To be loved and appreciated.

    I wish I could wear a shirt that says, “I love my haters” and whenever someone said anyone negative about me, I could meet them up for a coffee and just “hug it out” with them. In fact I have met many “haters” of mine in real life, and after some fried chicken and beer, we became good friends. Not only that, but these once “enemies” have turned into my most loyal friends.

    So carry on and do the amazing work that you do. You are never going to please everybody. But as a fellow “blogger” to you, I highly admire you and what you do. You are an inspiration to me, and know that I am one of  your fans. And at the end of the day, even an audience of one is sufficient.

    Also know that I’m always here to love and support you. You are a fellow brother, and as much as we hate to admit it, all of our readers (the positive and negative ones) are also our brothers and sisters in this journey of life.

    So keep smiling, and whenever you get any more future negative criticisms, don’t forget to continue to smile and thank your haters.

    Let’s meet up the next time I visit Kuala Lumpur, let’s have some nasi lemak, a nice espresso, and I’ll tell you face-to-face how much of a “gear head” you are ;)

    Lots of love at 50,000 feet in the air (in transit from London to Stockholm),

    Eric

    P.S. next time try out Norwegian air, they have free wifi onboard! And the soy “flat white” from Pret-a-manger isn’t too bad either. 7:34am, 8/24/2015

    You might also like these other other articles I wrote as a form of self-therapy:

  • 7 Lessons Josh White Has Taught Me About Street Photography (and Life)

    7 Lessons Josh White Has Taught Me About Street Photography (and Life)

    5751088405_f47d0cf619_o

    Read as a Google Doc or download as PDF.

    Hey Josh,

    I just wanted to write you this letter wishing you a happy (belated) birthday, and the lessons in life you’ve taught me, and how much I appreciate your love and friendship.

    Shit, I still kind of forget how we first met “virtually.” Was it on your wordpress, Flickr, or somewhere else? Regardless, I remember when I first saw your “bokeh-licious” photos, I was drawn less to the bokeh, and more to the emotions in your photo.

    As a Korean-American, I have always had this romantic view of Korea, especially Seoul. I have always felt like kind of an outsider– that I was never fully accepted as being “Korean”, because my accent sucked (I sounded like an American), and culturally I was a lot more American. I remember whenever I visited Korea, I would always feel massive amounts of shame not feeling “Korean enough”, and the sense of alienation I felt as a 2nd-generation Korean-American “gyopo”.

    Somehow your photos really spoke to me. I think you felt a similar way, as a Canadian outsider, living in Korea. You were probably enjoying a pretty comfortable living teaching English, getting a sweet free place to stay, but still– you know, Korea is one of the most xenophobic and nationalistic countries in the world. Even though you made good friends, you were never fully “accepted”, nor integrated into Korean society. That must have given you a lot of pain, stress, anxiety, and frustration.

    I also forget how we first met “IRL” (in real life). Was it in Seoul or Toronto? Think it was Seoul, when we did the Leica workshop together. Anyways, when we first met, you were really like a “brother from another mother.” Your views on life correlated with mine spot-on, and the sense of “realness” and down-to-earthness made my soul sing. We’ve also had so much fun that other time we did the workshop together in Toronto, and we hung out with Neil and would just talk about random shit. Good time man.

    But I wanted to let you know how many lessons you’ve personally taught me about photography, life, friendship, and more.

    First of all, you’ve taught me the most important thing in life is friendship, relationships, and connections– not photography.

    dsc00043_1

    I remember how difficult it was when your father passed away, and how tragic it was. Regardless, it gave you a huge revelation, which also gave me a huge revelation. You said something like:

    “Why is it that we use these $10,000 cameras to take photos of strangers, when we take photos of our loved ones with smartphones? It should be the other way around.”

    As shitty as it was that your father passed away before he should have, know that this realization you have had truly changed my life (as well as thousands all around the world). It taught me to truly not take any of my friends or family for granted, and it made a huge shift in my photography. I no longer took shitty snapshots of Cindy or my mom, friends or family anymore– but rather tried to take the best photos of them on my Leica. I learned to cherish every moment with them, knowing that sooner or later, death is going to take them all away from me.

    Secondly, you’ve also taught me that at the end of our lives, we’re not going to give a shit about the photos we’ve made, but the friendships we’ve made.

    dsc00563

    I remember us talking how we can both image one another being 80 years old, sitting at some cafe on the patio, drinking coffee, complaining and moaning about the world of photography and all the “new guns”, and throwing rocks at little kids outside, and reflecting on our life’s journey together. We will reflect on all the difficulties we endured in life, the heartbreaks, the deaths of loved ones, but also the fun times we taught together, had beer and fried chicken together, and the great conversations we’ve had about life while loitering for hours with just one coffee in Seoul.

    You’ve really taught me that the friends I’ve made through photography far outweighs any photos I will take in my life. After all, who gives a shit about photos? They are perishable, and after we die, nobody is going to care about them. But there is nothing more immortal than friendship. Love your post you wrote on it with shooting with Neil in Busan.

    Thirdly, you taught me that at the end of the day, it doesn’t matter if you shoot film or digital, as long as you shoot with heart, passion, soul, and that you enjoy the process.

    l1010519

    I know we both are massively afflicted with GAS, and we always switch from film to digital, and back and forth. We have this strange love-hate relationship with our cameras, and the other physical possessions we own. We are both suckers to advertising and fancy shit, like our strange obsession with leather backpacks and other “artisanal” goods.

    We know that material stuff doesn’t make us happy, yet we are both afflicted. Yet, talking to you has always helped ease some of the mental suffering I have inside. We both jump from Ricoh, to Leica, from black and white to color, from digital to film, and even fucking around with medium-format. But at the end of the day, nobody even can tell whether our shots are film or digital, and neither should we care. Regardless if your photos were shot on film or digital, they still have a signature “Josh White” look; they exude emotion, soul, and empathy for your subjects.

    Honestly, we’ve never going to find the “perfect” camera, lens, or setup for our gear. But we’re both going to continue to enjoy the process, and try to temper one another’s “GASSINESS” as we grow older together.

    dscf7585

    Fourth, you taught me to photograph my “muse” (aka Cindy) with more intensity, love, and care. Seeing the photos you take of Areum really inspire me so much. You’ve taught me that I don’t need to only shoot “street photography”, but that the best subject to photograph is my own life– and those closest to me. “Personal documentary” as Anders Petersen calls it (someone who we both love). After all, at the end of our lives, the photos we shoot of Areum and Cindy are much more close and personal than any photos we’ve taken of strangers. I think ultimately the photos we take of Areum and Cindy will be the best “project” or “body of work” at the end of our lives.

    12747726363_9fd123de10_o

    Fifth, you’ve taught me and inspired me to bleed more onto the page when writing, and to make my writing (and photography) more personal.

    Whenever I read your blog (the only photography blog, or blog in general I read), you really pour your emotion, heart, and soul into whatever you write. I feel like I’m having a conversation for you. It feels so real, so genuine– so you. You really wear your heart on your sleeve, and your viewers feel like they are a part of your life. Through your blog, I have followed you through your ups-and-downs in your life; death, love, heartbreak, depression, joy, and self-seeking fulfillment.

    Whenever I write an article for the blog, I try to think of you– and treat it almost like a letter that will also help and benefit you. And recently I’ve been thinking of making the blog more personal, and it seems that others have really responded well to this. So I will continue to follow in your footsteps, and to continue to bare my soul on this blog, and through my photography.

    img_3917

    Sixth, you’ve taught me that I need to first enjoy my life, and then secondly be a photographer.

    I remember that whenever I would go out with a camera, it would be like a hunt, and I had to go “take” photos. But you taught me that it is much better to just enjoy myself; to hang out at cafes, at bars, meet up with friends, eat Korean BBQ, and just take snapshots of my life. You’ve taught me the secret to making better photos is to just enjoy my life more, and to just document what I experience.

    I remember you said something like, “I don’t ‘do’ taking photos anymore” — and that really struck a bell with me.

    Ironically enough, ever since I’ve followed your advice, I have been getting better shots. I no longer force myself to go out for hours at a time, and endlessly wander trying to capture “the decisive moment.” I am much more relaxed now, and let the shots come to me, wherever I am. I just am diligent about carrying my camera on my neck, so I can take that shot if the moment arises.

    jvnbhjjb-2-01

    Seventh, you’ve taught me how to “kill my babies.” I love how we randomly chat with one another on Kakaotalk and message each other shots, and we can just be brutally honest with one another, without any concern of hurting one another’s feelings. I respect your opinions so much, and you have really helped shape my style and vision in my photography. I love it when you told me how you liked my color work, and how you think I should proceed shooting more color “street portraits”, as well as more portraits of Cindy. I respect you as a human being and a photographer, so getting advice from you in terms of what direction to take my photography gives me a lot of confidence, solace, and happiness.

    I was going to write 10 things you have taught me about street photography and life, but I ran out of ideas, haha. But honestly, 7 is more than enough, in-fact, I  heard that it is easier to remember 7 digits than 10 (that is why in America phone numbers are only 7 digits long).

    But anyways, this is a personal letter to you (that thousands of random people on the internet are also going to read haha). No but seriously, thank you for all the love, support, guidance, and friendship you’ve given to me the past few years.

    Whenever I get a message from you, you always brighten up my day. It is so funny, I’ll be with Cindy and checking my phone and she will say, “Eric, why are you suddenly smiling so much?” I then feel embarrassed for a second, and will tell her that I got a message from you. She then goes, “Oh, you and Josh are so cute together!” She also was so happy to see how much fun we had together in Korea together. And also a nice memory (to boost your ego), remember whenuj I told you that she looked at your Flickr randomly and said, “Hmmm, Josh is actually really good!” And trust me, she doesn’t give false compliments at all, and she has a great eye.

    dsc04154_2

    So never doubt yourself and your photography. Remember to enjoy the process. Fuck whether you shoot film or digital. Just enjoy yourself and have fun. Who cares what others think of your photography, know that I’m always your biggest fan. And in terms of having an “audience” for our work, I honestly feel that as long as we are friends, we will be enough of an “audience” for one another. If I can make photos that please myself and please you, that is enough for me.

    Farewell my friend, have a kickass day, hope you get more hits on your blog (haha) and more followers on your Flickr and Instagram (don’t know if you have notifications on your iPhone turned on, but hope it buzzes nonstop! haha).

    This sounds totally douchey, but maybe you can do a similar post on your blog about what I’ve taught you about street photography and life? Might be an interesting comparison.

    Anyways, excited to collaborate more brother. Take care of Areum, your mom, and know that whenever you are feeling sad, lonely, or lost– I’m always here to support you and share my heart with you.

    Here are some fun snapshots and memories, haha– good times:

    46958_10101006695551421_317448811_n 210652_10153076048865601_1698042380_o 411748_351732644842870_1794516654_o 1015893_10102368028139446_1873963003_o 10476574_10103591397986466_4223911897940422058_o 10483819_10103591396369706_6919630770103230897_o 10497497_10103591398380676_4151589790195915584_o 10506742_10103591398769896_4043766117666420880_o 10560560_10100276009237142_8482162579781845262_o 10547931_10103591396100246_3227559174289495907_o

    Love always,

    Eric

    Written @ my friend Liz’s house in Leeds, Friday, Aug 21, 10:33am, 2015, with an espresso (I’ve found as long as I limit my coffee to just one a day, I don’t get that weird throat swelling acid reflux shit). Let’s chat soon bro, peace out.

    Make sure to check out Josh’s work:

  • Streettogs Academy Assignment No. 14

    Streettogs Academy Assignment No. 14

    SA14ANNOUNCEMENT

    Cheers to another assignment wrapped and here’s a new one to keep everyone in Streettogs Academy moving, shooting, and perhaps for this assignment, following the beat!

    (more…)

  • On the Emptiness of Social Media Fame

    On the Emptiness of Social Media Fame

    16214812012_c2aa1a7a23_c

    Read as a Google Doc or download the PDF.

    Dear friend and fellow streettog,

    I went to sleep last night, and woke up this morning in beautiful Leeds, England, and suddenly this story came to mind. I would like to share you this story if you don’t mind.

    I forgot where I first heard the story– it is definitely from one of the Stoic philosophers. Unfortunately can’t figure out whether it was from Seneca, Epictetus, or Marcus Aurelius. But anyways, here goes the story:

    There was once a very skilled artist, who made the most beautiful paintings, that amazed whoever saw them. However he was quite obscure, and nobody really knew who he was. One day, a man approached him and said to him something along the lines of:

    “Master, aren’t you sad or frustrated that you possess this amazing skill, yet people from other countries, continents, and nations cannot see or appreciate your work?”

    Upon this, the master artist says this in response:

    “I am happy with some, I am happy with one, and I am happy with none.”

    (Drops the microphone)

    To translate this, the master artist said he was happy with some people liking his work, one person liking his work, or none liking his work (besides himself).

    My start in photography

    When I started photography, I started off in “social media” in 2006, before Facebook, Flickr, and certainly before Instagram was around. The only type of “social media” were “photo blogs”, where you would upload a photograph a day for people to admire and comment on.

    This was before “likes” or “favorites” were mainstream, so the amount of love you would get were to get a lot of comments.

    At first, I shot to please myself. I had a little Canon point-and-shoot digital camera, and I loved just taking random snapshots of whatever I found interesting.

    Soon as time went on, I discovered all these other photographers on the internet who created these amazing “bokeh” shots, with really high image quality. I wanted to create similar images, so I got a Canon 350D (Rebel XT), and eventually a 50mm 1.8 lens.

    Once I started to get more “serious” with my photography, I wanted to share my photos with the world. I wanted them to be loved and appreciated, as I saw them like my children.

    My start in “social media”

    So when I started off in social media, I had no idea what I was doing. The first obvious thing was to make a photo blog, and to aim to get lots of people to see my work (page views), and to get lots of comments (to feel loved and appreciated).

    So after I setup my photo blog, I wondered to myself: “How can I get more pageviews and comments?”

    I first started off visiting lots of other photoblogs I admired, and started to leave them meaningful and in-depth comments (with the hidden hope that they would also go back to my photo blog, and comment on my photos as well).

    In the beginning, this was brilliant. I made a handful of good (virtual) friends in the photoblog community, and their constructive criticisms and feedback really helped me grow and develop as a photographer.

    Chasing fame

    But after a while, I started to crave fame. There were tons of “top photoblog lists” on the internet, and I became massively jealous and envious of how many followers and comments they got on a daily basis.

    In the beginning, getting even 1 or 2 comments brought me extreme joy (wow some people actually care about my photos!) However once I saw others having 20, 30, or even 50 (!)+ comments, I felt like a loser by comparison.

    So my next step was that I really wanted to be on one of these “top photoblogger” lists. A shallow goal I know, but my goal nonetheless.

    So I started to visit as many other photo blogs on a daily basis, giving them comments only to hope that they would comment back to me. I was quite sly, I tried to give them enough of a decent comment (3-4 sentences), so it would look like I showed interest in their world, whereas in reality I just wanted them to “follow me back.”

    I was lucky that I worked in IT as a student in college at the time (I was around 19 years old) and had several hours to browse the internet when nothing was going on in the office (most of the time).

    So I started to go down this rabbit hole, chasing fame. It was damn shallow, and never really brought  me any real joy.

    I started to also have higher expectations. For example, my new baseline for my happiness would be 5 comments on a photo I uploaded. If I got any less than 5 comments, I would feel depressed (why doesn’t anyone love me?) If I got more than 5 coments, I would be overjoyed and then seek to get 10 comments as a new baseline.

    During this period in my life, I never made any top photoblog lists, but it taught me an important lesson in life: chasing fame is so damn shallow, exhausting, and never brings you any real satisfaction or happiness in life. I was so much happier when I was shooting for myself, and just enjoying myself, rather than seeking external means of happiness and recognition.

    Killing the Facebook news feed

    About 2 years ago, I was in Istanbul with my buddy Charlie Kirk. We were chilling at his flat, and about to sleep, I was bored and surfing Facebook on my phone. I was mindlessly scrolling through my Facebook news feed, and saw all of my friends living their amazing lives. Some of them were buying new BMW’s, some of them buying new homes, and one of them was sipping a Corona in the Caribbeans.

    I saw the selfie of him drinking the Corona, and I felt jealous. I’ve never been to the Caribbeans, and the weather there looked so lovely. I felt the negative sting of envy pervade my body.

    At that moment, I mentally slapped myself and told myself, “Wait hold up Eric, why are you jealous? You are in Istanbul, you unappreciative bastard. Don’t you know how many people would die to be in your shoes? Why are you jealous of your friend in the Caribbeans?”

    At that moment I knew I had to change something, and that social media was kind of fucking up my perception of reality, and wasn’t good for my mental health.

    The next morning, I installed the “Facebook News Feed Eradicator” plugin for Google Chrome. I would have to say, this is the single thing I have done in my life which has made me 80% happier in life (by cutting my feelings of envy from my friends on Facebook).

    Think about it: social media is a distorted view of reality. People only upload the highlights of their life, and Facebook curates those highlights. 99% of the time, people have boring and mundane things happening. But through your Facebook news feed, you assume everyone else is having the time of their lives, while you sit at home, eating ice cream, alone and depressed, watching another episode of “Game of Thrones” on Netflix.

    Not only that, but I hate seeing “pity parties” or people bitching or moaning about negative things on Facebook. It ends up negatively coloring my thoughts, and I let other people’s drama negatively influence my life and thoughts. I have enough problems and mental stresses and anxieties in my life, why should I take on even more drama from others– especially when my life has so many problems already?

    So anyways, going back to this Facebook news feed eradicator. It is quite brilliant. Instead of showing you the Facebook news feed (which is a distraction and horrible for your mental health and well-being, it will show you an inspirational quote. Such as:

    “Rule your mind, or it will rule you.” – Horace

    You can still use all the functions of Facebook to keep in touch, without the drama of the news feed.

    “But what if I still want to keep in touch with friends?”

    You still can. Now if I want to cyber-stalk my friends on Facebook, I will go directly to their personal page and see their updates. Better yet; I will send them a message on Whatsapp or Facebook messenger and just say hello. Better yet (if I live close to them), I will ask them for a coffee or dinner.

    I think ultimately social media is only useful for one thing: for bridging people from the online to the offline. Some of my best friends I have met online, and ended up spending time with them in “real life”. You can never replace face-to-face communication (Facetime and Skype video come close, but not close enough).

    Why I am following 0 people on Instagram

    Another experiment I started 3 months ago: I unfollowed everybody on Instagram.

    To be honest, I never spent much time on Instagram on the “news feed” as well. I found it to be a massive distraction, and the addictiveness of Instagram is worse than crack cocaine. I would be working on something “important”, somehow fall into Instagram, and for the next hour or so, mindlessly scrolling through images, and liking photos. I felt like a rat pulling a lever to get a hit of dopamine, hundreds (if not) thousands of times.

    Another problem: I was following close to 600 people, many of them random people I didn’t know. The problem I made was when I first joined Instagram, I automatically followed people based on who was a contact on my phone or Twitter. Of course I followed a ton of people in the beginning to show them I was also on Instagram, and with the hope they would follow me back.

    But once again, there was too much clutter. I was sick of seeing dog photos, cappuccino photos, and what people were having for breakfast. Sure a few decent street photos here and there, but I started to get the feeling that people would upload photos on Instagram on a daily basis (for the sake of uploading and getting lots of likes), rather than sharing their best work. Instagram was the McDonalds of social media; quantity over quality.

    So I wondered to myself, “What would happen if I followed everyone on Instagram, similarly to how I installed the Facebook News Feed Eradicator? Would I be less distracted? Would I be happier? What if people thought I was a douchebag (like Kanye West who only follows 1 person on Twitter)? What if people get offended that I unfollow them? What would people think? Would people suddenly start unfollowing me? What kind of explanation could I make?”

    In the spirit of being a sociologist (and enjoying “social experiments”) I decided to make myself a test subject. So I thought “Fuck it, I’ll just try it out and see what happens.”

    At first, it took forever to unfollow everybody. I wish Instagram installed a massive “unfollow all” option (but of course this is against their financial and advertising ideals). Anyways, after I unfollowed everybody, I did end up pissing off a few people (some of them really good friends). I felt massively guilty, because they asked me– “Why would you unfollow me? I thought we were friends.” And I thought they would understand, after all, weren’t we still friends in “real life?” I apologized massively, and genuinely did feel guilty. I tried to explain that I was trying this “experiment” — and they told me, “Well, I hope your experiment went well, because it cost you a friend.” Ouch.

    I then really started to question myself: was this really a good idea? I decided to carry on, because I do believe that you can still be real friends with someone (even though you unfollow them on social media). Even scarier: some people have applications on their phone which notify you once someone “unfollows” you on Instagram. I’m not sure why people would have this application, as it would cause massive depression every time someone unfollows you.

    Interestingly enough, I did read one study that “unfriending” someone on Facebook is equivalent to telling them in real life that you are no longer friends. It is one of the worst social “faux pas” you can make.

    But going back to unfollowing everyone on Instagram: it was probably one of the (second) best things I did for my mental health. I suddenly felt much more focused, in-control of my own life, and felt like I was able to get off the social media rat race and treadmill.

    I wrote in another article that one of the things I try to do is uninstall one application from my smartphone a day. This also means that I try to be active on one fewer social media platform a day. There are loads of social media platforms out there for photography: Facebook, Instagram, Google+, 500px, EyeEm, Tumblr, Flickr, and probably hundreds I don’t even know of. People always ask me which ones they should be on. Now I’m starting to realize that less is more; the fewer social networks you are active on, the better.

    In-fact, the only social media I am still “kind of” active on is Instagram. I like sharing photo book recommendations on it (using the #buybooksnotgear hashtag), as well as random life updates or street photography tips. But at the same time, I’m thinking of also trying to cut Instagram out of my life.

    The irony of social media is that no matter how many likes/favorite you get, it is never enough. I remember when my goal on social media was to get 100 likes. Then it became 200 likes. Then 500 likes.

    Now I get (on popular posts) 1000+ likes. The funny thing is now whenever I get anything less than 1000 likes, I feel like shit. For example I recently shared something on Instagram that got (only) 500 likes. I felt like a failure by comparison.

    And what is really a “like” anyways? It is just someone tapping a little heart icon on your photo. It doesn’t mean anything. When you die, you can’t take your “likes” with you. Your “likes” won’t keep you warm at night, or pay your electric bills. Does anyone really want etched on their gravestone: “Here lies John, he had 1,000,000 followers on Instagram.”

    Not only that, but there will always be a “new” social media platform. Remember when Myspace was going to conquer the world? Then Facebook took over? Now Facebook is for old people, and now everyone is flocking to Instagram and Snapchat. And after Instagram and Snapchat, there will be something else.

    Will anybody care about how many social media follower you had in 200 years? Is the “internet” still going to be around as we know it? It might be Google brain telepathy integrated into people’s minds or whatever. But all the stress, effort, and ass-kissing we do in social media would have been a massive waste of time.

    The solution

    The solution to all this social media bullshit and obsession with likes,  favorites, comments, and followers?

    Disconnect.

    Take a break from social media. Start “fasting” from social media.

    Apparently “intermittent fasting” is proven to provide a lot of health benefits to people (rather than regularly consuming food, it is better to remove some meals at random). So now, I never eat breakfast (only coffee), have a small lunch (preferably only vegetables), and then splurge on meat in the evenings. And on some days, I will also skip lunch (and deal with mild hunger pangs until dinner). Other days I will try to go vegan the entire day. Other days I will eat massive fatty steaks for the entire day.

    But anyways, I give you a challenge: try to go 30 days and abstain from social media. Completely cut it out of your diet. Uninstall Facebook from your phone, and install the “Facebook news feed eradicator” on your browser (if you use Google Chrome). Or find some other sort of website blocker plugin (“StayFocusd” for Chrome, or “Wastenotime” for Safari). Try unfollowing everyone on Instagram, and after 30 days, re-follow those who you really care about. Also try to go without uploading any photos to social media (refrain from uploading to Flickr).

    I can guarantee that if you take a break from social media for 30 days, you will be much mentally healthier and happier. You will have less stress, anxiety, jealousy, envy, and dissatisfaction in your life. Not only that, but you will learn to not become distracted with your photography projects, and learn how to make photos that please you, not others.

    I will do this with you. I won’t upload anything to Instagram for the next 30 days as well (I just uninstalled it from my phone). I am lucky enough that I shoot film, so I have nothing to show anyways (until I get my film processed and scanned, which might take me another few months). I hope to print more photography books or zines, and not feel rushed to always upload stuff on social media to feel loved and appreciated.

    Remember, happiness in life is about subtraction, not addition. So take out social media from your diet, enjoy your fast, and see what benefits it brings you.

    I know this will be tough friend, but be strong. Life is all about experimentation, so make a pledge and let’s all do this together!

    Love,

    Eric

    Written @ my friend Liz’s house in Leeds, England. 10:25am, with a nice Americano (abstained from coffee yesterday, I feel much better). Thursday, Aug 20, 2015.

    My workspace
    My workspace

     

    I had a brilliant fish and chips in Whitby yesterday, at “Magpie cafe” (the haddock was bigger than my head) and enjoyed a beautiful drive through the seaside. I highly recommend those visiting England to check out places outside London, and enjoy the countryside. Great for the soul.

    Best fish and chips ever, with Liz at "Magpie Cafe" in Whitby, England.
    Best fish and chips ever, with Liz at “Magpie Cafe” in Whitby, England.
    Drive through the countryside
    Drive through the countryside

     

    Currently reading: “Dialogues: the complete collection of Seneca” on the Kindle — brilliant, and only 99 cents.

    Also two of my favorite black and white photo books: “Gypsies” and “Love on the West Bank”:

    Two must-own black and white photoboks
    Two must-own black and white photoboks
  • Kill Your Babies

    Kill Your Babies

    8675029335_4a2c7fd6f4_o

    Read this as a Google Doc or download a PDF.

    I have a problem. I often get too attached to my photos, especially my bad photos. I look at all of my photos like my children, and I have a hard time deciding which to keep and which to ditch.

    One mantra I have always tried to remind myself is: “Kill your babies.”

    The problem is that our photos are like our babies, and the idea of getting rid of them (especially “killing them”) is emotionally painful. And if the phrase “kill your babies” is too graphic for you, I recommend the British saying, “Kill your darlings.”

    The problem in today’s society is that we have an overabundance of stuff, information, and especially images. Every minute there are hundreds and thousands of being uploaded to the internet. And 99% of these images are just junk or noise.

    The solution? Before you decide to upload an image, think of why you are uploading the image. Is it because you are trying to show a beautiful masterpiece that will bring value to someone else’s word? Or because you are trying to get more “favorites” and likes?

    Killing my own babies

    I recently went through my own baby-killing session. I went to my website splash page and edited down my splash page to my 5 favorite images, all of which I felt had some sort of consistency and emotion to them.

    I also edited down my portfolio from 6 projects down to 3. It was really difficult to do, but my good friend Diarmuid McDonald helped me be brutally honest over some nice Turkish food. I once told him to edit down his entire Flickr down to 5 images, so I had to practice what I preached.

    I then went home, took out the axe, and started to remove tons of my photos from my website portfolio and Flickr. At first it was very painful, but by the end, it was insanely refreshing. It felt almost if a huge weight was taken off my shoulders, and I looked at all of my images with admiration. They were all strong and had a good cohesion and style to them.

    It is rare you make a good photograph

    The photographer I am trying to imitate the most at the moment is Josef Koudelka. He is a photographer who has been shooting for over 50 years, and has dedicated his life to 3 main projects: his “Gypsies” project, his “Exiles” project, and his new panoramic landscape work. All 3 of these projects are powerful, emotional, memorable, and iconic.

    I want to be like Koudelka. I want to aim to create at least 1 strong body of work before I die. Less is more.

    Remember, street photography is hard. Damn hard. The most difficult genre of photography out there. It is very rare that you make a good photograph. If you can even get 1 good street photo a month, 12 decent shots in a year, and 1 truly great image in a year, you’re doing really well. Bruce Gilden even admits only taking 1 photo he really likes for every 50 rolls of film.

    Keeping photos for yourself

    Just because you “kill your babies” doesn’t mean you have to delete the photos or throw away the negatives. Rather, what I encourage is to kill your photos that are public and not very strong.

    I have some images that have personal significance to me, but I know that they aren’t necessarily good photos. So I keep them on my hard drive for myself, print them out and put them into photo albums (for myself and family), and not share them in public.

    Even another practical tip: when I recently edited down my Flickr down to my best 20 images (from 9 years of shooting street photography), I simply marked the weaker shots to “private.” So I still have the images just in-case, but I don’t need to clutter my site.

    “But what if I want to get feedback on my photos? Isn’t sharing them on social media a good idea?”

    That is a good idea if you don’t know anybody in-person you can share them with. But I have even a better method I like to do with my buddy Josh White, Neil Ta, and Charlie Kirk: I will send them a photograph that I am not sure about, and simply ask them: “Keep or ditch?” I will also encourage them to be “brutally honest” and help me “kill my babies.” They then have no problem taking out the axe and doing the dirty work for me.

    Apparently even Steve McCurry didn’t really like his “Afghan Girl” photograph. He shot several of her, and actually preferred another shot. But his editor told him that the (now) iconic image was the best. The editor knew better than McCurry, and now it is one of the most famous images in the world.

    Oftentimes I don’t know what my best images are, because I am too emotionally attached to them. I know too much of the backstory behind my images, and sometimes I had a very engaging conversation with the person. This confuses me, and impairs my judgement.

    This is one thing I love about shooting film: I am an impatient bastard (I’m the guy who complains when Google Maps takes longer than 2 seconds to load), and shooting film forces me to be more patient and let my images “marinate” and sit for a long time (before I  judge them).

    Recently my last big batch of film I developed was 164 rolls of film. I waited an entire year (not out of discipline but out of pure laziness and business of my travel schedule). What it taught me was that I was able to “kill my babies” more brutally, because I forgot shooting the majority of the images. So it was almost like I was editing someone else’s images.

    It is always easier to kill someone else’s babies than your own. Furthermore, it is actually easier to work on longer-term projects, without being disappointed on a daily basis with digital photography.

    I have nothing against digital photography. In-fact, I prefer the convenience and the cost (film is damn expensive). But the thing is that shooting digital makes me miserable. Why? Whenever I go out and shoot for an entire day, it is very unlikely I will get a good shot in a day. So when I look through all the images, I am massively disappointed. But with film, I only see my photos one every 6 months or once a year. And over that period of time, I am bound to at least get 1-2 shots I’m really proud of.

    This is another philosophical issue I am dealing with: I technically know that shooting digital will make me a better photographer. Also all of my recent shots I like are shot from a digital Ricoh GR.

    However, shooting film gives me more peace of mind, zen, less disappointment, and therefore more happiness.

    So what do I do? Do I am to become a better photographer, or to just be happier?

    Granted these things aren’t mutually exclusive. I can do both at the same time. Perhaps in the future I can try not to “chimp” as much when shooting digital, or to treat digital like film (not look at my photos often, maybe only one a month).

    Removing your ego from your photos

    Another practical tip when it comes down to “killing your babies” or editing down your portfolio: remember, you are not your photos. Not only that, but your photos have no feelings. If you decide to “ditch” a shot, your photos don’t care. If anything, they are happy to be released once again into the ether or the digital cyberspace they came from.

    So when people critique or criticize your photos, they aren’t criticizing you. They are criticizing your photos.

    I often get criticized for the writing on the blog, but I also try to remind myself: people are criticizing my writing, not me as a human being. They are different.

    Even when people criticize my actions, I try not to get offended. I remind myself: I am not my actions. I therefore try to change my actions in the future.

    Killing your ego is one of the most difficult things, something that take a lifetime. Your ego is that little voice in your head that never shuts the fuck up, and is always criticizing you. This is why studying meditation and Zen Buddhism can be so useful. If you’re interested in learning more about Zen and Street Photography, download my free e-book: “Zen in the Art of Street Photography.”

    Moving forward

    So moving forward, I am still trying to figure out my life and my photography.

    Currently, the only camera I own is a film Leica and 35mm lens. Everyday I need to fight the urges of GAS (Gear Acquisition Syndrome). Everyday I don’t feel inspired, I think buying a new camera will magically make me more inspired. That is bullshit, it never does.

    What I always try to do is whenever I crave a new camera, I buy a new book instead. Some books on my radar currently include Sergio Larrain, “Songbook” by Alec Soth, and a new personal favorite: “For every minute you are angry you lose sixty seconds of happiness” (you can see the project online here). Remember: Buy books,  not gear.

    Another thing I’ve been thinking about: there is so much depressing photos online of people and society. I want to start taking happier photos. Photos that are positive and encourage people, rather than capturing alienation and confusion.

    Anyways, I don’t have anything left to say. I started to get another weird reaction from drinking coffee again (throat swelling). Instead today I got an Almond milk Chai Latte which was lovely too.

    Godspeed,

    Eric

    Written @ ExMouth Coffee in London, 11:26am, 8/18/2015